Engineering: Graphics

engineering
graphics
SCAN. STUDY. SCORE.

1. The size of A3 sheet as
(a) 210 X 297
(b) 297 X 420
(c) 594 X 841
(d) 420 X 594
Ans: (b)
2. Hidden lines are drawn as
(a) Dashed narrow lines
(b) Dashed wide lines
(c) long-dashed dotted wide line
(d) long-dashed double dotted wide line
Ans: (a)
3. Match the following
(a) - (1) Leader line
(b) - (2) Centre line
(c) - (3) Visible line
(d) - (4) Hidden line
Ans: (a)-(3), (b)- (4), (c)-(1), (d)-(2)
4. If an object lies in third quadrant, its position with respect to reference

planes will be
(a) Infront of V.P, above H.P
(b) Behind V.P., above H.P.
(c) Behind V.P., below H.P.
(d) Infront of V.P., below H.P.
Ans: (c)
5. If an object lies in fourth quadrant, its position with respect to reference
planes will be
(a) infront of V.P, above H.P
(d) infront of V.P., below H.P.
Ans: (d)
6. If an object lies in first quadrant, its position with respect to reference planes
will be
Ans: (a)
7. If an object lies in second quadrant, its position with respect to reference
planes will be
Ans: (b)
8. The height, width, and depth of an object can be shown with a minimum of
how many orthographic projection views?
(a) 5
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 6.
Ans: (b)
9. Which of the following pairs of orthographic views show the height
dimension
(a) Left side and front view
(b) Right side and front view
(c) Top and front view
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Ans: (d)
10.Draw the projections of the following points on a common reference line.
(a) M, 35 mm behind VP and 20 mm below HP
(b) N, 40 mm infront of VP and 30 mm above HP
(c) O, 50 mm behind VP and 15 mm above HP
(d) P, 40 mm below HP and on VP
(e) Q, 30 mm infront of VP and 50 mm below HP
(f) R, 35 mm behind VP and on HP
11.The projections of the different points are shown in the figure. Define the
position of the points in relation to the reference planes. The distances
marked are in millimeters.
Ans; P- 40 mm below HP and 30 mm infront of VP
Q- 20 mm above HP and 40 mm behind VP
S- 18 mm behind VP and 40 mm below HP
T- 30 mm above HP and 30 mm behind VP
N- 30 mm infront of VP and 25 mm above HP
V- 20 mm below HP and 20 mm infront of VP
12. Draw the projections of a straight line AB of 50 mm long when the end A is
20mm above HP and 25 mm infront of VP. The angle of inclinations 45
degree to HP and the line is parallel to VP.
13.Write down the scale factor for drawing the isometric projection ………..
Ans: (0.816)
14. Draw the symbol for first and third angle projection.
15.Axonometric, oblique and perspective sketches show objects in a _______

manner.
a) Orthographic b) Axonometric c) Oblique d) Pictorial
Ans:- d)
16.If a client of yours is having difficulty visualizing a design, what type of

drawing would be the easiest to understand?
A)
axonometric
B)
three-view orthographic
C)
one-vew orthographic
D) Biometric
Ans - A
2
17. Which of the following is not a pictorial drawing?
A)
isometric
B)
multiview
C)
perspective
D) Axonometric
Ans – B
3
18. Which of the following projection methods does not use projectors
perpendicular to the projection plane?
A)
isometric
B)
orthographic
C)
oblique
D) Axonometric
Ans - C
4
19. A circle will appear on an isometric drawing as a(n) __________ .
A)
ellipse
B)
cycloid
C)
circle
D) Parabola
Ans - C
5
20. An axonometric drawing which has two axes divided by equal angles is:
A)
dimetric
B)
trimetric
C)
orthographic
D) Isometric
Ans – A
6
21. An axonometric drawing which has all three axes divided by equal angles is:
A)
dimetric
B)
trimetric
C)
orthographic
D) Isometric
Ans - D
7
22.In a trimetric drawing, the relationship of the angle between axes to each
other is:
A)
three are equal
B)
two are equal
C)
three are unequal
D) none of the above
Ans - C
8
23. In an isometric sketch of a cube:
A)
the frontal face appears in its true shape
B)
the receding axes are at 45 degrees to the horizontal
C)
all faces are equally distorted
D) only the depth distances must be reduced
Ans - C
9
24. In isometric drawings:
A)
Two axes are perpendicular
B) True measurements can be made only along or parallel to the isometric
axes
C)
All faces are unequally distorted
D) None of the above
Ans - B
1
0 25. In an axonometric drawing, the projection rays are drawn _________ to
each other and _______ to the plane of projection.
A)
parallel.....oblique
B)
oblique.....parallel
C)
parallel.....perpendicular
D) parallel....parallel
Ans – C
26. Non-isometric lines are located and sketched how?

11
A) They are drawn parallel to the isometric axis.
B)
They are measured using the angle from the multiview.
C)
They are measured using a non-isometric template.
D) They are located by determining the endpoints of the non-isometric
line.
Ans - D
1
2 27. In an oblique sketch of a cube:
A)
the frontal face appears in its true shape
B)
both receding axes are at 30 degrees to the horizontal
C)
all faces are equally distorted
D) the depth distances must be reduced
Ans - A
1
3 28. In an oblique drawing, all of the following angles are commonly used for
drawing the depth axis, except:
A)
30°
B)
45°
C)
60°
D) 90°
Ans - D
1
4 29. In an oblique drawing, the projection rays are drawn _________ to each
other and _______ to the plane of projection.
A)
oblique.....oblique
B)
oblique.....parallel
C)
parallel.....oblique
D) parallel....parallel
Ans - C
1 
5 30. Which type of perspective view represents an adult viewer looking at an
object on a high kitchen shelf?
A)
bird's eye view
B)
worm's eye view
C)
human's eye view
D) ground's eye view
Ans - B
1 
6 
31.Which type of perspective view represents an adult viewer looking at an
object on the ground?
A)
bird's eye view
B)
worm's eye view
C)
human's eye view
D) ground's eye view
Ans - C
1
7 32. In a perspective drawing, the object always touches the:
A)
ground line
B)
horizon line
C)
measuring line
D) station point
Ans - A
33. The type of projection when projectors are parallel to each other, but are at
an angle other than 90 degrees to the plane of projection is:
a) Perpendicular Projection b) Oblique Projection c) Aesthetic Projection
d) Angular Projection Ans. B)
34. This line pattern is composed of three dashes, one long dash on each end
with a short dash in the middle:
a) Object b) Hidden c) Center d) Phantom Ans. C)

35. If a plane is parallel to the plane of projection, it appears:
a) in its true size b) as a line or edge c) foreshortened d) as an oblique

surface Ans. A)
36. Architectural drafters generally prefer to use ________ drawings to help

illustrate 3-dimensional views of a structure.
a) isometric b) orthographic c) auxiliary d) perspective Ans. D)
37. This type of axonometric drawing has equal foreshortening along two axis
directions and a different amount on the third axis:
a) isometric b) dimetric c) trimetric d) multiview Ans.B)
38. This type of section is limited by a break line:
A. Removed section
B. Revolved section
C. Broken-out section
D. Half section Ans.C)
39. This is a thin solid line directing attention to a note or dimension and starting
with an arrowhead or dot:
A. Dimension line
B. Extension line
C. Leader
D. Specification Ans.C)
40. Baseline dimensions are referenced from a common geometric feature known
as a ________.
A. edge
B. corner
C. datum
D. point of reference Ans.C)
41. In the section view, the areas that would have been in actual contact with the
cutting plane are shown with:
A. A cutting plane line
B. Section lining
C. Visible lines
D. Lines and arrows Ans.B)
42. In architectural drawing ________ are often used to illustrate and detail
structural components.
A. Foundation beam detail sections
B. Wall sections
C. Building sections
D. All of the above Ans. D)
43. The ________ is a standard element of a section view in a technical drawing.
A. Cutting Plane line
B. Section lines
C. Material hatch pattern
D. All of the above Ans. D)
44. Hidden lines are drawn as
(a) dashed narrow lines
(b) dashed wide lines
(c) long-dashed dotted wide line
(d) long-dashed double dotted wide line Ans. A)
45. Line composed of closely and evenly spaced short dashes in a drawing
represents
(a) visible edges
(b) hidden edges
(c) hatching
(d) pitch circle of gears Ans: (B)

46. The recommended method of dimensioning a sphere with diameter 80 mm
is
(a) 80фS
(b) ф80S
(c) S80ф
(d) Sф80 Ans: (d)
47. When an object is cut by a section plane parallel to H.P and perpendicular to
V.P, then the sectional view of the object is obtained in
(a) top view
(b) front view
(c) left side view
(d) right side view Ans: (a)
48. All of the following statements about multiview drawings are true, except:
A) each view is a 3-D pictorial image
B) based on orthographic projection
C) at least two views of the object
D) views are defined by planes of projection Ans.D)

49. What two types of projections give a pictorial view of the object without
convergence?
A) orthographic and perspective
B) oblique and axonometric
C) perspective and oblique
D) isometric and orthographic Ans.B)
50. Inclined planes in a three-view drawing will appear as:
A) two surfaces and one edge
B) two edges and one surface
C) three edges
D) foreshortened in each view Ans.A)
51. The position of a point is in 4th quadrant. It’s position in front and top view will
be
(ans:c)
a. above and reference line b. both above reference line
c. both below reference line d. below and above reference line
52. The top, front, and bottom views align in this manner:
(ans:b)
a. Horizontally b. Vertically
c. According to the planar views d. Parallel to the frontal plane
53. In isometric drawings;

(ans:b)
a. Two axes are perpendicular
b. True measurements can be made only along or parallel to the isometric axes
c. All faces are unequally distorted
d. None of the above
54. Which type of line is particular to section drawings

(ans:d)
a. Break lines b. Phantom lines
c. Extension lines d. Cutting plane lines
55. Which type of line is a part of a dimension

(ans:c)
a. Break lines b. Phantom lines
c. Extension lines d. Cutting plane lines
56. Which line type is thin and light

(ans:c)
a. visible lines b. center lines

c. construction lines d. all of the above
57. Lettering on a drawing sheet should have

Ans.A)
a) all alphabets in capital letters
b) all alphabets in small letters
c) In a sentence only first alphabet is capital letter
d) In a sentence only abbreviations are capital letters
58. A circle will appear on an isometric drawing as a(n) ______
A) ellipse B) cycloid
C) circle D) parabola
ANS: (A)
59) What is the projection of the point A

(A) (B) (C)
ANS: (C)
60) Which of the following is true for a line inclined to HP and parallel to VP
A) top view shows true length B) front view shows true length
C) side view shows true length
ANS: (B)
61)
Which one of them is the side view of the above isometric projection?
(A) (B) (C)
ANS: (B)
62)
Which is the correct method of dimensioning?

A) first figure
B) second figure
C) both first and second figure
ANS: (B)
63) Which quadrant does the point lie if it is above HP and behind VP
A) I quadrant
B) II quadrant
C) III quadrant
D) IV quadrant
ANS: (B)
64)
Which shows first angle projection?
A) both first and second
B) first
C) second
ANS: (B)
65) Lettering on a drawing sheet should have

(A) all alphabets in capital letters
(B) all alphabets in small letters
(c) In a sentence only first alphabet in capital letter
(d) In a sentence only abbreviations are capital letter
ANS: (A)
66) Which is the top view of the figure given below?
A) B) C)
ANS: (B)
67) When an object is cut by a section plane parallel to H.P and perpendicular to
V.P, then the sectional view of the object is obtained in
(a) top view
(b) front view
(c) left side view
(d) right side view
ANS: (A)
68) In an isometric view, the angles of the object shown with arrows are always
going to be
A) 30 degrees C) 45 degrees
C) 90 degrees D) 75 degrees
ANS: (A)
69) This symbol indicates what?
A) diameter B) no
C) hole center
ANS: (A)
70) On a drawing, full scale would be noted as
A) 1:2 B) 10:1
C) 2:1 D)1:1
ANS: (D)
71) Which of the lines below is used to indicated “Hidden lines”
(A) (C.)
(B) (D).
.
ANS: (B)
72)
The orthogonal projection according to the arrow’s direction would be:
ANS: (d)
73) If an object lies in the second quadrant, its position with respect to the
reference planes will be:
a) a)Behind V.P, below H.P

b) Above H.P, In front of V.P,
c) Behind V.P, above H.P
d) Below H.P, In front of V.P
Ans: (c)
74) In an isometric projection, the included angle between the edges of a cube is
a) 30º
b) 60º
c) 90º
d) 120º
Ans: (d)
75) In which of the following cases, the true length of line may not not obtained:
a) Line perpendicular to H.P and parallel to V.P

b) Line parallel to both H.P and V.P
c) Line inclined to H. P and parallel to V.P
d) None of the above
Ans: C)
76) Line consisting of alternate long and short dashes represents:
a) Cutting plane
b) Centre line
c) Hidden line
d) Phantom line
Ans: b
77) A circular arc is dimensioned in the view where you see its true shape by
giving the value for its:
a) Diameter
b) Arc length
c) Radius
d) Chord length
Ans: a
78) What type of line has precedence over all other types of lines?
(a) hidden line
(b) centre line
(c) visible line
(d) none of the above
Ans: c
79) In isometric drawings:
a) Two axes are perpendicular
b) All faces are equally distorted
c) True measurements can be made only along or parallel to the isometric axes
Ans: b
80) When a surface of an object is inclined to a projection plane, it will appear in
the view as:
a) foreshortened
b) in true size and shape
c) as a line
d) as a point Ans. (a)
81) The given figure represents:
a) third angle projection
b) first angle projection
c) perspective view
d)None of these
Ans:b
82) Which of the following is not a standard drawing paper size??
a) 841 x 1159
b) 420 x 594
c) 210 x 297
d) 120 x 210 Ans. (d)
83) Which of the following represents partial or interrupted views, cuts and
sections, if the limit is not a line or symmetry line.?
a) Continuous narrow lines with zigzag
b) Long dashed narrow dotted lines
c) Continuous wide lines with zigzag
c) Long dashed wide dotted lines Ans. (a)
84) From the adjacent figure, state which of

the following is true :
a) a’b’=ab=Apparent Length
b) a’b’ = ab = True length
c) a’b’ = Apparent Length, ab = True length
d) ab = Apparent length, a’b’ = True length
Ans. D)
85) Which of the following sectional views are right ones and wrong ones,
respectively ?
a) b – correct; c, d, e, f – wrong
b) b,c – correct; d,e,f – wrong
c) b,c,d – correct; e,f – wrong
d) All are correct. Ans: b)
86) Which of the following lines are used in revolved sections??
a) Phantom lines
b) leader lines
c) Hidden lines
d) Break lines Ans: d)
87) Which of the following is used to separate the halves of a half section?
a) Leader lines
b) Break lines
c) Half section lines
d) centre lines Ans: d)

88) Projection of a solid object onto an imaginary plane to regain the complete
information regarding the size and true shape of object is called ____________
Ans. Auxiliary Plane
89) Which one of the following is not a standard reduction scale factor for
technical drawings (IS 46 – 1988) ???
a) 1:20
b) 1:30
c) 1:50
d) 1:100 Ans. (b)
90) Which of the following is the right type of dimensioning to be followed ?
(1) (2)
a) (1)
b) (2)
c) Both (1) and (2)
d) Either (1) and (2) Ans.b)

ENGINEERING DRAWING
01) What is one of the reasons why we do sketches?
a) Helps minimize errors on the final drawing. b) Makes us feel good to be able to share with others.
c) Helps us estimate the costs of a project. d) Allows us time to get our thoughts in order.
02) When something is drawn in a 1:4 scale, it means

a) unit in real life = 4 units on paper b) unit on paper = 4 units in real life.
c) 4 unit on paper = 2 units in real life d) all of the above
03) Which of the lines below is used to indicated “Hidden lines”

a) b)
c) d)
04) A drawing generally shows what views

a) front, right side, top and isometric b) front, left side, top and isometric.
c) isometric, left side and top d) left side, bottom and top
05) What is the labeled line in the drawing below called?
a) hidden line b) extension line

c) focus line d) dimension line
06) This symbol - ø - indicates what?

a) diameter b) hole center c) no d) radius
07) What is an arc?

a) An arc is part of a triangle. b) An arc is part of a circle.
c) An arc is part of a hexagon. d) An arc is part of a square.
08) In an isometric view, the angles of the object shown with arrows are always going to be
a) 30° b) 45° c)90° d) 75°
09) The included angle of a hexagon is

a) 30° b) 60° c) 120° d) 150°
10) If an object lies in third quadrant, its position with respect to reference planes will be
a) infront of V.P, above H.P b) behind V.P., above H.P. c) behind V.P., below H.P. d) infront of V.P., below H.P.
11) Lettering on a drawing sheet should have

a) all alphabets in capital letters b) ) all alphabets in small letters.
c) In a sentence only first alphabet in capital letter d) In a sentence only abbreviations are capital letter
12)A drafter helps in drawing

a) Parallel and perpendicular lines b) Concentric circles.
Prepared by: K.Suresh Kumar Page 1

c) Smooth curves d) All the above
13) Which of the following pencil leads is hardest?

a)HB b) H c)B d)F
14)Which of the following purposes is not served by a divider?

a) Divide lines or curves into a number of equal parts
b) Transfer measurement from one part of the drawing to another part
c) Make full size, reduced size or enlarged size drawing
d) Step-off a series of equal distances on the drawing
15)Parallel lines can be drawn with the help of

a) Mini-drafter b) T-square c) Pair of set squares d)All of these
16)The space for text on a drawing sheet do provide the following information
a) Name of the company, title of the drawing, scale and angle of projection used
b) Explanation of special symbols, abbreviations and units of dimensions
c) Instruction related to material, surface treatment and assembly placing
d) Reference made to supplementary drawings and other documents
16)"A" series of paper has length to width ratio of approximately

a) 3:2 b) √3:1 c) √2:1 d)5:3
17) Extension arm used with engineering compass to facilitate

a) To draw circles of larger diameter b) To increase the gripping arm
c) To adjust distance between the legs d) To increase accuracy
18) In the engineering system of paper sizes, which of the following is “A2” size?
a) 841 mm × 1189 mm b) 594 mm × 841 mm
c) 420 mm × 594 mm d) 210 mm × 297 mm
19) Revision tables on a drawing sheet provide the following information

a) Designation of revision b) Date of revision
c) Initials of the person responsible for revision d) All the above
20) Which of the following is preferred containing the statement "All dimensions arein millimeters unless
otherwise specified"
a) Frames and Borders b)Title block c) Item List d)Revision Table
21) The primary unit of measurement for engineering drawings and design in the mechanical industries is the
a) millimeter b)centimeter c) meter d)kilometer
22) This type of solid has two bases that are parallel equal polygons:
a) pyramid b) prism c) cone d)torus
23) what-is-a-set-square-used-for
a) Drawing parallel prisms b) Drawing parallel lines and perpendicular lines
c) Drawing parallel triangles d) Drawing parallel circles and arcs
24) What BIS stands for

a)Bureau of Indian standards b) British indian standard
c) Board of Indian standards d) Bachelor of international standards

25) The indian standard for engineering drawing is
a)IS 68-1984 b) SP:46-1998
c) ISI 62-1987 d) ISO 92-1986
26) The dividers are used to

a) Divide straight or curved lines into desired number of equal parts.
b) Set off distances from the scale to the drawings.
c) Transfer measurements from one part of the drawing to another.
d) all of the above.
27) Name a single instrument which can serve the purpose of T-Square, Set Square, Protractor and Scale?
a) divider b)mini drafter c) drawing board d)binoculars
28) Why scaling is needed in technical drawings

a) It is an internationally accepted rule
b) Drawing too big or too small objects is difficult to accommodate in a drawing sheet.
c) Scaling makes drawing beautiful.
29) If a line intersects a circle at two points, not passing through the center, the linesegment inside the circle is
referred as
a) Radial line b) Chord c) Quadrant d) Sequent
30)To draw perpendicular from a given point P on line XY, name the point where thecompass needle shall be
placed first.
a) P b) X or Y c) Any convenient point along XY d)A point near the midpoint of PX and PY
31) Line XY is to be divided into 12 equal parts by geometric construction. Which ofthe following statements
concerning this procedure is correct?
a) Ray line PY, drawn from Y, is the same length as XY
b) A compass should be set to spread equal to one twelfth of the length of XY
c) A line should be drawn from X to the 12th interval on ray line PY
d) The acute angle formed by XY and ray line PY should be 30° or less
32) The included angle of a pentagon is

a) 68º b) 72º c) 108º d)112º
33) An area of 36 square kilometer is represented by 144 square centimeter on amap. What is the R.F.?
a)1/4 b)1/2 c) 1/5000 d)1/50000
34) Diagonal of a square can be measured by a

a) Plain scale b)Diagonal scale c) Vernier scale d)All of these
35) The full form of R.F. is

a) Reducing fraction b)Representative fraction c)Reduction factor d)Representative factor
36) The unit of R.F. is

a) Cubic Centimeter b)Square Centimeter c)Centimeter d)None of these
37) As per BIS the size of B1 drawing board is

a) 1250 x 900 b)900 x 650 c)650 x 500 d)500 x 350

38) mini drafter is used for drawing
a) Horizontal & Vertical lines b)inclined lines c)perpendicular lines d)all of them
39) The no of divisions on a protractor are

a) 60 b)90 c)360 d)180
40) When two angles are put together make 90° they are called
a) Obtuse Angle b)Reflex Angle c)Complementary angle d)Supplementary angle
42) An equilateral triangle has

a) All equal sides b)two equal sides c)Two equal angles d) four equal sides
43) As per ISO-A series the dimensions (in mm) of A3 sheet is

a) 594 x 841 b)841 x 1189 c)297 x 420 d) 210 x 297
44) The BIS standard which sets the standard for technical drawings in India is
a) ISO 9000 b)IS 1146-1996 c)IS-46-1988 d) IS521-1999
45) Which of the flowing is a tangent to a circle?
46) Center line is represented as

a) b)
c) d)
47) methods of arrangement of dimensions includes

a) Parallel, Continuous and combined b) Perpendicular, Parallel and combined
c)Perpendicular, Continuous and combined d) Perpendicular, Parallel andContinuous
48)Superimposed dimensioning is a simplified method of

a) Chain dimensioning b)Parallel dimensioning c)combined dimensioning d) tabular dimensioning
49) To measure angles ___________ is used.

a) Set squares b) T square c)Protractor d) Divider
50) Circles of small radii are drawn by means of a ___________

a) Lenthening bar b) Bow divider c)Sound box d) Eraser
51)How many sides in Octagon?

a) 5 b) 6 c)7 d)8
52) If object lies in first quadrant then the projection is called __________.
a) Third angle projection b) Isometric projection
c)First angle projection d) Fourth angle projection.
53) A line passing through any Point on the circumference of a circle is called______?
a) Radius b) Centre c)Chord d)Tangent
54) Opposite sides are equal and make an angle of 90 degrees with each other?
a) Rhombus b)Trapezoid c)Trapezium d)Rectangle
55) When a plane figure revolves about an axis a solid is generated?

a) cone b) sphere c)cylinder d)pyramid

Engineering Drawing OBJECTIVE BITS with Answers --- M V Reddy
1. The primary unit of measurement for engineering drawings and design in the mechanical
industries is the
(a) millimeter (b) centimeter (c) meter (d) kilometer
Ans: (a)
2. Line composed of closely and evenly spaced short dashes in a drawing represents
(a) visible edges (b) hidden edges (c) hatching (d) pitch circle of gears
Ans: (b)
3. Lettering on a drawing sheet should have
(a) all alphabets in capital letters
(b) all alphabets in small letters
(c) In a sentance only first alphabet in capital letter
(d) In a sentance only abbreviations are capital letter
Ans: (a)
4. The line connecting a view to note is called
(a) dimension line (b) projection line (c) leader (d) arrowheads
Ans: (c)
5. The dimension figure for radius of a circle should be preceded by
(a) R (b) CR (c) SR (d) RAD
Ans: (b)
6. The recommended method of dimensioning a sphere with diameter 80 mm is
(a) 80фS (b) ф80S (c) S80ф (d) Sф80
Ans: (d)
7. A square lamina in isometric projection appears as
(a) Rhombus (b) Rectangle (c) Trapezium (d) Parallelogram
Ans: (a)
8. In isometric projection the three edges of an object are inclined to each other at
(a) 60 (b) 120 (c) 100 (d 90
Ans: (b)
9. A curve drawn for Boyle’s law (PV = constant) on a P-V chart has a characteristic shape of
(a) ellipse (b) parabola (c) oblique hyperbola (d) rectangular hyperbola
Ans: (d)
10. The profile of a gear teeth is in the form of
(a) parabola (b) involute (c) spiral (d) helix
Ans: (b)
11. When two angles together make 90º, they are called
(a) obtuse angle (b) reflex angle (c) complementary angles (d) supplementary angles
Ans: (c)
12. The included angle of a hexagon is
(a) 30º (b) 60º (c) 120º (d) 150º
Ans: (c)
13. The curve generated by a point on the circumference of a circle, which rolls without slipping
along outside of another circle is known as
(a) Hypocycloid (b) Epicycloid (c) Cycloid (d) Trochoid
Ans: (b)
14. In orthographic projections, the rays are assumed to
(a) diverge from station point (b) converge from station point (c) be parallel (d) None of these
Ans: (c)
15. If an object lies in third quadrant, its position with respect to reference planes will be
(a) infront of V.P, above H.P (b) behind V.P., above H.P. (c) behind V.P., below H.P.
(d) infront of V.P., below H.P.
Ans: (c)
16. If the Vertical Trace (V.T.) of a line lies 30 mm above reference line (XY), then its position
will be
(a) 30 mm infront of V.P. (b) 30 mm behind V.P. (c) 30 mm above H.P. (d) 30 mm below H.P.
Ans: (c)
17. When an object is cut by a section plane parallel to H.P and perpendicular to V.P, then the
sectional view of the object is obtained in
(a) top view (b) front view (c) left side view (d) right side view
Ans: (a)
18. Which of the following object gives a circular section, when it is cut completely by a section
plane (irrespective of the angle of the section plane)
(a) Cylinder (b) Sphere (c) Cone (d) Circular lamina
Ans: (b)
19. Comparative scale is a pair of scale having a common
(a) units (b) representative fraction (c) length of scale (d) least count
Ans: (b)
20. An angle can be set off and measured with the help of
(a) plane scale (b) diagonal scale (c) comparative scale (d) Scale of chords
Ans: (d)
21. What type of line has precedence over all other types of lines?
(a) hidden line (b) centre line (c) visible line (d) none of the above
Ans: (c)
22. Which is not a principal view?
(a) front (b) bottom (c) auxiliary (d) left side
Ans: (c)
23. The top view of an object should typically be drawn in first angle projection.
(a) to the right of the front view (b) directly below the front view
(c) anywhere on the same page (d) on a separate piece of paper
Ans: (b)
24. The top and right side views have common dimensions of
(a) height and width (b) width and depth (c) height (d) depth
Ans: (a)
25. This is how axonometric, oblique, and perspective sketches show objects
(a) Orthographically (b) Pictorially (c) Obliquely (d) Parallel
Ans: (b)
26. This type of solid has two bases that are parallel equal polygons:
(a) pyramid (b) prism (c) cone (d) torus
Ans: (b)
27. The solid having a polygon for a base and triangular lateral faces intersecting at a vertex is
(a) pyramid (b) prism (c) cone (d) torus
Ans: (a)
28. These types of projectors converge at a vanishing point
(a) perspective (b) parallel (c) orthographic (d) oblique
Ans: (a)
29. In oblique sketches, the most commonly used angles for receding lines are
(a) 15 or 60 degrees (b) 15 or 75 degrees (c) 45 or 60 degrees (d) 45 or 75 degrees
Ans: (c)
30. Objects that are symmetric can be shown effectively using this type of section
(a) quarter section (b) half section (c) full section (d) symmetric section
Ans: (b)
31. In this type of section, one quarter of the object is removed
(a) revolved section (b) removed section (c) quarter section (d) half section
Ans: (d)
32. This type of section is limited by a break line
(a) removed section (b) revolved section (c) broken-out section (d) half section
Ans: (c)
33. Head lamps of motor vehicles are in the shape of a
(a) Ellipse (b) Parabola (c) Hyperbola (d) Square
Ans: (c)
34. Eccentricity of parabola is ..................... one
(a) less than (b) more than (c) equal to (d) none
Ans: (c)
35. The angle between the flanks of a metric thread is
(a) 60 (b) 90 (c) 75 (d) 55
Ans: (a)
36. The number of cotters used in an assembly of sleeve and cotter joint are
(a) One (b) Five (c) Four (d) Two
Ans: (d)
37. What is the correct FRONT view in the figure below?
Ans: (D)
Ans: (A)
39. If a cylinder is cut as illustrated below, the RIGHT SIDE view will contain a/an:
(A) Circle. (B) Ellipse. (C) Rectangle. (D) Triangle
Ans: (B)
Ans: (C)
41. Which is the correct RIGHT SIDE view of the figure below?
Ans: (C)
42. In orthographic projection, lines are formed by projecting edges of the object onto planes.
The images formed on the planes are called:
A) Views. B) Sides. C) Points. D) Tangencies
Ans: (A)
43. The term ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION means to:
A) “Throw backward at an angle of 45° and draw.”
B) “Throw forward at an angle of 45° and draw.”
C) “Throw forward at right angles and draw.”
D) “Rotate the object at 45° to the picture plane.”
Ans: (C)
44. What type of line must be drawn between points A & B to complete the LEFT SIDE view of
the figure below?
A) Center B) Hidden C) Section D) Visible
Ans: (A)
45. Which is the correct FRONT view of the figure below?
Ans: (B)
46. Which is the correct TOP view of the figure below?
Ans: (A)
47. ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION is a system that allows you to make:
A) Three-dimensional drawings of a two dimensional object.
B) Two-dimensional drawings of a two dimensional object.
C) Two-dimensional drawings of a three dimensional object.
D) Three-dimensional drawings of a three dimensional object.
Ans: (A)
48. The PRECEDENCE OF LINES tells us that if a visible line and a hidden line coincide
(occupy the same position on the drawing), we should:
A) Draw only the hidden line. B) Draw only the visible line.
C) Draw the hidden line just above the visible line. D) Replace them with a phantom line.
Ans: (B)
49. The PRECEDENCE OF LINES tells us that if a visible line and a center line coincide
(occupy the same position on the drawing), we should:
A) Draw only the center line. B) Draw only the visible line.
C) Draw the center line just above the visible line. D) Replace them with a phantom line.
Ans: (B)
50. Which is a CENTER LINE?
Ans: (B)
51. The face of the object that has the most descriptive feature(s) should be the:
A) Back View. B) Front View. C) Right side View. D) Top View.
Ans: (B)
52. When making an orthographic drawing, the THICKEST lines should be the:
A) Center lines. B) Visible (object) lines. C) Extension lines. D) Hidden lines.
Ans: (B)
53. Surfaces or edges that CANNOT be seen in the views are drawn with:
A) Centerlines. B) Visible/Object lines. C) Hidden lines. D) No lines.
Ans: (C)
54. In an orthographic drawing, a circular surface may NOT appear as a/an:
A) Ellipse. B) Circle. C) Straight line. D) Parabola.
Ans: (D)
55.A line at an angle of less than 90° to a plane of projection will appear as a:
A) Point. B) True length line. C) Curved line. D) Foreshortened line.
Ans: (D)
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
UNIT – 6
Development of Lateral Surfaces
1-When the complete surface of an object laid down on a ___ surface, it is known as its
development.
(A) Flat
(B) Spherical
(C) Curved
(D) None of the above
Ans: (A)
2-Knowledge of Development of surfaces of solids is required for fabrication of

(A) Pipe work
(B) Ducts
(C) Containers
(D) All of the above
Ans: (D)
3-Following is the application of Development of surface

(A) Making of Boiler
(B) Making of Chimney
(C) Both (A) and (B)
Ans: (C)
4-The development of a right cylinder will be

(A) Parallelogram
(B) Circle
(C) Rectangle
(D) Rhombus
Ans: (C)
5-The development of a right prism will be

(A) Parallelogram
(B) Circle
(C) Rectangle
(D) Rhombus
Ans: (C)
6-Following method is used for Development of Right Cylinder
(A) Radial line method
(B) Parallel line method
(C) Approximate Method
Ans: (B)
7-Following method is used for Development of Right Prism

Ans: (B)
8-Following method is used for Development of Right Cone

Ans: (A)
9-Following method is used for Development of Right Pyramid

Ans: (A)
10-The lateral surface of right cylinder of diameter 30mm and height of axis 60mm is
developed, we get
(A) Square of each side 60mm
(B) Rhombus of each side 60mm
(C) Rectangle of length 94mm and width 60mm
Ans: (C)
11-The lateral surface of right regular pentagonal prism of each base edge 20mm and
height of axis 60mm is developed, we get
Ans: (C)
12) Developments of the lateral surface of a prism consist of the same number of __________ in
contact as the number of the sides of base of the prism.
a) squares
b) rectangles
c) triangles
d) parallelograms
Ans: (b)
13) The development of the lateral surface of a cylinder is a rectangle having one side equal to
the _____________ of its base-circle and the other equal to its length.
a) circumference
b) area
c) diameter
d) radius
Ans: (a)
14) The development of lateral surface of a pyramid consists of a number of equal
____________triangle in contact.
a) equilateral
b) isosceles
c) scalene
d) right angled
Ans: (b)
15) The development of the curved surface of a cone is a __________ of a __________
a) sector, circle
b) segment, circle
c) segment, ellipse
d) arc, parabola
Ans: (a)
16) The development of the surface of a cube consists of ____ equal squares, the length of the
side of the squares being equal to the length of the edge of the cube.
a) 4
b) 6
c) 12
d) 8
Ans: (b)
17) The front view obtained on the development of a square pyramid from its plan and front
elevation which stands vertically on its base on H.P with one edge of the base parallel to V.P?
a) Square
b) Triangle
c) Trapezium
d) Rectangle
Ans: (c)
18) The top view obtained by the development of a square pyramid from its plan and front
elevation which stands vertically on its base on H.P with one edge of the base parallel to V.P.
will be?
a) Triangle
b) Square
c) Trapezium
d) Circle
Ans: (b)
19) For a cone, the front view will be a ___________ with the slant edge showing the true length
of the generator of the cone.
a) Square
b) Rectangle
c) Triangle
d) Circle
Ans: (C)
20) The development of cylinder is a _______
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) square
d) trapezium
Ans: (b)
21) The development of lateral surfaces of a pentagonal pyramid is ________
a) Five rectangles
b) Five squares
c) Five triangles
d) Five circles
Ans: (c)
22) Development of surfaces means a solid is cut from
(a) A face
(b) A base
(c) An edge
(d) None
ANS: (C )
23) Sizes used in the development of a solid is
(a) True sizes
(b) Smaller sizes
(c) Bigger sizes
(d) None
ANS: ( a)
24) Which type of Saving is available on development of a solid?
(a) Cost of the material
(b) Cost of manufacture
(c) Cost of material & manufacture
(d) None
ANS: (a)
25) Surfaces which are developed
a. Conical
b. Sphereical
c. Lateral
d. None
ANS: (c )
26) Development of surfaces is used in
a. Electrical wires
b. Wood work
c. Sheet work
d. None
ANS: (c)
27) Principal of development means that every line on development uses
a. Apparent size
b. True size
c. Apparent &true sizes
d. None
ANS: (b)
28) Which type of solid has two bases of parallel and equal polygons
a) Pyramid
b) Prism
c) Cone
d) Torus
Ans: (b)
29) The solid having a polygon for a base and triangular lateral faces intersecting at a
vertex is
A) pyramid
B) prism
C) cone
D) torus
Ans: (A)
30) The lateral surface of right regular Hexagonal prism of each base edge 30mm and
height of axis 60mm is developed, we get
Ans: (C)
31) The lateral surface of right regular square prism of each base edge 40mm and height of
axis 70mm is developed, we get
(A) Rectangle of length 160mm and width 70mm
(C) Square of each side 160 mm
Ans: (C)
ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS
________________________________________________________________
15-1 INTRODUCTION
15
Isometric projection is a type of single view projection in which a pictorial view is
obtained by keeping the object in such a way that all the three mutually perpendicular
geometrical axes are equally inclined to the plane of projection. The projectors follow the
rules of multi-view projections i.e. they are parallel to each other and perpendicular to
the plane of projection.
In multi-view orthographic projections, each view provides information of two axes
(length & breadth or length & height or breadth & height). For a complete understanding,
there is always a need of more than one view of the object. These views can only be
correctly interpreted and visualized by those persons who have a good knowledge of
principles used for these projections. Whereas in isometric projection, a single view is
drawn in such a manner that it gives an overall view of the object at the first sight. Thus,
it is necessary to draw a pictorial view of one kind or the other so as to enable a
common man to understand.
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Choose the most appropriate answer out of the given alternatives:

i) The number of scales that is needed for making a dimetric projection is
(a) One (b) Two (c) Three (d) Four
ii) Isometric drawings fall into a larger category of drawings known as
(a) Oblique drawings (b) Pictorial drawings
(c) Dimetric drawings (d) Perspective drawings
iii) Isometric drawings fall into the category of
(a) Oblique drawings (b) Axonometric drawings
(c) Multi-view drawings (d) Perspective drawings
iv) The projectors in isometric view are
(a) Converging (b) Diverging
(c) Parallel to plane of projection (d) Perpendicular to plane projection
v) Pictorial views drawn on isometric scale are called
(a) Isometric drawing (b) Isometric Projection
(c) Isometric view (d) Any of these
vi) The exact value of R.F. of an Isometric scale is
(a) 9/11 (b) 0.815 (c) 0.8165 (d) √2 / √3
[ 15.1 ]
vii) The angle that isometric lines make with each other is
(a) 45º (b) 60º (c) 90º (d) 120º
viii) A square in a regular multi-view projection appears in an isometric view as
(a) Box (b) Square (c) Parallelogram (d) Rhombus
ix) The type of projection in which the surfaces are equally foreshortened is
(a) Oblique (b) Cabinet (c) Isometric (d) Orthographic
x) In comparison to an isometric projection, the appearance of an isometric view is
(a) Larger (b) Smaller (c) More accurate (d) More realistic
xi) On isometric plane, a circle appears as
(a) An obloid (b) A circle (c) An ellipse (d) An involute
xii) While making isometric projections the ellipse is preferably drawn by
(a) Four center method (b) Oblong method
(c) Concentric circles method (d) Parallelogram method
xiii) Isometric projections can not be drawn by
(a) Box method (b) Coordinate method
(c) Offset method (d) Zone method
xiv) A sphere in isometric projection appears as a circle of diameter
(a) Equal to the diameter of sphere (b) 0.816 times the diameter of sphere
(c) Less than 0.816 diameter of sphere (d) Greater than the diameter of sphere
xv) The purpose of an isometric scale is
(a) To lay off intersecting lines (b) To project the object on projection plane
(c) To measure foreshortened lines (d) To measure diagonal lines
xvi) Select the correct isometric view corresponding to the orthographic views shown
in Fig. 15.21
Fig. 15.21 (a) (b) (c) (d)
[ 15.2 ]
xvii) Select the correct isometric view corresponding to the orthographic views shown
in Fig. 15.22
Fig. 15.22 (a) (b) (c) (d)
Answer: (i) b (ii) b (iii) b (iv) d (v) b (vi) d (vii) d (viii) d (ix) c (x) a (xi) c (xii) a
(xiii) d (xiv) a (xv) c (xvi) c (xvii) b
[ 15.3 ]
1 Fundamental of
U N I T
Engineering and Drawing
1. Introduction to engineering Graphics

Have you ever wondered, how a car drawing (design) prepared in Japan, get its part manu-
factured in India, china or Indonesia and finally the whole car is assembled and sold in Unit-
ed State? How the engineers from different country are successfully making a perfect car
without knowing the native language?
The answer is; regardless of the language they speak, they have a common language for only
one interpretation of the drawing. They all are using Engineering Drawing to communicate
their ideas and successfully accomplish the project. We can affirm that; Engineering Draw-
ing is the language of an engineer. It is a powerful tool to share design related information
and is free from error introduced due to speech and script. An engineering drawing consists
of a variety of line styles, symbols, and lettering. When positioned correctly on the drawing
paper, they convey precise information to the reader.
In an industry, these drawings help both the technical as well as commercial staffs at various
stages like:
• Conceptual Stage
• Design Stage
• Modification Stage
• Prototype Development Stage
• Process And Production Planning
• Production
• Inspection
• Servicing and Maintenance, Etc.
1.1.1 What information should be available in an engineering drawing?

Shape of an object
• Exact Sizes and tolerances of various parts of the object
• The finish of the product
• The details of materials
• The company’s name
• Catalogue no of the product
• Date on which the drawing was made
• The person who made the drawing
• Qrcode
www.fortflag.com WhatsApp +91 9673567922

5
FORTFLAG BOOKS
1.1.2 BIS Conventions and Specifications referred to the

standard to be followed by all the engineers in engineering
drawing so that the drawing can be used in any country.
1.1.3 Drawing Instruments And Accessories

The following set of instruments is required for ensuring perfection in manual drawing:
• The company’s name
• Catalogue no of the product
• Date on which the drawing was made
• The person who made the drawing
• Qrcode
1. Drawing board:
It is made of soft wooden platens. The standard sizes of the drawing board are shown in
Table 1.1 below. D2 size of drawing board is recommended for the students of First year
engineering
Table 1.1: Standard Dimensions For Drawing Board
Designation Length x Width (mm) Recommended for use with sheet sizes
D0 1500 x 1000 A0
D1 1000 x 700 A1
D2 700 x 500 A2
D3 500 x500 A3
2. Drawing Sheet:
It is a sheet on which drawings are prepared by using pencils. A standard A0 size sheet has
an area of 1 m2 and has dimensions of 1189 mm x 841 mm. Each higher number sheet
(A1, A2, A3, etc. in order) is half the size of the immediately lower numbered sheet. For first
year engineering students A2 size is preferred. The recommended sizes obtained for various
drawing sheets are shown in Table 1.2

6
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Table 1.2: Sizes for Drawing Sheets
Designation Size: Length x Width (mm)
A0 841 x 1189
A1 594 x 841
A2 420 x 594
A3 297 x 420
A4 210 x 297
3. Mini-drafter:
This is used to draw parallel lines and/or inclined lines effectively with ease. This is to be
mounted on the top left corner of the drawing board. Figure 2 shows the photograph of a
typical college level mini drafter. It has L-shaped scale which is graduated in millimeters and
also has a degree scale for angle measurement.
4. Set squares:
Set squares are a set of 45° set square and 30°-60° set-square, as shown in figure 3.They are
used in conjunction with each other to draw parallel, inclined and perpendicular lines.

7
FORTFLAG BOOKS
5. Compasses:
These are used to draw arcs or circles. Compass consists of a needle point and a pencil point.
Figure 4 shows the photograph of a compass.
6. Divider:
Dividers are useful for transferring lengths to the drawings from scales or from the drawing
itself.
7. Pencils / lead sticks/ pencil sharpener / eraser/etc:

This is primary tool used in technical drawings. Three grades of pencil generally used for
technical drawings purpose are HB, H and 2H. Pencil with H, 2H, 3H ….. are hard grade
pencils used to draw faint (thin) lines while HB, B, 2B, 3B…. are soft grade pencils used to
draw dark (thick) lines. F is fine grade pencil.
Grade of Pencil
8B 7B 6B 5B
4B 3B 2B B HB F
H 2H 3H 4H 5B 6H

8
FORTFLAG BOOKS
8. French curve/Flexible curve:

French curve is free form template used to draw a smooth curve through a number of points.
The profile of the French curve is adjusted such that smooth curve passes through more
than three points. The next part of the curve is then drawn by using the next three points
in addition to the last two points of the previous curve. A French curve is shown in figure 6.
1.1.4 Lettering
Lettering is used for writing of titles, sub-titles, dimensions, scales and other details on a
drawing. Typical lettering features used for engineering drawing is shown in figure 1. The
letter sizes generally recommended for various items are shown in Table 1.3.
• Lettering types generally used for creating a drawing are

• Lettering A – Height of the capital letter is divided into 14 equal parts
• Lettering B – Height of the capital letter is divided into 10 equal parts
• Table 1.4 and Table 1.5 indicates the specifications for Type A and Type B letters.
HIGHT OF CAPITAL LETTER
LINE
b THICKNESS c SPACING BETWEEN d SPACING BETWEEN WORD
CHARACTERS
h
LETTERING TYPES
Lettering types
e
h
a
SPACING BETWEEN BASE LINES HIGHT OF LOWER CASE LETTER
Figure 1: Typical lettering features.

9
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Table 1.3: The letter sizes recommended for various items
Sr. No. Item Size (mm)
1 Name of Company 10, 14, 20

2 Drawing numbers, letters denoting section planes 10,14
3 Title of the Drawing 7,10
4 Sub-titles and heading 5,7
5 Dimensioning, Notes, Schedules, Material list 3.5,7
6 Alteration entries and tolerances 3.5
Table 1.4: Specifications of A -Type Lettering
Specifications Value Size (mm)
Capital letter height h 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14 20

Lowercase letter height a= (5/7)h - 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14
Thickness of Lines b=(1/14)h 0.18 0.25 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 1.4
Spacing between characters c=(1/7)h 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 1.4 2 2.8
Minimum spacing between words d=(3/7)h 1.05 1.5 2.1 3 4.2 6 8.4
Minimum spacing between baseline e=(10/7)h 3.5 5 7 10 14 20 28
Table 1.5: Specifications of B -Type Lettering
Specifications Value Size (mm)
Capital letter height h 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14 20

Lowercase letter height a= (7/10)h - 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14
Thickness of Lines b=(1/10)h 0.25 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 1.4 2
Spacing between characters c=(1/5)h 0.5 0.7 1 1.4 2 2.8 4
Minimum spacing between words d=(3/5)h 1.5 2.1 3 4.2 6 8.4 12
Minimum spacing between baseline e=(7/5)h 3.5 5 7 10 14 20 28
1.1.5 Lines
This is used to draalso has a degree scale for angle measurement.
Various types of lines are used to construct meaningful drawings. A line may be curved,
straight, continuous, segmented. It may be drawn as thin or thick. A few basic types of lines
widely used in drawings are shown in Table 1.6.
10
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Table 1.6: Types of letters used in engineering drawing
Illustration Application
Thick
Outlines, visible edges, surface boundaries of objects, mar-
gin lines
Continuous thin
Dimension lines, extension lines, section lines leader or
pointer lines, construction lines, boarder lines
Continuous thin wavy
Short break lines or irregular boundary lines — drawn free-
hand
Continuous thin with zig-zag
Long break lines
Short dashes, gap 1, length

3 mm
Invisible or interior surfaces
Short dashes
Center lines, locus lines
Alternate long and short dashes in a proportion of 6:1
Long chain thick at end and
thin elsewhere
Cutting plane lines
1.1.6 Dimensioning
The size and other details of the object are required to be indicated in a drawing by using
proper dimensioning. Dimensions indicated on drawing should be those which are essential
for the production, inspection and functioning of an object.
Normally two types of dimensioning system are used i.e. Aligned system and the unidirec-
tional system. These are shown in figure 2 & 3.
1) Aligned System:
In this system, dimensions are oriented perpendicular to the dimension line in such a way
that it may be read from bottom edge or right hand edge of the drawing sheet.
S
S P
A
S(RAD.)
S
C
B
P
P P
E
S Drill. 2 holes
11
FORTFLAG BOOKS
2) Unidirectional System:
In this system, the dimensions are placed such that they can be read from the bottom of the
drawing.
S
S S
A
S(RAD.)
S
C
B
P
D
P P
E
S Drill. 2 holes
Figure 3: The unidirectional system of dimensioning
Dimensioning consists of the following:
• A thin, solid line that shows the extent and direction of a dimension. Dimension lines are
broken for insertion of the dimension numbers
• Should be placed at least 10 mm away from the outline and all
• other parallel dimensions should be at least 6 mm apart, or more, if space permits
The important elements of dimensioning consist of extension lines, leader line, arrows and
dimensions.
1) Extension line: It is a thin line drawn perpendicular to a dimension line indicates the fea
ture associated with the dimension. There should be a visible gap of 1.5 mm between the
corner of an object and the end of the extension line.
2) Leader line: A thin line used to indicate the feature with which we can use dimension, note,
or symbol. Leader line ends with an arrow touching the part or detail. On the opposite
end of the arrow, the leader line will have a short, horizontal shoulder from which text is
extended.
6 mm MIN{ 13
64
10 mm MIN {
Figure 5. showing extension lines

12
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3) Arrows
Arrows are uniform in size and style, regardless of the size of the drawing. Various types of
arrows are shown in figure 4.
WIDTH OF ARROW HEAD

15˚ TO 90˚
LENGTH OF
ARROWHEAD OPEN CLOSED CLOSED AND FILLED
=3w
Figure 4:Various types of arrows used for dimensioning
Dimensioning of angles:
The normal style for dimensioning of angle is shown in figure 5.
11
5
˚ ˚
˚
62 35
Use the vertex as

the centre of arc
42
˚
centre of arc 42
˚
˚
62 ˚
62
Correct Incorrect Correct Not recommended
Figure 5: conventions used for dimensioning angles.
RULES OF DIMENSIONING
1. There must be just a single dimension line between any two extension lines.
2. All the dimensions should be placed outside the views. Inside dimensions are to be
preferred only if they are clearer and more easily readable.
3. All the dimensions on a drawing must be shown using either Aligned System or
Unidirectional System. Two systems should not be mixed on the same drawing.
4. The same unit should be used for all the dimensions. Do not write the unit after each
dimension; instead place a note below the drawing mentioning the unit.
5. Dimension lines should not cross each other also not cross any other lines of the object.
6. All dimensions must be given.
7. Each dimension should be given only once. No dimension should be redundant.

13
FORTFLAG BOOKS
8. Do not use an outline or a centre line as a dimension line.

9. Avoid dimensioning hidden lines.
10. For dimensions in series, adopt any one of the following ways.
i. Chain dimensioning (Continuous dimensioning): All the dimensions are aligned in

such a way that an arrowhead of one dimension touches tip-to-tip the arrowhead of
the very next dimension.
ii. Parallel dimensioning (Progressive dimensioning): All the dimensions are shown
from a common reference line or common extension line.
iii. Combined dimensioning: When both the methods, i.e., chain dimensioning and
parallel dimensioning are used on the same drawing, the method of dimensioning
is called combined dimensioning.
1.2 Scales
As some objects will be very small and some of objects will be very large in size, there is a
need to reduce or enlarge the dimensions while drawing the objects on paper. Some objects
can be drawn to their actual size. The proportion by which the drawing of an object is en-
larged or reduced is called the scale of the drawing.
Definition
A scale is defined as the ratio of the linear dimensions of the object as represented in a draw-
ing to the actual dimensions of the same.
• Drawings drawn with the same size as the objects are called full sized drawing.
• It is not convenient, always, to draw drawings of the object to its actual size. e.g. Buildings,
Heavy machines, Bridges, Watches, Electronic devices etc.
Hence scales are used to prepare drawing at Full size, reduced size, and Enlarged size.
BIS Recommended Scales are shown in table 1.7
Table 1.7: The common scales recommended.
1:2 1:5 1:10

1:20 1:50 1:100
Reducing Scales 1:200 1:500 1:1000
1:2000 1:5000 1:10000
50:1 20:1
Enlarging Scales 5:1 2:1
10:1
Full Size Scales 1:1
Intermediate scales can also be used in exceptional cases.

14
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Types of Scales
Engineers Scale: The relation between the dimension on the drawing and the actual dimen-
sion of the object is mentioned numerically (like 10 mm = 15 m).
Graphical Scale: Scale is drawn on the drawing itself. This takes care of the shrinkage of the
engineer’s scale when the drawing becomes old.
Representative fraction (R.F.) :-
Length of an object on the drawing

R.F. = Actual Leangth of the object
When a 1 cm long line in a drawing represents 1 meter length of the object
1cm 1cm 1
R.F. = = =
1m 1x 100 cm 100
Length of scale = RF x Maximum distance to be represented
1.3 Simple Geometrical construction
1.3.1 Dividing a line into equal parts
For video solution scan this QR-Code using FORTFLAG app

15
FORTFLAG BOOKS
1.3.2 Dividing a Circle into 12 Equal parts
1.3.3 Dividing a Circle into 8 Equal parts

16
FORTFLAG BOOKS
1.3.4 Draw a Hexagon (Using compass)
Side of hexagon = Radius of circle
1.3.5 Draw a Hexagon (T1)
Side of hexagon
Radius of circle

17
FORTFLAG BOOKS
1.3.6 Draw a Hexagon (T2)
Side of hexagon
= Radius of circle

18
2
FORTFLAG BOOKS
2D and 3D CAD
U N I T
2.1. Introduction to Computer Aided Drawing

In computer graphics we are generally concerned with images drawn on display screens.
(Hard copies can then be made of these images if needed, using various types of
printing device.) There are several ways in which these images can be constructed and dif-
ferent types of display device use a range of imaging techniques to achieve acceptable visual
representations. In modem industry, the computer supports all the design and manufacturing
functions. The concept of a common database has effectively integrated these engineering
functions and requires the engineer to be aware of the ramifications of changes anywhere
in the design and manufacturing process. The link between the area of drawing and design
and analysis is very strong. Computer aided design and drawing systems provide the means
to generate 3D models with the computer and from those models generate drawings for
manufacturing. Computer aided drawing is a technique to produce engineering drawings
with the assistance of a computer.
2.2. Computer Aided Drawing (CADD)

Designers generally use drawings to represent the object which they are designing, and to
communicate the design to others. Computeraided design, however, is a technique where
the attributes of the computer and those of the designer are blended together into a prob-
lem-solving team. When the term CAD is used to mean computer-aided design it normally
refers to a graphical system where components and assemblies can be modelled in three
dimensions. The term design, however, also covers those functions attributed to the areas of
modelling and analysis. The acronym CADD is more commonly used nowadays and stands
for computer-aided draughting and design; a CADD package is one which is able to provide
all draughting facilities and some or all of those required for the design process.
2.3. 2D CAD
Two-dimensional (2D) computer drawing is the representation of an object in the single-view
format which shows two of the three object dimensions or themultiview format where each
view reveals two dimensions. In both cases, the database includes just two values for each
represented coordinate of the object. It can also be a pictorial representation if the database
contains X, Y coordinates only.
2.4. 3D CAD
Three-dimensional (3D) computer drawing is the coordinate format. Three dimensional
computer aided drawing allows the production of geometric models of a component or
product for spatial and visual analysis.

19
FORTFLAG BOOKS
2.5. Use of cad system

A few examples from engineering disciplines will demonstrate the versatility of modern CAD systems.
Aerospace: Layout drawings, part drawings, subassemblies, assemblies
Chemical: Process schematics, process plant layout drawings
Civil, Construction: Structural detail drawings, site plan drawings, construction drawings,
road - use plans
Electrical, Computer: Circuit board design, very large system integration (VLSI) design
Industrial and Manufacturing: Manufacturing plant layout drawings, subassemblies,
assemblies
Mechanical : part drawing, subassemblies, assemblies
2.6. Major CAD Software Products

• AutoCAD (Autodesk)
• Pro Engineer (PTC)
• SolidWorks (Dassault Systems)
• CATIA (IBM/Dassault Systems)
• Unigraphics (UGS)
• I-DEAS (SDRC)
2.7.The advantages of using CADsystems

1. constant quality drawing the quality of lines, dimensions, symbols, notes, etc., are
independent of the individual skill of the draughtsman
2. creation of database, which is the collection of useful information that may be retrieved
by draughtsmen and accessed by other processors;
3. creation of library of commonly used electrical, hydraulic, welding, etc., symbols stand
ard components such as nuts, bolts, screws, bearings, etc., projection symbols, parts of
drawings, etc., can be stored in the memory and recalled when needed and additionally
they can be positioned anywhere on the screen and redrawn to any scale and angle of
inclination.
4. use of layers the drawings may be drawn on any one of a number of available layers,
which may be considered as a stack of transparent sheets and any separate sheet can
be selected for drawing construction lines, grids, dimensions, notes, hatching, etc., but
to make up together a complete drawing when required.
5. saving on repetition repetitive work on similar features or drawings and the resulting
tiredness and boredom is replaced by automatic redrawing, hence attention and interest
are maintained with the consequent marked increase in speed and productivity;
6. greater accuracy due to computer mathematical accuracy, a high level of dimensional
control is obtained with reduction in the number of mistakes resulting in accurate ma
terial and cost estimates;
7. multicolor drawingsvisualization of drawings relates directly to the projection used,
pictorial projections are easier to understand than orthographic projection and the dif
ferent colours obtainable by computers enhance the understanding even further;
8. editing functions the powerful editing functions of correcting mistakes, deleting and in
serting new features, copying, moving, translating and rotating features, scaling, etc., is
only made possible with the use of computers.

20
FORTFLAG BOOKS
CAD Commands
Line - Draw a line Offset - Make a parallel line that is offset

be a certain distance from the original.
50
25
Mirror - mirror a section of a drawing about a line Dimension - Add dimensions to your sketch
Trim - Remove a section of line on your sketch Chamfer - Make an angled cut on a corner of your
sketch
Circle - Draw a circle on the sketch Hatch - Add hatched lines (diagonal lines) to a
sketch to show which part is solid
Fillet - Make a square corner into a round corner Extrude Boss/Base - Make a 2D sketch into a 3D
object. (similar to squeezing toothpaste through
the hole in the tube)

21
U N I T
3 Engineering Curves
3. 1 Introduction
Any object around us will have flat surface or curved surface or combination of both. In this
chapter we are studying some important curve, their application and geometrical construc-
tion. Various curves to be studied by first year engineering students are-
- Ellipse
- Parabola
- Hyperbola
- Cycloid
- Involute
- Spiral
- Helix
3.2 Conic Sections

Conic section includes the curves which are obtained on right circular cone, when the cone is
cut by tropical cutting plane. Ellipses, Parabola, Hyperbola are the conic sections.
Ellipse
Section Plane
Through Generators Section Plane Hyperbola
Parallel to Axis.
Parabola
Section Plane
Parallel to end generator

23
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Common Definition of Ellipse, Parabola & Hyperbola:

It is the locus of points moving in a plane such that the ratio of its distances from a fixed
point (Focus - F) and a fixed line (Directrix – D) always remains constant. This Ratio is called
ECCENTRICITY and is denoted by letter “e”.
Fixed point is called Focus. It is denoted by letter “ F ” And Fixed line is called Directrix. It is denoted
by letter “ D ”.
Distance of the moving point (P) from a fixed point (Focus-F)
Eccentricity=e =
Distance of the moving point (P) from a fixed line (Directrix-D)
A) For Ellipse e <1
B) For Parabola e =1
C) For Hyperbola e >1
There are two methods by which ellipse, parabola and hyperbola can be drawn.
1. Focus Directrix Method
2. Rectangle method
3.3 Focus Directrix Method

In Focus Directrix Method, various points are named by using following letters.

F= Fixed Point = Focus
D = Fixed Straight Line = Directrix
P = Initial or starting point of Curve
V= Vertex = the point where the curve intersects the axis.
Parabola (e=1)
Directrix
Ellipse (e < 1)
P P P
Axis
D V V V F
Hyperbola (e>1)
PF VF
Eccentricity= e = PD = VD Here PF = VF & PD = VD DF = PD + PF = VD + VF

24
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.4 Construction of Ellipse: Focus-Directrix Method
Q 1. Draw the locus of a point P which moves in such a way that the ratio of its distance from
a fixed point to its distance from a fixed straight line is always constant & equal to 2/3.
The fixed point is 60mm away from the fixed straight line. Name the curve.
Q 2. The fixed point is 60mm away from the fixed straight line. Draw the locus of a point P
moving in such a way that the ratio of “distance from a fixed point” to the “distance from
a fixed line” is always 2/3. Name the curve.
Q 3. The fixed point is 60mm away from the fixed straight line. Draw the curve having eccen
tricity 2/3. Name the curve.
Q 4. Draw an ellipse by Focus Directrix method if the eccentricity is 2/3, and the distance
between fixed point & fixed straight line is 60mm.
Solution:
2 PF 2 60-PD
DF = PF + PD e= = = PD
3 PD 3
DF = PF + PD
2 PD = 3 (60 – PD) 2 PD = 180 – 3 PD) 5 PD = 180
PF = 60 - PD
PD = 36 mm , So, PF = 24 mm

25
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.5 Construction of Parabola: Focus Directrix Method

a fixed point to its distance from a fixed straight line is always constant & equal to 1. The
fixed point is 70mm away from the fixed straight line. Name the curve.
a fixed line” is always 1. Name the curve.
Q 3. The fixed point is 70mm away from the fixed straight line. Draw the curve having ec
centricity 1. Name the curve.
Q 4. Draw the parabola by Focus Directrix method if the distance between fixed point & fixed
straight line is 70mm.
Solution:
Eccentricity for parabola is 1, thus
PF 70-PD
DF = 70 mm e= 1 = 1 = PD
PD
DF = PF + PD
PD = (70 – PD) 2 PD = 70 PD = 35 mm
70 = PF + PD
PF = 70 - PD So, PF = 35 mm

26
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.6 Construction of Hyperbola: Focus Directrix Method

a fixed point to its distance from a fixed straight line is always constant & equal to 5/3.
The fixed point is 56mm away from the fixed straight line. Name the curve.
a fixed line” is always 5/3. Name the curve.
Q 3. The fixed point is 56mm away from the fixed straight line. Draw the curve having eccen
tricity 5/3. Name the curve.
Q 4. Draw the hyperbola by Focus Directrix method if the distance between fixed point &
fixed straight line is 56mm.
Solution:
PF VF 5
As Eccentricity for hyperbola is 5/3, thus e = = =
PD VD 3
5 PF 5 56-PD
DF = 56 mm e= = = PD
3 PD 3
DF = PF + PD
5PD = 3 (56 – PD) 8 PD = 168 PD = 21 mm
70 = PF + PD
PF = 56 - PD So, PF = 35 mm

27
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.7 Construction of Ellipse :Rectangle Method

Q 1. Draw ellipse by Rectangle method.Take major axis 100 mm and minor axis 70 mm long.
Solution:
3.8 Construction of Parabola : Rectangle Method

Q 1. A ball thrown in air attains 100 m height and covers horizontal distance 150 m on
ground. Draw the path of the ball. (Use Suitable scale)
Q 2. Draw a parabola having 100 mm axis height and 150 mm base.
Solution:

28
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.9 Construction of Hyperbola: Rectangle Method

Q 1. Point P is 40 mm and 30 mm from horizontal and vertical axes respectively. Draw Hyper
bola through it.
Solution:
3.10 Cycloid:
Definition: Cycloid is curve generated by a point on the circumference of a circle rolling
along a straight line without slipping.
Q 1. Draw locus of a point on the periphery of a circle which rolls on straight line path. Take
circle diameter as 40 mm.
Q 2. Draw the cycloid of circle of 40 mm diameter.
Q 3. A circle of 40mm diameter rolls along a straight line without slipping. Draw the curve
traced out by a point P on the circumference, for one complete revolution of the circle.
Name the curve.
Q 4. A wheel of motor cycle 40cm in diameter rolls on a straight horizontal road. Draw the
locus of point P on the periphery of the wheel for one revolution of the wheel. Initially
point P is in contact with road.

29
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Solution:
3.11 Involute
Definition: Involute is a locus of a free end of a string when it is wound or unwound around
a circular disc in such a way that string is always tight. Involute profile are used in gear teeth.
Q 1. Draw locus of a end point of the string which is wound around the circular disc of 40mm
diameter
Q 2. An elastic string has its one end attached to the circumference of a circular disc with a
40mm diameter. Draw the curve traced out by the other end of the string when it is
wound round the disc keeping the string always tight.
Q 3. Draw an Involute of circle of 40mm diameter
Solution:

30
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.12 Spiral
Definition: Spiral is a curve generated by a point which revolves around a fixed point and at
the same time, moves towards or away from fixed point.
Q 1. A 60 mm long link rotates about O at uniform angular velocity. A point P initially at O

moves along the link outwards at a uniform rate and reaches at another end of link,
during one revolution of the link. Draw the locus of the point P for one revolution. Name
the locus.
Q 2. A point P moves radialy outward from the center of a circular disc to the periphery when
disc completes one revolution. Radial movement of the point P and the angular motion
of the disc are assumed to be uniform. Take diameter of disc as 120mm. Trace locus of
the point P and name the curve.
Solution:

31
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.13 Helix
Definition: Helix is a curve generated by a point which moves around the surface of a right
circular Cylinder / cone and at the same time advances in axial direction at a speed bearing
a constant ratio to the speed of rotation.
Helix on cylinder.
Q 1: A point is moving around the surface of a cylinder of 60 mm diameter at uniform speed

and at thesame time, it advances in the direction of axis by 120 mm also with uniform
speed. Draw the path of the moving point and name the curve. Take Height of cylinder
equal to pitch of helix.
Q 2: Draw a helix of One revolution on a cylinder of 60 mm Base Diameter and 120 mm axis
height.
Solution:

32
FORTFLAG BOOKS
Helix on cone
Q 1. A point is moving around the surface of a cone of 60 mm diameter at uniform speed

and at thesame time, it advances in the direction of axis by 120 mm also with uniform
speed. Draw the path of the moving point and name the curve. Take Height of cone
equal to pitch of helix.
Q 2. Draw a helix of One revolution on a cone of 60 mm Base Diameter and 120 mm axis
height.
Solution:

33
FORTFLAG BOOKS
3.14 Engineering Curves and Its Application
Name of
Remarks
Curve
• Eccentricity, e<1
Ellipse • Characterized by Major and minor axis
• Planetary motion are elliptical path
• Eccentricity, e=1
Parabola • Characterized by range and maximum height
• Path of a projectile is parabola
• Eccentricity, e>1
Hyperbola • Sonic boom, behind sonic aircraft is hyperbola
• Gear teeth profile between two skew-axis
• Cycloid is curve generated by a point on the circumference of a

Cycloid circle rolling along a straight line without slipping.
• Gear tooth profile
• Involute is a locus of a free end of a string when it is wound or

unwound arounda circular disc in such a way that string is always
Involute
tight.
• Involute profile are used in gear teeth.
• Spiral is a curve generated by a point which revolves around a fixed

point and at the same time, moves towards or away from fixed
Spiral
point.
• Motion of different element in a mechanism.
• Helix is a curve generated by a point which moves around the

surface of a right circular Cylinder and at the same time advances in
Helix on cylinder axial direction at a speed bearing a constant ratio to the speed of
rotation.
• Thread on bolts are helical.
• Helix is a curve generated by a point which moves around the sur

face of a right circular Cone and at the same time advances in axial
Helix on cone
direction at a speed earing a constant ratio to the speed of rotation.
• Thread on screws are helical.

34
6/14/2021 EG practice Test UNIT-1&3
EG practice Test UNIT-1&3

*Required
MCQs
Which curve is used in the following constructions ? *
ellipse
parabola
hyperbola
involute
Which of the following is the eccentricity for hyperbola? *
a) 1
b) 3/2
c) 2/3
d) ½
https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLScJWtVwXDqfsVlQ82ZoNljCOoXq8y8Ii0sxXjhBJDa132ZkwA/formResponse 1/15
The size for _______ sheet is 210 mm x 297 mm. *
A : A1
B : A3
C : A4
D : A5
In which of the following elliptical curves are used? *
a) Sound reflectors
b) Light reflectors
c) Cooling towers
d) Bridges
Identify the curve *
INVOLUTE
CYCLOIDE
EPICYCLOIDE
HYPOCYCLOIDE
Hatching lines are drawn at ___ degree to reference line *
30
45
60
90
From below given figure, match the following. *
a) a, i; b, ii; d, iii; e, iv
b) a, iv; b, iii; d, ii; e, i
c) a, i; b, iv; d, iii; e, ii
d) a, iii; b, ii; d, i; e, iv
Find the incorrect dimensioning rule from the following. *
a) No need for unnecessary dimensions
b) Dimension lines should not be crossed
c) Dimensioning can be done anywhere in the drawing
d) Hidden lines need no dimensions
If eccentricity of ellipse is 3/7, how many divisions will the line joining the directrix
and the focus have in general method? *
a) 10
b) 7
c) 3
d) 5
Match the pairs. *
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
In the general method of drawing an ellipse, after parting the line joining the
directrix and the focus, a _____ is made. *
a) Tangent
b) Vertex
c) Perpendicular bisector
d) Normal
The line given below is used for____________ *
a) Long-break line
b) Cutting planes
c) Centroidal lines
d) Out lines of adjacent parts
The actual length is 2m. The length of the drawing is 5cm. Find the SCALE
(representative factor). *
a) 1/5
b) 20
c) 1/40
d) 5
IDENTIFY THE CURVE *
HYPERBOLA
INVOLUTE
HELIX
SPIRAL
Which of the following dimension is according to the ‘aligned system’ of

dimensioning? *
a) 40
b) 55
c) 25
d) 10
Which of the following lines are used to show that the object is cut and then
viewed? *
a) Hidden lines
b) Leader lines
c) Centre lines
d) Hatching Lines
The type of line that projects from an object for the express purpose of locating
a dimension is a ________ line. *
Visible
Hidden
Extension
Dimension
.................... is the difference between the section line and the centre line? *
a) The length of the long dashes
b) The length of short dashes
c) The width of the gap
d) The two ends of the lines
Which type of dimensioning is shown below? *
a) Chain dimension
b) Parallel dimension
c) Unidirectional dimension
d) Combined dimension
PARABOLA
CYCLOIDE
HELIX
INVOLUTE
ellipse
parabola
hyperbola
cycloide
__________ is a curve generated by a point on the circumference of a circle which

rolls without slipping on a straight line. *
a) Cycloid
b) Epicycloid
c) Epitrochoid
d) Trochoid
The length of the drawing is 60 mm, the scale is given as 1:5. Find the actual
length. *
a) 50 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 30 cm
d) 10 mm
Which of the following method is used for construction parabolic curves? *
a) Rectangular method
b) Arc of the circle method
c) Concentric circle method
d) Oblong method
Which of the following curves principle is used in the construction of screw

threads? *
a) Spirals
b) Helix
c) Cycloidal curves
d) Involutes
Initial work and construction lines are drawn using __ pencil. *
a) 3H
b) 4H
c) H
d) 2H
steps are given to draw involute of given circle. Arrange the steps f C is the
centre of circle and P be the end of the thread (starting point).i. Draw a line PQ,
tangent to the circle and equal to the circumference of the circle.ii. Draw the
involute through the points P1, P2, P3 ……..etc.iii. Divide PQ and the circle into 12
equal parts.iv. Draw tangents at points 1, 2, 3 etc. and mark on them points P1, P2,
P3 etc. such that 1P1 =P1l, 2P2 = P2l, 3P3= P3l etc. *
a) ii, i, iv, iii
b) iii, i , iv, ii
c) i, iii, iv, ii
d) iv, iii, i, ii
A curve traced out by a point in a straight line, which rolls without slipping along
polygon or a circle is called __________ *
a) Cycloid
b) Loci of point
c) Conic
d) Involute
While dimensioning a circle, the leader line and the dimension line are drawn at
which angle with respect to each other? *
a) 45˚
b) 30˚
c) 0˚ or 180˚
d) 90˚
Hyperbolic curves are used for which of the following designs? *
a) Light reflectors
b) Sound reflectors
c) Cooling towers
d) Arches
In the formation of the cycloidal curves, the circle which rolls with a fixed point
without slipping is called _____________ *
a) Generating circle
b) Rolling circle
c) Slipping circle
d) Direct circle
Which of the following represents an Archemedian spiral? *
a) Tornado
b) Cyclone
c) Mosquito coil
d) Fibonacci series
Which of the following constructions doesn’t use elliptical curves? *
a) Cooling towers
b) Dams
c) Bridges
d) Man-holes
Which of the following described cut sections gives the hyperbolic curve from
the cone? *
a) A section parallel to the cone axis
b) A section parallel to the base of the cone
c) A section parallel to one of the generators
d) Section perpendicular to the cone axis
Which is the wrong statement regarding dimensions? *
a) Every dimension must be given, but none should be given more than once
b) Every dimension should be written to the left side of the drawing
c) Dimensions should be placed outside the views
d) A centre line should not be used as a dimension line
From unidirectional system, it is __________ *
a) Convenient to read dimensions from the bottom edge
b) Convenient to read dimensions from the right-hand edge
c) Convenient to read dimensions from the right-hand edge
d) Convenient to read dimensions from the top edge
Back Submit
Never submit passwords through Google Forms.
This content is neither created nor endorsed by Google. Report Abuse - Terms of Service - Privacy Policy
Forms
Engineering Drawing Questions and Answers – Drawing
Tools and their Uses – 1
1. How many battens will be there for a Drawing board?
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: Generally drawing board has dimensions of 1000 x 1500, 700 x 1000, 500 x
700, 350 mm x 500 mm, and made of well-seasoned soft wood, so there would be no
bending while life increases. And also if size of drawing board increases widely then the
board will be fabricated with another 1 or 2 batten.
2. The part that doesn’t belong to T-square is __________

a) Working edge b) Blade c) Stock d) Ebony
Answer: d
Explanation: Working edge and Stock are parts of T- square those which make 90 degrees
with each other, the blade is the long bar that exists in T-Square. Ebony is part of Drawing
board in which T-square is fitted to draw lines.
3. The angle which we can’t make using a single Set-square is ________

a) 45o b) 60o c) 30o d) 75o
Answer: d
Explanation: 45o can be drawn using 45o Set-square, and 30o, 60o can be drawn using 30o –
60o Set-square, but to draw 75o degrees we need both Set-squares. That is only if we keep
30o of set-square adjacent with 45o set-square we can get 75o. And also multiple angles
can be achieved using protractor.
4. The angle which we can’t make using both the Set-squares is _____________
a) 15o b) 105o c) 165o d) 125o
Answer: d
Explanation: 15o can be made by keeping 45o and 30o adjacent to each other on the line
perpendicular to the line for which 15ois made. Likewise for 105o and 165o also if we just
change the alignment with the required line it possible. But to make 125o there is no such
combination available for Set-squares.
5. Small bow compass can draw circles less than _____ mm radius.
a) 25mm b) 30mm c) 35mm d) 40mm
Answer: a
1
Explanation: A normal Small bow compass is capable of drawing circles less than the
25mm radius. This is because of the arrangement of a screw in between the legs of the
compass. But any other normal compass can’t give us perfect circles whose radius is less
than 25mm.
6. Which is not the use of divider?

a) To divide curved or straight lines into the desired number of equal parts
b) To draw circles
c) To transfer dimensions from one part of the drawing to another part
d) To set-off given distances from the scale to the drawing
Answer: b
Explanation: Divider can be used for those purposes as mentioned in options. But we
cannot use divider as a compass and even if we want the compass to be used as divider
we can change the pencil part with needle attachment.
7. The cardboard scales are available in a set of _______ scales.

a) six b) ten c) eight d) twelve
Answer: c
Explanation: The cardboard scales are available in a set of eight scales. They are
designated from M1 to M8 which has scale of 1:1, 1:2.5, 1:10, 1:20, 1:50, 1:200, 1:300,
1:400, and 1:1000. These are standard scales used.
8. _________ is used to draw curves which are not circular.

a) Compass b) Protractor c) French curves d) Pro circle
Answer: c
Explanation: French curves are used for drawing curves which can’t be drawn with a
compass. A faint freehand curve is first drawn through the known points. Longest possible
curves exactly coinciding with the freehand curve are then found out from the French
curve. Finally, neat continues curve is drawn with the aid of French curve.
9. The areas of the two subsequent sizes of drawing sheet are in the ratio ____
a) 1:5 b) 1:4 c) 1:2 d) 1:10
Answer: c
Explanation: A successive format size (from A0 to A5) is obtained by halving along the
length or doubling along the width. So the areas of the two subsequent sizes are in the
ratio 1:2. Likewise in reverse order (from A5 to A0) the ratio will be 2:1.
10. The sizes from A0 to A5 increases.

a) True b) False
2
Answer: b
Explanation: The sizes from A0 to A5 decreases, A5 (148 mm x 210 mm), A4 (210 mm x
297 mm), A3 (297 mm x 420 mm), etc. A successive format size is obtained by doubling
along the width or halving along the length.
11. The increase in hardness is shown by the value of the figure put in front of
the letter H, 2H, 3H, and 4H etc.
a) True b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Letters HB denote the medium grade where the increase in hardness is
shown by the value of the figure put in front of the letter H, viz. 2H, 3H, and 4H etc.
Similarly, the grade becomes softer according to the letter B, 2B, 3B and 4B etc.
12. What is the next size of 210 mm x 297 mm in drawing papers?

a) 148 mm x 210 mm b) 297 mm x 420 mm
c) 420 mm x 594 mm d) 105 mm x 148 mm
Answer: b
Explanation: 210 mm x 297 mm is A4 size, next one is A3 (297 mm x 420 mm), which
came doubling along the width. And the next size is obtained by doubling the width i.e. A2
(420 mm x 594mm) and so on.
13. The Grade becomes ______ according to the figure placed in front of the
letter B, 2B, 3B, 4B etc.
a) harder b) lighter c) darker d) softer
Answer: d
Explanation: The increase in hardness is shown by the value of the figure put in front of the
letter H, 2H, 3H, and 4H etc. Similarly, the grade becomes softer according to the figure
placed in front of the letter B, 2B, 3B, and 4B etc.
Drawing Tools and their Uses – 2

1. The accuracy of the drawing depends on the quality of the instruments used.
a) True b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Drawing instruments play a vital role in the quality of the drawing. Factors
such as accuracy, precision, correctness, etc depend on the quality of the said
3
instruments. There are many drawing instruments which help in increasing the accuracy of
the drawing.
2. Which of the following instrument is made of thin strips of wood arranged in a

line to form a rectangle and on which, the drawing is made?
a) Mini – drafter b) Drawing Board
c) Protractor d) Scale
Answer: b
Explanation: The drawing board is made up of thin sheets of seasoned soft wood,
arranged in a line so as to form a rectangle. Then it is fitted with two battens on the
respective parallel sides of the board. The battens are attached with the help of screws.
3. Which of the following tools is used to draw horizontal lines?

a) Mini – drafter b) Protractor
c) T – square d) French curve
Answer: c
Explanation: T – squares are made up of hard wood, plastics, etc. It consists of two parts;
stock and blade. The stock slides on the drawing board and the horizontal lines are drawn
from the working edge on the side of the blade. The angle between the stock and the blade
is 90˚.
4. Which of the following instrument can be used to draw accurate perpendicular

lines, parallel lines and angular lines?
a) Mini – drafter b) T – square
c) Protractor d) Set square
Answer: a
Explanation: Mini – drafters are used to draw perpendicular lines, parallel lines and angular
lines. They consist of blades, protractor head, double bar link mechanism, screw and
clamp. The blades have markings corresponding to the engineering scale.
5. According to the Indian Standard Institute (ISI), which among the following
designation has the size 1000 x 700 (in mm)?
a) B0 b) B1 c) B2 d) B3
Answer: b
Explanation: The designation B1 is 1000 x 700 mm in size whereas B0, B2 and B3
designations are 1500 x 1000 mm, 700 x 500 mm and 500 x 300mm respectively. These
designations denote the dimensions of the drawing boards. Standard dimensions are used
to simplify the production process.
4
6. Which is the most common tool used for drawing circles?
a) French curve b) Mini – drafter
c) Divider d) Compass
Answer: d
Explanation: Compass is used to draw circles. Its design is similar to the divider, except in
compass there is a provision for the attachment of pencil or lead in one of the legs of the
compass. The divider is used to measure and repeat the dimensions when they are
repeated.
7. For drawing circles with large radius, which of the following tool is used?
a) Bow compass b) Lengthening bar compass
c) Divider d) Protractors
Answer: b
Explanation: In lengthening bar compass, there is a provision for increasing the radius of
the circle greater than the total open length of the compass. This helps in drawing very
large circles with the help of medium sized compasses.
8. Which of the following drawing tools is used by architects for making

blueprints?
a) Drawing Pencils b) Dusters
c) Ink Pen d) Erasers
Answer: c
Explanation: Ink Pen is used to draw the blueprints by architects and draftsmen. They are
used to draw lines onto the tracing paper. They are used for making the final drafts of the
drawing made in pencil. Drawing pencils have generally leads which drawn on paper can
be erased. This does not happen with the ink pen.
9. Which of the following drawing tool is not used to set the drawing sheet onto
the drawing board?
a) Drawing clips b) Drawing pins
c) Divider d) Adhesive Tape
Answer: c
Explanation: Divider is a drawing tool used to replicate the dimensions when the
dimensions are repeated. Drawing clips, drawing pins and adhesive tapes are used to
attach the drawing sheet onto the drawing board. These attachments are temporary
attachments and can be removed after the drawing is completed.
5
10. According to the Indian Standard institution (ISI) what is the size of the
designation A3 in mm?
a) 420 x 297 b) 841 x 594
c) 1189 x 841 d) 297 x 210
Answer: a
Explanation: The size of the designation A3 in mm is 420 x 297. The designations A0, A1,
A2, A4 and A5 have sizes 1189 x 841 mm, 841 x 594 mm, 594 x 420 mm, 297 x 210 mm
and 210 x 148 mm respectively. Standardizing helps in uniformity of the products all over
the nation and will avoid local variations.
11. Which of the following drawing tool is used to transfer dimensions when there
is a repetition of the dimensions?
a) Compass b) Protractor
c) Divider d) Mini – Drafter
Answer: c
Explanation: Divider is used to transfer dimensions when there is a repetition of the
dimensions. It is the faster method than using a scale and then marking the dimension
again. Protractors are only used to mark angles and compass is used to draw circles.
12. Which of the following grades of leads is the hardest?

a) 6B b) 5H c) 4B d) 6H
Answer: d
Explanation: 6H is the hardest grade of lead. The softest grade is 6B. HB is the medium
soft grade. Generally for educational purposes, 2HB pencils are used to make drawings. B
is soft and H is medium hard. As the prefix number increases, the softness increases in B
and the hardness increases in case of H.
13. For marking angles, which of the following drawing tool is used?
a) Protractor b) Divider
c) Compass d) French curve
Answer: a
Explanation: Protractors are used to mark angles from 0˚ to 180˚. There are markings on
the semicircular area of the protractor. The least count of protractor for educational
purpose is 1˚. The accuracy of marking angles is highest in protractor.
14. Using 30˚ – 60˚ – 90˚ and 45˚ – 45˚ – 90˚ set squares, which of the following
angle is not possibke to draw?
a) 45˚ b) 30˚ c) 10˚ d) 90˚
6
Answer: c
Explanation: Using proper combination of both the set squares, one can draw multiple
angles with 30˚ angle minimum. If T-square and mini-drafter also used, the minimum
accurate angle that we can draw is 15˚. Set squares are generally used to draw vertical
and inclined lines.
15. Which is the instrument used to draw parallel lines fast?

a) Set square b) Ruler scale
c) Protractor d) Roll-n-draw
Answer: d
Explanation: Using roll-n-draw scales, we can draw parallel lines very accurately and fast.
They are used to draw parallel lines in horizontal direction, vertical direction and also in
inclined planes. General dimension of the roll-n-draw scale is 30 cm and 15 cm. The scale
is rolled on the paper to achieve parallel lines.
Sheet layout, Types of Machine Drawing and Free-Hand

Sketching
1. The preferred size of the drawing sheets is recommended by the ______
a) B.I.S. b) ASME
c) ASTM d) NIST
Answer: a
Explanation: Bureau of Indian Standards (B.I.S.), American Society of Mechanical
Engineering (ASME), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), U.S. National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
2. The untrimmed size for _______ sheet is 240 mm x 330 mm.

a) A1 b) A3 c) A4 d) A5
Answer: c
Explanation: The untrimmed size of any sheet will be slightly larger than trimmed size. The
untrimmed size for an A4 sheet is 240 mm x 330 mm where trimmed size is 210 mm x
297mm. The space between the trimmed sheet and the frame is called border.
3. SP: 46 (2003) recommends the borders of _______ mm width for the sheet
sizes A0 and A1, and _______ mm for the sizes A2, A3, A4 and A5.
a) 10, 20 b) 15, 20 c) 20, 10 d) 15, 10
Answer: c
7
Explanation: SP: 46 (2003) recommends the borders of 20 mm width for the sheet sizes A0
and A1, and 10 mm for the sizes A2, A3, A4 and A5. The BIS-SP 46 is the standard used
in the educational institution for engineering drawing.
4. The false statement regarding orientation mark.

a) The orientation mark coincides with one of the centering marks
b) Represents the direction to which sheet is placed
c) Orientation mark can be used for the orientation of drawing sheet on the
drawing board
d) Facilitate positioning of the drawing for reproduction purpose
Answer: b
Explanation: The sheet may be placed in any direction but within the sheet, the drawing
should be specified particularly for reproduction purpose, the main purpose is to facilitate
positioning of the drawing and parts in it.
5. The size of the title block is ________ mm x ________ mm.

a) 25 x 10 b) 100 x 25
c) 65 x 185 d) 185 x 65
Answer: d
Explanation: The size of the title block is 185mm x 65 mm which is recommended by B.I.S.
(Bureau of Indian Standards), where 25mm x 10mm is for scale in drawing sheet. Within
the title box there will be so many sections divided like Name of the firm, Drawing No, Title,
etc.
6. The number of folding methods for folding of various sizes of drawing sheets is
__________
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: The final size of the folded print in method 1 will be 297 x 190, while that in
method 2 will be 297 x 210. In either case, the title block is visible at the top of the folded
print. When prints are to be stored and preserved in cabinets they are folded by method 2.
7. Which of the following is reducing scale?

a) 10:1 b) 10:2 c) 0.5:1 d) 2:1
Answer: c
Explanation: 0.5:1 is reducing scale which we can also be written as 1:2. In the remaining
options the antecedent is more than the consequent. So we can say if antecedent is a
decimal and consequent is whole number then the ratio is said to be reducing scale.
8
8. 1:10000 is enlarging scale.
a) True b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: 1:10000 is reducing scale since antecedent is less than consequent. The ratio
represents the object should be drawn 1/10000th of the original one. Usually this much
ratios will be used only when the machine parts are too big.
9. __________ is not an essential thing for free-hand sketching.

a) A soft-grade pencil b) French curves
c) A soft rubber-eraser d) A paper in form of a sketch-book or a pad
Answer: b
Explanation: French curves are used for drawing curves which cannot be drawn with a
compass. Since we are just making a rough sketch of our drawing beforehand, for the
actual drawing there is no need for French curves. The remaining are primary
requirements to sketch any drawing.
10. Which statement is false?

a) Drawing for instruction manual: This is assembly drawing without dimensions.
This is also used for explaining working principle of each part
b) Exploded assembly drawing: This type of assembly drawing is used for
explaining working principle of any machine
c) Drawing for catalogue: Special assembly drawings are prepared for
catalogues, with overall and principal dimensions
d) Patent drawing: It is generally assembly drawing either in pictorial form or
principal view of orthographic projection of machine
Answer: b
Explanation: The correct statements are schematic assembly drawing: This type of
assembly drawing is used for explaining working principle of any machine. Exploded
assembly drawing: It represents the details of a machine in a pictorial form as it is
assembled. It helps the mechanics for dismantling machine for repairing purpose.
11. Arrange the statements. Given statements refers to free-hand sketching of

straight lines.
i) Then begin to draw the line with short and light strokes.
ii) Hold the pencil at about 30 mm distance from the lead point.
iii) Finish finally with a dark and firm line.
iv) Swing it from left to right and backwards, between the two points.
a) i), ii), iii) and iv) b) ii), iii), iv) and i)
9
c) iv), iii), i) and ii) d) ii), iv), i) and iii)
Answer: d
Explanation: Holding the pencil should be primary thing, getting clear view on drawing is
next, after we have to just draw with a light sketch so that we can understand how the
sketch will be, and finishing with a dark sketch.
12. Arrange the statements. Given statements refers to free-hand sketching of a

circle.
i) Add four radial lines between them.
ii) Make the center and through it, draw horizontal and vertical center lines.
iii) The paper may be revolved after about each quarter-circle for easy wrist
motion while drawing.
iv) Mark points on these lines at radius distance from the center.
a) ii), i), iv) and iii) b) ii), iii), iv) and i)
c) iv), iii), i) and ii) d) ii), iv), i) and iii)
Answer: a
Explanation: For drawing, circle center should be the primary thing. Make the circle and
through it draw horizontal and vertical center lines. Later we add four radial lines between
them and then the paper maybe revolved for easy wrist motion to enable drawing.
Different Types of Lines – 1

1. Medium thickness, line-group of 2mm are not used for _________
a) out lines b) dotted lines c) cutting plane –lines d) dimension lines
Answer: d
Explanation: Out lines, dotted lines and cutting plane-lines are drawn using 2mm thickness
lines. Whereas centre lines, section lines, dimension lines, extension lines, construction
lines, leader lines, short break lines and long-break lines are drawn using 1mm thickness
lines.
2. Initial work and construction lines are drawn using __ pencil.

a) 3H b) 4H c) H d) 2H
Answer: c
Explanation: Initial work and construction lines are drawn using H pencil. 2H pencil is used
for outlines, dotted lines, dimension lines and arrowheads. 3H, 4H are used for centre lines
and section lines.
10
3. Centre lines, section lines are drawn using __ pencil.
a) H b) 2H c) 3H or 4H d) HB
Answer: c
Explanation: Centre lines, section lines are drawn using 3H or 4H pencil. Outlines, dotted
lines, section-plane lines, dimension lines and arrow heads are drawn using 2H. These
different pencils give different shades which give different importance to lines in drawing.
4. The line given below is used for____________
a) Long-break line b) Cutting planes

c) Centroidal lines d) Out lines of adjacent parts
Answer: a
Explanation: Lines used to represent cutting planes is chain thin (narrow) with thick (wide)
at the ends and at changing of position, lines used to represent centroidal lines and
outlines of adjacent parts are chain thin double-dashed or long-dashed double-dotted
(narrow).
5. The line given below is used for_________________
a) Hidden outlines b) Cutting planes

c) Hidden edges d) Dimension lines
Answer: b
Explanation: Hidden outlines, hidden edges are drawn using dashed thin (narrow) lines.
Dimension lines are drawn using continuous thin (narrow) lines (straight or curved). The
given type of line in question is used to represent cutting planes.
6. Dashed thick (wide) line is represented by ____________
Answer: c
Explanation: The other lines are continuous thin (narrow) (straight or curved) which
areused for grid, dimension. Dashed thin (narrow) is used for hidden outlines. A Chain thin
long-dashed dotted (narrow) line is used for centre line, lines of symmetry etc.
11
7. Match the following.
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: b
Explanation: Thick-thin-thick are used for cutting planes, dashed thick (wide) is used for
surface treatment, zigzag lines are used for long-break lines and continuous thin line is
used for dimensions, extensions and projection lines.
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: b
Explanation: Thick-thin-thick are used for cutting planes, dashed thick (wide) is used for
surface treatment, chain thick or long dashed dotted (wide) is used for indication of lines or
surfaces to which a special requirement applies and continuous thin line is used for
dimensions, extensions and projection lines.
9. Drawing pencils are graded according to increase in relative __________

a) diameter b) sharpness
c) length d) hardness
Answer: d
Explanation: Drawing pencils are graded according to increase in relative hardness. They
12
are marketed with the labeled as H, 2H, 3H, 4H, 5H, 6H etc. These grades are used for
getting accurate, clean and neat drawings.
1. Dimension lines i.Continuous thick lines
2. Extension or Projection lines ii.Continuous thin lines
3. Margin lines iii.Continuous thick lines
4. Outlines iv.Continuous thin lines
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: c
Explanation: Dimension lines are continuous thin lines, are terminated at the outer ends by
pointed arrowheads. Extension lines continuous thin lines extend by about 3mm beyond
the dimension lines. Margin lines are continuous thick or wide lines along which the prints
are trimmed. Outlines are continuous thick or wide lines.
11. Short-break lines are drawn freehand while long-break lines are ruled lines.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Short-break lines are continuous, thin and wavy. They are drawn with
freehand and are used to show a short-break, or irregular boundaries. Long-break lines are
thin ruled lines with short zigzags within them.
13
Different Types of Lines – 2
1. In engineering drawing, which type of line indicates that there is a change of
plane?
a) Continuous thin wavy
b) Long chain thin
c) Continuous thick
d) Medium thick short dashes
Answer: c
Explanation: In engineering drawing, a change of plane is indicated by drawing continuous
thick lines. Continuous thin lines are used for indicating dimension line, hatching line,
revolved section, etc. Long chain lines are used to indicate center line, cutting lines.
2. Which of the following lines are used to show that the object is cut and then
viewed?
a) Hidden lines
b) Leader lines
c) Centre lines
d) Hatching Lines
Answer: d
Explanation: Hatching lines are used to show that the orthographic view is drawn after a
section of the object is cut. They indicate that the object is cut and it shows the remaining
solid body. Hidden lines are used to indicate holes or slots.
3. What do hidden lines in orthographic projections denote?

a) Holes or slots
b) Change of Plane
c) Position of cut
d) Centre of a circle or cylinder
Answer: a
Explanation: Hidden lines denote those parts which cannot be seen when viewing the
object. They are used when there are holes or slots in the object, if they cannot be viewed
directly. Change of plane is indicated by outlines. Position of cut is denoted by section line.
14
4. From the fbelow figure, what is the name of the line X?
a) Outline
b) Section line
c) Hidden line
d) Hatching
Answer: c
Explanation: Hidden lines are dashed lines with dashes equaling 2mm and the gap 1mm.
These lines depict that there is a hole or slot i.e. no solid part is present there. Section line
are long chain thin lines with thick ends.
5. What is the type of line used for line a?
a) Continuous thick
b) Continuous thin straight
c) Medium thick short dashes
d) Continuous thin wavy
Answer: b
Explanation: Continuous thin straight lines are used to denote the dimensions of the object.
Thin lines are used so as to distinguish between outline and the dimension line.
Continuous thin wavy lines are used to indicate short breaks or irregular boundary line.
6. The axis of the cylinder or sphere is denoted by which of the following line?
a) Section line
b) Centre line
c) Hidden line
d) Leader line
Answer: b
15
Explanation: Centre line shows the axis of the cylinder or sphere. These lines generally
pass through the centre of the circle. For a cylinder, they generally are parallel to the height
of the cylinder. For circles, two centre lines are drawn perpendicular to each other passing
through the centre of the circle.
7. What is the standard length and width of the arrowhead of dimension lines?
a) 2mm and 2mm
b) 3mm and 1mm
c) 4mm and 2mm
d) 3mm and 2mm
Answer: b
Explanation: Arrowheads of dimension lines have a length of 3mm and 1mm wide. When
drawing the arrowheads the ratio, length: width is to be maintained at 3:1. The arrowheads
can be drawn with length 6mm and breadth 2mm, since the ratio is the same.
8. What is the length of the short dashes of the centre lines?

a) 5mm
b) 2mm
c) 1mm
d) 3mm
Answer: b
Explanation: Centre line consists of long dash of 8-10mm, a gap of 1mm, short dash of
2mm and then a gap of 1mm. This pattern continues throughout the centre line. In case of
section line, the ends of the section line are thickened. This is how section line and centre
line are different.
9. Among the following, which of the representation is wrong?

a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
Explanation: For proper dimensioning, it is important for the lines to meet. One line cannot
be in air with respect to the other intersecting line; they should meet at some point. If the
lines do not meet, dimensions will not have accuracy.
16
10. Which type of line is used to join the dimension line and the curve that needs
to be dimensioned?
a) Leader line
b) Outline
c) Dimension line
d) Section line
Answer: a
Explanation: Leader lines lead the dimension line to the curve that needs to be
dimensioned. It is a bridge connecting two lines. Outlines are the main or most prominent
lines of the object when viewed for drawing. Dimension lines are used to denote the
particular dimensions.
11. What is the difference between the section line and the centre line?
a) The length of the long dashes
b) The length of short dashes
c) The width of the gap
d) The two ends of the lines
Answer: d
Explanation: The ends of a section line are thickened so as to distinguish it from the centre
line. The rest of the section line has the same thickness and dimensions as that of the
centre line. The thickening of the ends in the section line is also used to denote the
direction of viewing.
System of Dimensioning – 1
1. Which are the two systems of placing dimensions? (Options given below)
i. Aligned system, ii. Break system, iii. Unidirectional system, iv. Directional
system
a) i, ii
b) i, iii
c) ii, iv
d) i, iv
Answer: b
Explanation: The two systems of placing dimensions are aligned system and unidirectional
system. In the aligned system the dimension is placed perpendicular to the dimension line.
17
In unidirectional system all dimensions are placed such that they can be read from the
bottom of the drawing sheet.
2. Aligned system is used for drawing of air crafts, automobiles.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the drawing of aircrafts, automobiles etc. are very large it is
inconvenient to read dimensions from the right-hand side. So we use unidirectional system
of dimensioning but not aligned system of dimensioning.
3. In unidirectional system the dimensions are ______

a) Placed above the dimension lines
b) Placed below the dimension lines
c) Placed by breaking the dimension line in the middle
d) Placed left side of the dimension line
Answer: c
Explanation: In unidirectional system all dimensions are placed such that they can be read
from the bottom of the drawing sheet. The dimension lines are broken near the middle for
inserting the dimensions. This is used in mainly large drawings.
4. In aligned system the dimensions are __________

a) Placed parallel to the dimension line
b) Placed perpendicular to the dimension line
c) Placed left side of the dimension line
d) Placed right side of the dimension line
Answer: b
Explanation: In the aligned system the dimension is placed perpendicular to the dimension
line. The dimensions should be placed near the middle and above, but clear of the
dimension lines.
5. From unidirectional system, it is __________

a) Convenient to read dimensions from the bottom edge
b) Convenient to read dimensions from the right-hand edge
c) Convenient to read dimensions from the right-hand edge
d) Convenient to read dimensions from the top edge
Answer: a
Explanation: Unidirectional system of dimensioning is used for large drawings. So the
18
dimensions are placed by breaking the dimension line near the middle. Also all dimensions
are so placed that they can be read from the bottom edge.
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, ii
d) 1, iv; 2, i; 3, ii; 4, iii
Answer: c
Explanation: An arrowhead is placed at each end of a dimension line. The pointed end
touches the outline or an extension line. The length of the arrowhead should be about
three times its maximum width.
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, ii
d) 1, iv; 2, i; 3, ii; 4, iii
Answer: c
Explanation: An arrowhead is placed at each end of a dimension line. The size of an
arrowhead should be proportional to the thickness of the outlines. It is drawn freehand with
two strokes made in the direction of its pointed end. The space between them is neatly
filled up.
19
8. In which system of dimensioning the figures can read from bottom as well as
right hand side of the drawing?
a) Aligned system
b) Unidirectional system
c) Nonaligned multidirectional system
d) Parallel system
Answer: a
Explanation: In aligned system of dimensioning, the dimension figures are written in such a
way that they can read from the bottom and right hand side of the drawing. It increases the
effort in reading the dimensions.
System of Dimensioning – 2
1. Which of the following dimension is according to the ‘aligned system’ of
dimensioning?
a) 40
b) 55
c) 25
d) 10
Answer: a
Explanation: In aligned system of dimensioning, the dimensions are written on the
dimension line. Their alignment is along the length of the dimension line. The dimensions
are always written either on top or below the dimension line but never cutting it.
2. In dimensioning, the lines enclosing the dimension line are known as ____
a) Leader line
b) Dimension line
20
c) Extension line
d) Outline
Answer: c
Explanation: The extension line encloses the dimension line. It starts and ends with the line
to be dimensioned. The extension line is extended beyond the dimension line by 4mm. It
helps in defining proper boundaries for the dimension line.
3. When dimensioning the circle, the dimension line begins from the centre of the
circle.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: When dimensioning the circle, the dimension line begins from the centre of
the circle. With the help of the leader line, the dimensions are written on it. The notations φ
and R are used to indicate whether the dimension denotes diameter or the radius
respectively.
4. While dimensioning a circle, the leader line and the dimension line are drawn
at which angle with respect to each other?
a) 45˚
b) 30˚
c) 0˚ or 180˚
d) 90˚
Answer: c
Explanation: When dimensioning a circle, the leader line and the dimension line are drawn
0˚ or 180˚ with respect to each other. This helps in clear dimensioning of the circle. It also
reduces the difficulty in reading the dimensions when there are concentric circles involved.
5. While dimensioning holes, slots, etc. how would their number be specified?
a) Number written on the dimension line
b) Number is written of the leader line
c) Number is written on the corner of the page
d) Number is written on the side of the hole or slot.
Answer: a
Explanation: The number of holes, slots, etc. is written on the dimension line along with the
dimensions. For example, if there are four holes of same dimensions; then only one of the
holes will have their dimensions specified and along with dimensions, the number is also
written; 4Holes, φx mm.
21
6. What is the height if the dimension figures written on the dimension line?
a) 7mm to 9mm
b) 2mm to 3mm
c) 6mm to 8mm
d) 3mm to 5mm
Answer: d
Explanation: It is customary to write the figures with a height of 3mm to 5mm. This helps in
the readability of the dimension figures. It also makes reading the dimensions easy. The
thickness of the letters is so adjusted that it can read without effort.
7. While dimensioning, what should always be written before a point

accompanied by a figure if the value of the figure is less than unity?
a) 1
b) 0
c) 2
d) 6
Answer: b
Explanation: For figures having value less than one, dimensions should be written as 0.5 or
0.3 as per the value. There needs to be a zero in front of the point if it is less than 1.
Sometimes zero is omitted but this practice should not be encouraged.
8. In unidirectional system, the figures are written along the dimension line.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In unidirectional system of dimensioning, the dimension figures are written in
between the dimension line. All dimensions are aligned according to the observer i.e. all
are written in horizontal direction and not along the length of the dimension line.
9. In which system of dimensioning the figures can read from bottom only?
a) Aligned system
b) Unidirectional system
c) Nonaligned multidirectional system
d) Parallel system
Answer: b
Explanation: In unidirectional system of dimensioning, the dimension figures are so written
that they can be read only when viewed from the bottom and not from any other direction.
Reading the dimensions is easier than in aligned system.
22
Types of Dimensioning – 1
1. The ratio of height to length of an arrow in dimensioning is ___
a) 1:2
b) 1:3
c) 1:4
d) 1:1.5
Answer: b
Explanation: The standard ratio of height to length of an arrow in dimensioning should be
kept only 1:3. Even if there are so many types of arrows like oblique stroke, closed, open
small open circle etc. Generally closed and filled arrowhead is widely used and with 1:3
ratio.
2. Dimensioning doesn’t represent _____

a) height
b) length
c) depth
d) material
Answer: d
Explanation: Dimensioning relates to the geometry of machine part/plot but not the
material, transparency, physical, mechanical, chemical properties of machine part/plot.
Other than the dimensions are placed near the title block of drawing sheet if necessary.
3. Which is the wrong statement regarding dimensions?

a) Every dimension must be given, but none should be given more than once.
b) Every dimension should be written to the left side of the drawing.
c) Dimensions should be placed outside the views.
d) A centre line should not be used as dimension line.
Answer: b
Explanation: There is no such rule that the dimensions should be placed only on left side of
drawing because, it may not possible to represent every dimension only on left side. So, it
is given flexibility that dimensions can be given any side of drawing but none should be
given twice or more.
4. Dimension lines should be drawn at least ________mm away from the outlines
and from each other.
a) 5
b) 6
23
c) 7
d) 8
Answer: d
Explanation: The standards are made as such that dimension lines should be drawn at
least 8 mm away from the outlines and from each other. This gives clear, neat appearance
in mentioning dimensions in drawing.
5. Two types of dimensions needed on a drawing are: i) size or functional

dimensions and ii) location or datum dimensions.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Yes, the given statement is true. The former indicate sizes i.e. length,
breadth, height, depth, etc. The second one shows locations or exact positions of various
constructional details within the object.
6. The wrongly represented line in the below figure is _______
a) dimension line
b) extension line
c) outline
d) centre line
Answer: c
Explanation: The line which is represented as outline is hidden line, the dark line which is
to represent main component is outline of component, the remaining are correct. The 96
given there is the dimension figure.
7. An outline or a centre line should be used as a dimension line.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
24
Explanation: An outline or a centre line should never be used as a dimension line. A centre
line may be extended to serve as an extension line. Since, the outline may be
misunderstood if it is used as dimension line.
8. Which is the wrong statement from the below options?

a) As far as possible all dimensions should be given in millimeters, omitting the
abbreviation mm.
b) The height of the dimension figures should be from 3mm to 5mm.
c) A zero must always precede the decimal point when the dimension is less than
unity
d) The dimensions should only be given in mm
Answer: d
Explanation: There is no need to give the dimensions only in mm. Some of the drawings
may be very large in size it is not convenient to give dimensions in millimeters and another
unit is used but only one dimension should be used among whole drawing.
9. Location and datum dimensions indicates __________

a) length
b) diameter
c) height
d) position
Answer: b
Explanation: The location or datum dimension which are generally shown by letters F and
L respectively, and shows the location or exact position of various constructional details
within the object. The letter F represents functional dimensions.
10. Size or functional dimensions does not indicate _________________

a) thickness
b) radius
c) depth
d) position
Answer: d
Explanation: Size or functional dimensions only represents dimensions, figures of length,
breadth, height, depth, and diameter. But not show the locations or positions these are
indicated by location or datum dimensions.
25
Types of Dimensioning – 2
1. In chain dimension, the dimensions are arranged parallel to each other.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In chain dimension, the dimensions are arranged in a straight line. The type of
dimensioning in which the dimensions are arranged parallel to each other is called as
Parallel Dimension. The combination of both the type is called as combined dimension.
2. In combined dimension, the dimensions are arranged in a straight line only.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In combined type of dimension, the dimensions are arranged in a straight line
as well as parallel to each other. It depends on the convenience of dimensioning and the
important dimensions. When more than two dimensions overlap, combined dimensioning is
done.
3. In which of the following type of dimensioning, the dimensions are arranged

only in a straight line?
a) Parallel dimension
b) Chain Dimension
c) Combined dimension
d) Aligned dimension
Answer: b
Explanation: In chain dimension, the dimensions are arranged only in a straight line. In this
type of dimensioning, the dimensions appear less crowded and make it easier to read.
There is almost less confusion while interpreting the dimensions.
26
4. Which type of dimensioning is shown in the figure?
b) Unidirectional dimension
d) Chain Dimension
Answer: a
Explanation: The dimensions are arranged in a parallel manner. Hence the answer is
parallel dimension. This type of dimensioning is also called as aligned dimension, as the
dimension figures are aligned along the length of the dimension line.
5. Which type of dimensioning is shown below?
a) Chain dimension
b) Parallel dimension
c) Unidirectional dimension
d) Combined dimension
Answer: a
Explanation: The type of dimensioning followed is chain dimension. The dimensions are
arranged in a straight line. In this example, the aligned dimensioning system is being used
i.e. the dimension figures are aligned along the length of the dimension line.
27
6. Which type of dimensioning is done below?
a) Unidirectional and chain dimension

b) Aligned and parallel dimension
c) Aligned and chain dimension
d) Unidirectional and parallel dimension
Answer: a
Explanation: The dimension figures are written in such a way that they can be read from
bottom only. The chain dimensioning is used as the dimensions are arranged in a straight
line. In parallel dimension, the dimension lines are arranged parallel to each other.
28
7. Identify the type of dimensioning used in the figure below.
a) Parallel and aligned dimension

b) Parallel and unidirectional dimension
c) Chain and aligned dimension
d) Chain and unidirectional dimension
Answer: c
Explanation: The type of dimensioning done is chain and aligned dimension. The
dimensions are arranged in a straight line and the dimension figures are aligned along the
length of the dimension line. The dimension figures can be read from the right side as well
as bottom.
8. Identify the type of dimensioning used in the example below.
29
a) Parallel and aligned dimension
b) Chain and aligned dimension
c) Chain and unidirectional dimension
d) Combined and aligned dimension
Answer: d
Explanation: The type of dimensioning done is combined dimensioning and the system of
dimensioning used is aligned. The dimensions are arranged in both ways i.e. parallel as
well as in a straight line. The dimension figures are aligned along the length of the
dimension line.
9. Which type of dimensioning is done in the example below?
b) Chain dimension
d) Aligned dimension
Answer: c
Explanation: The dimensions are arranged parallel to each other in horizontal dimensioning
and in straight line for vertical dimensioning. There is a need for calculation for finding out
some dimensions. The dimension figures can be read only from the bottom.
30
10. Identify the type and system of dimensioning in the example given below.
a) Unidirectional and parallel dimension

b) Unidirectional and chain dimension
c) Unidirectional and combined dimension
d) Aligned and combined dimension
Answer: c
Explanation: The example has unidirectional and chain type of dimensioning. The
dimension figures are arranged horizontally and can only be read from the bottom. The
dimensions are arranged in a straight line and not in parallel direction.
Basic Principles in Dimensioning -1

1. The advised position of placement of the dimensions should be ______
a) Inside the view
b) Outside the view
c) On the boundaries of the view
d) Cutting the view
Answer: b
Explanation: It is advised to place the dimensions outside the view. This will bring clear
picture of the view and will help in the understanding of the dimensions. Placing the
dimensions outside the view gives a cleaner look.
31
2. From the following figure, which is the repetitive dimension?
a) 30
b) 70
c) 10
d) 20
Answer: c
Explanation: From the front view it is clear that the circle has diameter 20 mm. Hence its
radius will be 10mm. The dimension 10mm in the side view is just a repetition of this
information. Repetitive dimensions are redundant and they need to be avoided.
3. Which of the following dimensions is arranged haphazardly?
a) 45 in S.V.
b) 45 in F.V.
c) 30 in S.V.
d) 30 in F.V.
Answer: d
Explanation: The dimension 30mm is repeated and is placed in a haphazard manner.
There is no need for the dimension in F.V. as it is clearly understood from the S.V. Such
dimensions should be avoided at all costs.
32
4. If there is a need for the center line, then it can be used as a _____
a) Dimension line
b) Leader line
c) Extension line
d) Section line
Answer: c
Explanation: The center line can be used an extension line. With the help of the center line
as extension line, we can dimension the distance between the centers of the circles from
the outline view of the object. Thus helps in drawing the circle accurately.
5. Which of the following dimension is incorrect?
a) 22.5
b) 15
c) 20
d) 35
Answer: c
Explanation: The dimension 20mm is given without using the extension line. The outline of
the view is used to dimension the line. This is not usually favoured. Always use extension
line and place the dimension line in between the extension lines.
6. Dimension lines should not intersect each other as far as possible.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Dimension should never intersect each other as far possible. Intersecting
33
dimension lines can cause confusion and needs more effort to understand them. To
increase the readability of the dimension they should not intersect with each other.
7. Different units of measurement can be used in dimensioning a view.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: All dimensions should be expressed in one unit. Using different units for
dimensions will create confusion for the observer and there is a chance of
misinterpretation. Therefore, using different units should be avoided and a tag ‘All
dimensions are in mm’ should be added above the title page.
8. While dimensioning a cylinder in the view where the true shape of the cylinder
is not visible, which symbol is used to denote that it is a cylinder?
a) •
b) φ
c) ϴ
d) ○
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the true shape of the cylinder is circle from one view, we used the
symbol φ followed by the dimension figure while dimensioning it in the view where it is
seen as a rectangle. The cross-section of the rectangle is square then the symbol •
followed by the dimension figure is used.
9. As far as possible, dimension should be given to which of the following lines?

a) Outline
b) Hidden line
c) Center line
d) Leader line
Answer: a
Explanation: Dimensions are given to the outlines of the view. It is advised not to
dimension hidden lines as their true shape is not known when they hidden. It is important
to dimension those lines whose true shape is properly visible.
10. How is a spot face hole with 24mm diameter, 5mm deep and spot face
diameter 10mm dimensioned?
a) Φ24 and φ10
b) 5 SPOT FACE, φ24 X φ10
34
c) φ24 SPOT FACE, φ10
d) φ10 SPOT FACE, φ24 x 5 DEEP
Answer: d
Explanation: Holes made by spot facing are dimensioned in this manner ‘φ10 SPOT FACE,
φ24 x 5 DEEP’. This means the there is a spot face of 10mm diameter after the 24mm
diameter and 5 mm thickness. Using this makes the reading of the dimension easy.
Basic Principles in Dimensioning – 2

1. How is tapped hole of diameter 10mm with 20mm dimensioned?
a) M10
b) M10, 20
c) M10, DEEP 20
d) M10 20 mm deep
Answer: c
Explanation: A tapped hole of 10mm diameter and 20mm deep is dimensioned as M10,
DEEP 20. The ‘M’ stands for metric threads. These are standard threads whose pitch is
predefined according to the diameter. The ‘M’ indicates that the hole is tapped.
2. How is a blind drilled hole of 15mm diameter and 15mm deep dimensioned?
a) M15, DEEP 15
b) φ15, DEEP 15
c) φ15
d) φ15 x 15
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the hole is not through, it is mandatory to mention the depth of the hole
while dimensioning. Hence a blind drilled hole of 15mm diameter and 15mm deep is
dimensioned as φ15, DEEP 15. Since the hole is not threaded ‘M’ should not be used for
dimensioning.
3. The dimensions of circular part or arc should be given where the true shape is
visible.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Circular parts and arcs should be dimensioned where their true shapes are
35
visible. Proper notations should be used to dimension circles and arcs. This will help in
clarifying the dimension and reduces the confusion if there are any.
4. A chamfer of 3mm thick and angle 45˚ inclination is dimensioned as _____

a) 45˚ x 3
b) 3 x 45˚
c) 45˚
d) 3mm
Answer: b
Explanation: A chamfer of 3mm thickness and angle 45˚ is dimensioned as 3 x 45˚. From
this dimension, we can get the information of the angle at which the chamfer is cut and the
distance from one of the sides. This helps in reading of the dimensions easy.
5. The leader should be used to dimension the circle.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The leader lines should be used to dimension the circle. This helps in
identifying the true shape as well the dimension related to the circle. It is advised not to
dimension cylinders in the views where it is seen as any shape other than circle but should
be dimensioned where its cross-section is clearly visible.
6. What does dimensioning of a circle depend upon?

a) Shape
b) Length
c) Unit
d) Size
Answer: d
Explanation: The dimensioning of the circle depends upon the size or diameter of the
circle. If the diameter of the circle is considerably large, the dimension can be given inside
the circle itself. It should be noted that the dimension of the circle should be given in the
view where its true shape is visible.
7. The dimensions which are smaller are to be placed _______

a) Nearer to the view
b) Further from the outline of the view
c) Inside the view
d) On the view
36
Answer: a
Explanation: The dimensions which are smaller should be placed nearer to the view while
the larger view should be place further away. Dimensions large or small should not be
placed on the view. Extension lines should be used and the outlines of ht view for
dimensioning.
8. While dimensioning, where should the large dimensions be placed?

a) On the outlines of the view
b) Near the view
c) Further away from the view
d) Inside the view
Answer: c
Explanation: The larger dimensions should be placed further away from the outlines of the
view. They should be placed beyond the smaller dimensions. This helps in a neat
arrangement of the dimensions and can be understood easily.
9. Extension lines should start from which part of the drawing?

a) Away from the outlines
b) From inside the views
c) No need for extension lines
d) Outlines of the view
Answer: d
Explanation: Extension lines should start immediately from the outlines of the views. There
should be no gap between the outlines and the extension lines. Dimensions should not be
given on the outlines themselves and therefore extension lines should be used.
10. Dimensions can be placed anywhere irrespective of the features visible.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Dimensions have to be placed where the true shape or features are clearly
indicated. For example, if there is cylindrical hole in the object, the size of the cylinder i.e.
the diameter of the base circle should be dimensioned in the view where it is seen as circle
and not in the view where the cylinder is seen as rectangle.
Terminology of Dimensioning – 1
37
1. The wrong statement about leader line is _____________
a) A leader line is a thin continuous line connecting a note or a dimension figure.
b) One end of the leader terminates either in an arrowhead or a dot.
c) The leader is drawn vertical or horizontal or curved.
d) Use of common leaders for more than one feature should never be made.
Answer: c
Explanation: The leader is never drawn vertical or horizontal or curved. It is drawn at a
convenient angle of not less than 30o to the line to which it touches. When pointing to a
circle or an arc it is drawn radially.
2. Identify the ‘a’ in the given picture
a) dimension line
b) hidden line
c) centre line
d) outline
Answer: c
Explanation: Centre line usually represents the centre of circle, the axis of cylindrical
objects, lines of symmetry, trajectories, pitch circle of gears and pitch circle of holes,
represented by chain thin long-dashed dotted (narrow).
38
3. Identify the ‘a’ in the below given picture.
a) dimension line
b) outline
c) leader
d) extension line
Answer: d
Explanation: An extension line also a thin continuous line drawn in extension of an outline.
It extends by about 3 mm beyond the dimension line. Dimension line is a thin continuous
line. It is terminated by arrowheads touching the outlines, extension lines or centre lines.
4. While representing the diameter in dimensioning it is represented as

__________
a) D
b) Ø
c) Dia
d) d
Answer: b
Explanation: Diameter is represented the unique way as shown in options which directly
represents the circle and line at its center that is center line where diameter is measured.
But radius is represented as capital R.
39
5. From below given figure, match the following.
a) a, i; b, ii; d, iii; e, iv
b) a, iv; b, iii; d, ii; e, i
c) a, i; b, iv; d, iii; e, ii
d) a, iii; b, ii; d, i; e, iv
Answer: b
Explanation: Chain thin long-dashed dotted (narrow) is used for centre line. Dashed thin
(narrow) is used for hidden outlines and hidden edges. Continuous thin (narrow) (straight
or curved) is used for extension line as well as dimension line, but dimension line has
arrow heads at ends.
6. Identify the note in the below given figure.
a) A
b) B
c) C
d) D
Answer: b
40
Explanation: A note gives information regarding specific operation relating to a feature. It is
placed outside a view but adjacent to the feature concerned. It is so written that it may be
read when the drawing is viewed from the bottom edge.
7. It is recommended that a gap of about 2 mm should be kept between the

extension line and an outline.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: It is recommended that a gap of about 1 mm should be kept between the
extension line and an outline or object boundary by the B.I.S. It extends by about 3 mm
beyond the dimension line.
8. A dot may also be used to replace an arrowhead.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Arrowheads should ordinarily be drawn within the dimensioned feature. But
when there is fewer space arrowheads can also be kept outside and a dot may also be
used to replace arrowhead and also if there is no space for dimension figure to be kept on
dimension line the figure may be written above the extended portion of dimension line.
Terminology of Dimensioning – 2
1. Which of the lines is a thin continuous line with the ends terminating in
arrowheads and is enclosed by extension lines, outlines or centre lines?
a) Dimension line
b) Leader line
c) Extension line
d) Section line
Answer: a
Explanation: The dimension line is a thin continuous line with the ends terminating in
arrowheads and is enclosed by extension lines, outlines or centre lines. The dimension
figures is written on the top of the dimension line or aligned at the centre of the dimension
line according to the system of dimensioning.
41
2. What is the name of the thin continuous line which encloses the dimension
lines are generally drawn 1mm away from the outlines?
a) Dimension line
b) Section line
c) Leader line
d) Extension line
Answer: d
Explanation: Extension line is a thin continuous line which encloses the dimension line and
they are generally drawn 1mm away from the outlines. They need to drawn near to the
outlines and far away from the outlines.
3. In engineering drawing, which type of arrowhead is used?

a) Open (90˚)
b) Small open circle
c) Closed and filled
d) Oblique stroke
Answer: c
Explanation: Usually in engineering drawing, the arrowheads used are closed and neatly
filled. They are made by hand in proportion to the thickness of the outline. The length of the
arrowhead is three times the width of the arrowhead.
4. What is used to specify the operation done on a particular feature?

a) Dimension
b) Note
c) Arrowhead
d) Leader line
Answer: b
Explanation: A note is used to indicate information about the operation done on a particular
feature. It is written near to the feature and usually it is shown outside the view. With this
type of information of the drawing manufacturing of the part becomes easy.
5. Which of the following is a thin continuous line with one side terminating in
arrowhead and the other with a period?
a) Note
b) Extension
c) Leader
d) Dimension
Answer: c
42
Explanation: A leader is thin continuous line with one end terminating in arrowhead and the
other with a period. While dimensioning arcs or circles, leaders are aligned to the radius of
the respective arcs or circles.
6. What is the inclination of the leader in a drawing?

a) Vertical
b) Horizontal
c) Less than 30˚
d) Greater than 30˚
Answer: d
Explanation: The leaders are drawn at an inclination of more than 30˚. They should not be
placed vertical, horizontal and less than 30˚ to the respective feature. The arrowhead
should touch the feature they are describing or dimensioning.
7. A leader line can be drawn curved.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: A leader line can never be drawn curved. They should be drawn straight and
inclined at an angle not less than 30˚. They should not be placed vertical or horizontal in
the views. One side of the leader line should terminate in arrowhead and the other in
period.
8. Which of the following dimension needs to be calculated?

a) Length of the rectangle
b) Breadth of the rectangle
c) Diameter of circle
d) Position of circle
Answer: c
Explanation: In the given example, the diameter of the circle is not dimensioned. Diameter
of a circle is a very prominent feature and should not be missed while dimensioning. The
dimensions are so given that they do not require any further calculations. The above
example is the incorrect way of dimensioning.
9. While dimensioning a feature with a square cross-section, what should be

added before the dimension figure?
a) SQUARE
b) SQ
43
c) Sq.
d) Nothing
Answer: b
Explanation: While dimensioning a feature with a square cross-section, ‘SQ’ should be
added before the dimension figure to indicate its shape. For dimensioning the base circle
of a cylinder, the symbol ‘φ’ is added before the dimension figure.
10. While dimensioning a sphere, what should be added in front of the dimension
figure?
a) Sp.
b) SP.
c) SPHERE
d) φ
Answer: c
Explanation: Since in all views, a sphere is seen as circle. While dimensioning a sphere it
is important to add ‘SPHERE’ in front of the dimension figure giving information about the
diameter of the sphere. Fore example, a sphere with 25mm diameter will be dimensioned
as ‘SPHERE 25’.
11. Operations performed on a particular feature are indicated by using extension

lines.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: A note is used to indicate the operations done on a feature if there any. The
note accompanied by a leader line which terminates in arrowhead on one side and a
period on other side. For example, the threads on feature may have a note indicating
whether it is a single start or double start.
12. Tapers and slope indicated in the view are part of dimensioning.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Tapers and slopes are part of dimensioning. They are calculated through their
respective formulas and are indicated as 1: x, near the feature which has the slope or taper
on them. While drawing these features, having this information sure comes handy.
44
Representative Factor – 1
1. Representative fraction is the ____________________
a) ratio of the length in drawing to the actual length
b) ratio of the actual length to the length in drawing
c) reciprocal of actual length
d) square of the length in drawing
Answer: a
Explanation: Representative fraction is the ratio of the length of the object represented on
drawing to the actual length of the object represented.
2. The scale of a drawing is given as 1:20. What is the representative fraction?

a) 20
b) 1/20
c) 0.5
d) 0.02
Answer: b
Explanation: The scale of drawing is given as 1:20 that is a reducing scale, this means
dimensions are made to 1/20th of full size. So the representative factor is that dimension in
drawing to actual dimension. R.F. = (1/20)/1 = 1/20.
3. The scale of a drawing is given as 15:1. What is the representative fraction?

a) 15
b) 0.15
c) 1.5
d) 1/15
Answer: a
Explanation: The scale of drawing is given as 15:1 that is a enlarging scale, this means
dimensions are increased to 15 times of actual ones. So the representative factor is that
dimension in drawing to actual dimension. R.F. = 15/1 = 15.
4. The length of the drawing is 50 mm, the scale is given as 1:5. Find the actual
length.
a) 50 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 25 cm
45
d) 10 mm
Answer: c
Explanation: The scale given is 1:5 (reducing scale) that is the drawing is made with 1/5th
of actual dimensions. So we have to multiply the drawing length with 5. 50 mm x 5 =250
mm and 1 cm =10 mm. The actual length in cm is 25.
5. The actual length is 1m. The length of drawing is 5cm. Find the representative
factor.
a) 1/5
b) 20
c) 1/20
d) 5
Answer: c
Explanation: Representative factor is the ratio of the length represented in drawing to the
actual length. Here given actual length is 1 m =100cm and length of drawing is 5 cm. R.F.
=5 cm/100 cm = 0.05 (or) = 1/20.
6. The representative factor is 4. The actual length is 20 mm. Find the length of
drawing.
a) 5 cm
b) 5 mm
c) 0.2 mm
d) 8 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: The representative factor given is 4 (more than one), shows the scale is
enlarging. Representative factor = ratio of length in drawing to actual length. R.F. = (length
in drawing)/20 mm = 4.
Length in drawing = 20 mm x 4 = 80 mm = 8 cm.
7. A machine part is drawn two times with different scales. The ratio of 1st
drawing’s R.F. to 2nd drawing R.F. with respect to actual object is found to be 2.
The length of second drawing is 10 mm. Find the 1st drawing length.
a) 5 mm
b) 200 mm
c) 5 cm
d) 2 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: 2= 1st drawing R.F/2nd drawing R.F. =(length of 1st drawing/ actual
46
length)/(length of 2nd drawing/ actual length) = length of first drawing/ length of second
drawing= length of first drawing/ 10 mm. 2 x 10 mm = 20 mm. So therefore the length of
first drawing is 20 mm = 2 cm.
8. The length of the drawing is 20 cm, the scale is given as 2:1. Find the actual
length.
a) 50 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 25 cm
d) 10 mm
Answer: b
Explanation: The scale given is 2:1 (enlarging scale) that is the drawing is made 2 times of
actual dimensions. So we have to divide the drawing length with 2. 20 mm / 2 =100 mm
and 1 cm =10 mm. The actual length in cm is 10 cm.
9. The actual length is 1cm. The length of drawing is 30 cm. Find the
representative factor.
a) 1/30
b) 30
c) 0.03
d) 15
Answer: b
Explanation: Representative factor is the ratio of the length represented in drawing to the
actual length. Here given actual length is 1 cm and length of drawing is 30 cm. R.F. =30
cm/1 cm = 30.
10. The representative factor is 0.02. The actual length is 50 cm. Find the length
of drawing.
a) 10 cm
b) 5 cm
c) 0.25 cm
d) 10 mm
Answer: d
Explanation: The representative factor given is 0.02 (less than one), shows the reducing
scale. Representative factor = ratio of length in drawing to actual length. R.F. = (length in
drawing)/50 cm = 0.02. Length in drawing = 0.02 x 50 cm = 1 cm = 10 mm.
47
11. The ratio of length of actual object to length of drawing is given as 5. Find the
scale and R.F. (Representative factor).
a) 1:5, 1/5
b) 5:1, 1/5
c) 1:5, 5
d) 5:1, 5
Answer: a
Explanation: Given that the ratio of actual length to length of drawing which is reciprocal of
R.F. So the R.F. for given values is 1/5. From the given information it can be understood
that the actual object is 5 times larger than the drawing, so the scale is reducing scale i.e.
1:5.
12. The representative factor is 2, the drawing length is 100 mm. Find the actual
length.
a) 20 cm
b) 50 mm
c) 20 mm
d) 50 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The scale is enlarging scale. The ratio of length of drawing to actual length
gives the representative factor. 100 mm / actual length = 2, actual length = 100 mm/2 =
actual length = 50 mm (or) 5 cm.
13. The representative factor is 0.5, the drawing length is 10 cm. Find the actual
length.
a) 20 cm
b) 50 mm
c) 20 mm
d) 50 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: The scale is reducing scale. The ratio of length of drawing to actual length
gives the representative factor. 10 cm / actual length = 0.5, actual length = 10 cm/0.5 =
actual length = 20 cm (or) 200 mm.
Representative Factor – 2
48
1. Representative factor is defined as the ratio of the length of the drawing to the
actual length of the object.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The representative factor is defined as the ratio of the length of the drawing to
the actual length of the object. The value of representative factor can give information on
whether the scale is enlarging or reducing.
2. What is the representative factor of a line, whose length is 24cm on the

drawing sheet, representing an actual length of 6m?
a) 1:50
b) 1:25
c) 1:24
d) 1:60
Answer: b
Explanation: Representative factor is calculated as the ratio of the length of the drawing to
the actual length of the object. Both the quantities should be taken in same unit. In this
example, R.F. equals to 24 ÷ (600) i.e. 1:25.
3. A 20mm line, drawn on the drawing sheet represents an actual length of 5m.
What is the representative factor?
a) 1:2.5
b) 1:25
c) 25:1
d) 1:250
Answer: d
Explanation: The formula for calculating the representative factor is the length of the
drawing divided by the actual length of the object. Hence for this example, R.F = 20 ÷ 5000
i.e. 1:250. The units of the quantities in the formula must be the same.
4. A line of 10cm is drawn on a drawing sheet. It represents an actual length of

25mm. What is the representative factor?
a) 1:4
b) 1:40
c) 4:1
d) 40:1
Answer: c
49
Explanation: Representative factor is calculated as the ratio of the length of the drawing to
the actual length of the drawing it represents. From this formula we get, R.F. = 100 ÷ 25.
Hence the representative factor is 4:1.
5. Which of the following representative factor will have an enlarging scale?

a) 1:24
b) 1:5
c) 1:3
d) 1:0.5
Answer: d
Explanation: The representative factor 1:0.5 can be written as 2:1. Since the actual length
of the drawing is less than the representative length, the scale is enlarging. If the actual
length of the object is greater than the representative value, R.F. will be less than unity.
6. Which of the following representative factors depict that the actual length of
the object is greater than the length of the drawing?
a) 2:5
b) 4:1
c) 3:2
d) 5:3
Answer: a
Explanation: Considering that a 2cm line drawn on the drawing sheet represents an actual
length of 5cm. Hence in the case of representative factor 2:5 i.e. 1:2.5, the actual length is
greater than the length of the drawing.
7. What is the representative factor if the length of the drawing is 15mm and the
actual length of the object is 3m?
a) 1:2
b) 1:0.2
c) 1:200
d) 1:20
Answer: c
Explanation: The representative factor is the ratio of length of the drawing to the actual
length of an object. Hence for the line of length 15mm and the actual length 3m, R.F. = 15
÷ 3000 = 1:200. The units of both the quantities should be same.
8. Which of the following is not a valid representative factor?

a) 1:2
50
b) 1:3
c) 2:5
d) 0:4
Answer: d
Explanation: The representative factor cannot be zero. As the length of the drawing cannot
be zero, having a value zero means that there is no drawing made. Representative factors
are used to scale down or up the drawing from the actual object.
9. A line of length 4mm is represented by a line of 4cm. What is the

representative factor?
a) 1:1
b) 10:1
c) 1:10
d) 1:100
Answer: b
Explanation: The actual length of the object is 4mm and the length of the drawing is 4cm.
From the formula for calculating the representative factor we get, R.F. = 4 ÷ 0.4 = 10.
Hence the representative factor is 10:1.
10. What is the representative factor if sides of square measuring 4cm in the
drawing sheet while the actual length of the side of the square is 3m?
a) 1:0.75
b) 4:3
c) 1:75
d) 3:4
Answer: c
Explanation: The length of the drawing is 4cm and the actual length of the drawing is 3m.
By using the formula for calculating the representative factor we get the value of R.F. as
1:75. R.F. = 4 ÷ 300. The units of both the quantities should be the same.
Types of Scales – 1
1. What is the type of scale in which the representative fraction is 1:1?
a) Enlarged scale
b) Reduced scale
c) Full size scale
d) Graphical scale
51
Answer: c
Explanation: A full size scale is a type of scale in which the length of the drawing and the
actual length of the object is of the ratio 1:1. Hence by definition, its representative fraction
is 1:1. In full size scale the drawing is drawn with the actual measurements.
2. Which of the following representative fraction depicts an enlarging scale?

a) 1:0.2
b) 1:2
c) 1:3
d) 1:1
Answer: a
Explanation: Enlarging scale means that the drawing is drawn with the bigger dimensions
in comparison to the actual dimensions of the object. A representative fraction of 1:0.2
means 5:1, i.e. the drawing is five times bigger than the actual object. Hence the scale is
enlarging scale.
3. Which of the following scales is a reducing scale?

a) 3:2
b) 1:3
c) 1:1
d) 1:0.4
Answer: b
Explanation: The representative fraction 1:3 indicates that the dimension of the drawing is
one-third of the actual object. Since the drawing is smaller than the actual object, this type
of scale is called reducing scale.
4. Which of the following is not an enlarging scale?

a) 2:1
b) 4:3
c) 3:5
d) 6:1
Answer: c
Explanation: Enlarging scale means that the drawing is larger than the actual object.
Hence the representative fraction will be greater than unity. For reducing scale the
representative fraction is less than unity.
5. Which of the following scales is neither an enlarging nor a reducing scale?

a) 3:2
52
b) 1:4
c) 1:0.5
d) 1:1
Answer: d
Explanation: A scale which is neither enlarging nor reducing is called as full size scale. The
representative fraction of a full size scale is 1:1. In full size scale, the drawing is made just
as the actual dimensions of the object.
6. A scale which is numerically represented on the drawing sheet is called as

_____
a) Graphical scale
b) Engineer’s scale
c) Reducing scale
d) Full size scale
Answer: b
Explanation: An engineer’s scale is the representation of the scale used in drawing on the
drawing sheet numerically. For example, if the length of the drawing is 5 cm and the actual
length is 10m, then it is numerically represented as 5cm = 10m.
7. Which of the following scale is used in survey maps?

a) Engineer’s scale
b) Diagonal scale
c) Graphical scale
d) Vernier scale
Answer: c
Explanation: Graphical scales are used in survey maps. The graphical scale is drawn on
the drawing. When the drawing ages, the engineer’s scale shrinks and may not give
accurate results. Hence graphical scale is used as the drawing shrinks, the scale will also
shrink.
8. What is the formula for calculating the length of the scale?

a) Minimum length to be measured x R.F.
b) Minimum length to be measured ÷ R.F.
c) Maximum length to be measured ÷ R.F.
d) Maximum length to be measured x R.F.
Answer: d
Explanation: The length of the scale is calculated by using the following formula,
Length of the scale = R.F. x Maximum length to be measured.
53
9. Units of the measurements must be shown in the scale drawn.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Units of the scale must be clearly indicated on the drawing. This helps in
clearing any misunderstanding concerning the different units used in the scale. The
representative fraction should be mentioned in the drawing as well.
10. The minimum length to be shown must be known for drawing unusual scale.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The maximum length of the scale must be known to draw unusual scales on
the drawing sheet. The representative fraction of the scale is also essential information.
The units of the scale must be mentioned on the drawing.
1. What are the two parts of Vernier scale?
a) Primary scale and secondary scale
b) Plain scale and comparative scale
c) Vernier scale and secondary scale
d) Primary scale and Vernier scale
Answer: d
Explanation: The Vernier scale consists of two parts. They are the primary scale and the
Vernier scale. Vernier scale is used to read very small dimensions with great accuracy.
The Vernier part of the scale is derived from the primary scale.
2. Which of the following scale is a plain scale with fully divided minor divisions?
a) Diagonal scale
b) Vernier scale
c) Primary scale
d) Comparative scale
Answer: c
Explanation: The primary scale is a plain scale with fully divided minor divisions. For
reading very small dimensions, minor divisions cannot be further divided. Hence we use
Vernier scale to read those dimensions.
54
3. The graduations of which scale is derived from the primary scale?
a) Comparative scale
b) Vernier scale
c) Plain scale
d) Diagonal scale
Answer: b
Explanation: The graduations on the primary scale helps in making the graduations on the
Vernier scale. For reading very small dimensions we need to further divide the minor
divisions on the primary scale, which will to problems in reading dimensions properly.
Hence Vernier scale is used.
4. Which of the following is used in checking the instruments to measure angles

with great accuracy?
a) Circular Vernier scale
b) Plain scale
c) Diagonal scale
Answer: a
Explanation: The circular Vernier scale is used to check the instruments to measure angles
with high accuracy. They are used in measuring instruments like micrometer in mechanical
engineering. They work on the same principle as the linear Vernier scale.
5. Which of the following scales represent two different units having same
representative fration?
a) Plain scale
b) Diagonal scale
c) Comparative scale
d) Vernier scale
Answer: c
Explanation: Comparative scales are those in which two different units are measured by
using different graduations but have same representative fraction. A drawing can be read
in two units with the help of this scale.
6. What is the length of the scale, the representative fraction is 1:50000 and the
scale must measure up to 25 km?
a) 5 x 10-4 cm
b) 50 cm
c) 5 cm
55
d) 0.5 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The formula for calculating the length of the scale is given by, Length of the
scale = R.F. x maximum length to be measured; Hence length of the scale = 1 ÷ 50000 x
25 x 1000 x 100 = 50 cm. It is very important to note the units while calculating.
7. In a particular drawing, 40 inches is represented by a 10 cm long line. A

comparative scale is constructed that measures up to 180 inches and 2 m
respectively. What are the lengths of scale for both the inches as well as the
meter scales? (1 inch = 0.0254 meter)
a) 7 cm and 8.3 cm
b) 35 cm and 18.35
c) 2.2 cm and 22.9 cm
d) 45 cm and 19.7 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: The length of the scale = R.F. x maximum length to be measured. Hence for
the inches scale, R.F. = 10 ÷ 40 and the maximum length to be measured is 180 inches.
Hence length of inch scale = 10 ÷ 40 x 180 = 45 cm. Similarly length of meter scale = 10 ÷
40 ÷ 0.0254 ÷ 100 x 2 x 100 = 19.7 cm.
8. Which of the following is used to set or measure angles when a protractor is

not available?
a) Plain scale
b) Diagonal scale
c) Scale of chords
Answer: c
Explanation: The scale of chords is used to measure or set angles when there is no
protractor. In this method, a line PQ is drawn and then from Q a perpendicular QR is
drawn. An arc is drawn with centre Q and is made to intersect perpendicular QR. Then the
arc is divided into 9 equal parts with each part denoting 10˚ from Q.
9. In a map, 30 miles is represented by 20 cm. What is the length of the kilometer

scale if the maximum length to be measured is 10 km? (1 mile = 1.609 km)
a) 4.14 cm
b) 10.73 cm
c) 9.32 cm
d) 24.14 cm
56
Answer: a
Explanation: The formula for calculating the length of the scale is given by; Length of the
scale = R.F. x maximum length to be measured. Hence from the formula, length of the
scale = 20 ÷ (30 x 1.609 x 1000 x 100) x 10 x 1000 x 100 = 4.14 cm.
10. What is the representative fraction of the kilometer scale if 20 miles is

represented as 5 cm and maximum length to be measured is 5 km? (1 mile =
1.609 km)
a) 1:4
b) 1:643600
c) 1:1.287
d) 0.7768:1
Answer: b
Explanation: The representative fraction is calculated by the formula, R.F. = length of the
drawing ÷ actual length of the object. Here the length of the drawing is 5 cm and the actual
length is 20 miles. In R.F. both quantities should be in same unit. R.F. = 5 ÷ (20 x 1.609
x1000 x 100) = 1:643600.
1. Why it is more beneficial to represent the scale graphically other than by just
numerical?
a) To represent clearly
b) More accurate
c) To measure directly from scale
d) To prevent
Answer: d
Explanation: The scale is drawn on the drawing itself. As the drawing becomes old, the
drawing sheet may shrink and may not give accurate results then. But if we use graphical
scale, along with drawing the scale also shrinks.
2. What is not essential information to construct a scale from the following?

a) The R.F. of the scale
b) The units to represent
c) Length of scale
d) Maximum length
Answer: c
57
Explanation: The length of the scale can be found using ’length of the scale =
Representative fraction x Maximum length’. To draw drawing R.F (representative fraction),
Units to represent (example: meters and centimeter or another if needed) and maximum
length required is essential.
3. Scales having same representative fraction but graduated to read different

units are called ______________________
a) Scale of chords
b) Circular vernier scale
c) Comparative scale
d) Diagonal scale
Answer: c
Explanation: A drawing drawn with a scale reading inch units can be read in metric units by
means of a metric comparative scale, constructed with same representative fraction. The
comparative scales may be plain scales or diagonal scales and may be constructed
separately or one above the other.
4. The scale used in micrometer is _____________

a) Plain scale
b) Comparative scale
c) Diagonal scale
d) Circular vernier scale
Answer: d
Explanation: The circular vernier uses the principle of vernier. The circular vernier is used
in surveying instruments to measure angle to the required accuracy. In the case of
mechanical engineering, it is used in measuring instruments like micrometer.
5. The scale used to find angles is ________

a) Diagonal scale
c) Circular vernier scale
d) Scale of chords
Answer: d
Explanation: The scale of chords is used to set out or measure angles when a protractor is
not available. It is based on lengths of chords of different angles measured on the same
arc.
58
6. Which scale you prefer if there is need to measure most accurately.
a) Plain scale
b) Vernier scale
c) Ordinary scale
Answer: b
Explanation: The plain scale gives only up to single decimal. Comparative scales are just
used to represent two different units. The vernier scale gives up to 2 decimal values.
7. Which scale represents only two units or a unit and its sub-division?
a) Diagonal scale
b) Plane scale
c) Scale of chords
d) Vernier scale
Answer: b
Explanation: A plain scale is constructed by dividing a line into suitable number of equal
parts or units, the first of which is sub-divided into smaller parts. Plain scales represent
either two units or a unit and its sub-division.
8. Which scale is employed when we need to measure in three units?

a) Plane scale
b) Scale of chords
c) Vernier Scale
d) Diagonal scale
Answer: d
Explanation: A diagonal scale is used when very small distances are to be accurately
measured or when measurements are required in three units. Small divisions of short lines
are obtained by the principle of diagonal scales.
9. We need a scale which has to show dm, cm and mm. Which scale do you
prefer?
a) Diagonal scale
b) Plain scale
c) Vernier scale
Answer: a
Explanation: Diagonal scale is meant for drawing scales which represents 3 units. A
59
diagonal scale is used when very minute distances to be measured. Small divisions of
short lines are obtained by the principle of diagonal scale.
10. Which scale is used in surveying instrument?

a) Comparative scale
b) Circular Vernier scale
c) Vernier scale
d) Scale of chords
Answer: b
Explanation: The circular vernier uses the principle of vernier. The circular vernier is used
in surveying instruments to measure angle to the required accuracy. In the case of
mechanical engineering, it is used in measuring instruments like micrometer.
Plane Scales – 1
1. The maximum length is 50 m and length of scale is 10 cm. Find the
Representative factor.
a) 1/50
b) 50
c) 500
d) 1/500
Answer: d
Explanation: Length of the scale = Representative fraction x Maximum length, 10 cm =
Representative fraction x 5000 cm, Representative factor = 1/500.
2. Given Representative factor as 4/50 and maximum length is 100 cm. Find the
length of scale.
a) 8 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 9.7 cm
d) 12 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Length of the scale = Representative fraction x Maximum length, Length of
scale = 4/50 x 100 cm, Length of scale= 8 cm.
3. Given, below are the steps related to construct a scale of 1:50 to show meters
and decimeters and maximum length is 5 meters. Arrange the steps
60
i. Then divide the 1st part into 10 equal divisions
ii. Determining the length of scale 1/50 x 500 cm = 10 cm
iii. Determining R.F. here it is 1/50
iv. Draw a line 10 cm long and divide it to 5 equal parts
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) ii, iv, i, iii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: The general procedure involves finding R.F. at the 1st and next max length of
scale and then dividing whole line into given number of units at last dividing the 1st part to
number of sub-divisions that occur in unit.
4. How many divisions a line has to be made if it is given to prepare plain scale
up to 7 yards?
a) 8
b) 7
c) 6
d) It depends on R.F
Answer: b
Explanation: Whatever the representative factor may given, we just require number of units
to divide the line in scale. Representative factor is only needed to find the length of the
scale. Length of the scale = Representative fraction x Maximum length.
5. What is the length of the scale, representative fraction given is 3/40 and
maximum length to be represented in scale is 100 cm?
a) 8.5 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 7.5 cm
d) 13.33
Answer: c
Explanation: Length of the scale = Representative fraction x Maximum length. Length of
the scale = 3/40 x 100 cm = 7.5 cm. That is to draw a scale for 100 cm with 3/40 R.F. We
need to draw 7.5 cm length line and divide to 10 decimeters.
6. In preparing a plain scale of feet and yards, the first division is to be divided
into how many sub-divisions?
a) 5
61
b) 3
c) 4
d) 10
Answer: b
Explanation: Given that the plain scale is to be made with feet and yards. Generally 1st
part is divided into sub-divisions here is feet. We know 1 yard is equal to 3 feet, so 1st
division should be divided into 3 sub-divisions.
7. In preparing a plain scale of feet and inches, how many sub-divisions do the
first division is to be divided?
a) 10
b) 6
c) 12
d) 5
Answer: c
Explanation: Given that the plain scale is to be made with feet and inches. Generally 1st
part is divided into sub-divisions here is inches. We know 1 feet is equal to 12 inches, so
1st division should be divided into 12 sub-divisions.
8. In preparing a plain scale of miles and furlongs, how many divisions do the first
part is to be made?
a) 10
b) 12
c) 8
d) 6
Answer: c
Explanation: Given that the plain scale is to be made with miles and furlongs. Generally 1st
part is divided into sub-divisions here is furlong. 1 mile is equal to 8 feet, so 1st division
should be divided into 8 sub-divisions.
9. A plain scale is made to show 9 miles and sub division is furlong. To measure
3 miles and 6 furlongs how many divisions is to take on the right side of origin
and how many division it is to take on the left side of origin?
a) 3, 6
b) 2, 4
c) 6, 3
d) 4, 2
Answer: a
62
Explanation: Origin is at 1st division ending. 1st division is made to sub-divisions. From
origin it is divided to divisions on right side. Here it is asked to measure how many divisions
do 3 miles takes. It is 3 and 6 furlongs take on left of origin. It is 6.
10. A plain scale is made to show 7 yards and sub division is feet. To measure 2
feet, how many divisions it is to take on the left side of origin?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
origin it is divided to divisions on right side and towards left 1st division is divided into sub-
divisions. Here it is asked to measure how many divisions do 2 feet takes. It is 2 from origin
to left.
11. A plain scale is made to show 4 feet and sub division is inch. To measure 2
feet and 10 inches how many divisions is to take on the right side of origin?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 10
d) 9
Answer: b
divisions. Here it is asked to measure how many divisions do 2 feet takes. It is 2 from origin
to right.
12. A plain scale is made to show 8 meters and sub division is decimeters. To
measure7 meters and 3 decimeters how many divisions is to take on the right
side of origin and how many it is to take on the left side of origin?
a) 7, 3
b) 3, 7
c) 6, 4
d) 4, 6
Answer: a
63
divisions. Here it is asked to measure how many divisions do 7 meters takes. It is 7 from
origin to right. And 3 from origin to left.
13. A plain scale is made which shows 6 meters of maximum length and sub
division is decimeter with a R.F. of 1 /60. How much length does the scale shows
4 m and 5 decimeters?
a) 4 m 5 dm
b) 4.5 m
c) 0.75 dm
d) 0.75 m
Answer: b
Explanation: length of the scale = Representative fraction x Maximum length, length of
scale =1/60 x 4.5 m = 0.075 m = 0.75 dm = 7.5 cm = 75 mm. (or) 1/60 x 4 m =0.0666 m +
1/60 x 5 dm = 0.083 dm, 0.666 dm + 0.08333 dm =0.7499 dm =7.5 cm = 75 mm.
Plane Scales – 2
1. A scale of 1:25 is to be constructed to show centimeters and it should be long
enough to measure 10 meters. What is the length of the scale?
a) 4 cm
b) 0.4 cm
c) 40 cm
d) 400cm
Answer: c
Explanation: The length of the scale is calculated as the product of the representative
fraction and the maximum length to be measured. Hence, length of the scale = 1 ÷ 25 x 10
x 100 = 40 cm. While calculating it is very important to note the units of the dimensions.
2. From the following figure what is the maximum length that can be measured?
a) 11 dm
b) 10 dm
c) 13 dm
d) 12 dm
64
Answer: d
Explanation: From the scale given in the figure it is clear that the maximum length that can
be measured is 12 decimeters. It is clearly seen that we can measure 11 decimeters and
then by adding 10 centimeters which is equal to one decimeter. Hence the maximum
length is 12 dm.
3. What is the length of the scale? (R.F. = 1/5)
a) 2.4 cm
b) 24 cm
c) 240cm
d) 0.24cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The length of the scale is calculated by the formula, length of the scale = R.F.
x maximum length to be measured. Hence, length of centimeter scale = 1 ÷ 5 x 12 x 10 =
24 cm. Here, the representative factor is 1/5.
4. Using the given scale, we can measure 13.7 dm.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The maximum length that can be measured is 12 dm. Any measurement
beyond that using the given scale is not possible. As we can clearly see we can measure
11 dm and the rest 1 dm can be measured using 10 cm.
5. What is the least count of the given scale?
65
a) 1 cm
b) 0.1 cm
c) 1dm
d) 10 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: The smallest value that can be measured is 1 cm or 0.1 dm. The maximum
value that can be measured using the above scale is 12 dm. 10 cm equals to 1 dm. It is
clear that 11 dm can be measured but in addition to it, we can measure 10 cm.
6. What is the maximum length that can be measured using the given scale?
a) 7 inches
b) 7 feet
c) 8 feet
d) 12 inches
Answer: c
Explanation: It is clearly visible that the maximum length that can be measured using the
given scale is 7 feet. The rest twelve inches can be measured. Since 12 inches = 1 foot,
we can measure 1 foot in addition to the 7 feet. Hence we can measure 8 feet maximum
using the above scale.
7. What is the scale in the following figure?
a) 1:2
b) 1:12
c) 1:4
d) 1:7
Answer: b
66
Explanation: In the figure it is clearly shown that the representative factor is 1/12. Hence
the scale is 1:12. The representative fraction is measured as the length of the drawing
divided by the actual length of the object.
8. What is the length of the scale?
a) 7 feet
b) 7 inches
c) 8 feet
d) 8 inches
Answer: d
Explanation: The length of the scale is calculated as, length of the scale = representative
fraction x maximum length to be measured. Hence length of the scale = 1 ÷ 12 x 8 x 12 = 8
inches. While calculating, the units are to be noted.
9. What is the least count of the given scale?
a) 3“
b) 1“
c) 12”
d) 7”
Answer: b
Explanation: The least count is the minimum amount of length that can be measured. Here
in the given scale, the least count is 1 inch or one twelfth of a foot = 1/12th foot. The
maximum length that can be measured is 8 feet.
67
10. From the given scale we can measure 3 feet 10”.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: From the given scale we easily measure 3 feet. In addition to that we can
measure 10 inches using the inches scale. In this type of plain scale we can measure
using both feet and inches as 12 inches = 1 foot.
Diagonal Scales – 1
1. The diagonal scales are used when measurements are required in _____
units.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: c
Explanation: Using plain scale we can accommodate 2 units (example: yard, feet). But with
diagonal scale we can accommodate 3 units (example: yard, feet and inch). It is possible
by the principle of diagonal division.
2. If a diagonal scale is to be made with meter, decimeter and centimeter then,

how many divisions it has to be made vertically?
a) 3
b) 5
c) 10
d) 9
Answer: c
Explanation: Vertical divisions are related to how many centimeters take a decimeter. It is
10. Or anywhere in diagonal scales vertical division are dependent of 2nd and 3rd unit
which we use in drawing diagonal scale.
68
3. If a diagonal scale is to be made with yard, feet and inch then, how many
divisions it has to be made vertically?
a) 3
b) 12
c) 10
d) 6
Answer: b
Explanation: Vertical divisions are related to how many inches take a foot. It is 12. Or
anywhere in diagonal scales vertical division are dependent of 2nd and 3rd unit which we
use in drawing diagonal scale.
4. Arrange the steps involve in drawing the diagonal scale.

i) Dividing vertically and joining the points from subdivisions to successive next
subdivisions on the last vertical line.
ii) Finding length of scale
iii) Finding R.F.
iv) Dividing horizontally and subdividing the 1st part.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, i, iv, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: General procedure in preparing graphical scales includes finding
representative fraction at first and then finding length of scale. Next dividing horizontally,
sub-dividing the 1st division which is common in plain and diagonal scale. In diagonal
scales the fourth step as said above places prominent role.
5. A plot of 35,000 sq m is drawn on map as plot of 14 cm and 5 cm. Find the

R.F.
a) 1/35000
b) 1/50000
c) 1/34930
d) 1/2236
Answer: d
Explanation: Area of plot in drawing is 14 x 5 = 70 sq cm (equivalent to 35000 sq m). So 1
sq cm =35000/70 = 500 sq m. 1 cm = square root of 500 m = 22.3 m (equivalent to 1 cm).
Representative fraction = 1/ (22.36 m) =1/ (2236 cm).
69
6. Diagonal scale follows the principle of similar triangles.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Diagonal scale follows the principle of similar triangles where a short length is
divided into number of divisions in which sides are proportional which produces
interpolated values in between the 1st least number in unit to 0.
7. We can draw diagonal scale for meter, feet, inch.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: There exists a particular order in selecting 1st, 2nd and 3rd unit while drawing
diagonal scale that is 1st should have higher quantity of all three, 3rd should have least
quantity of all three and 2nd should be middle in them. And there exits at least appreciable
multiples among themselves.
8. Which of the following scales is used to accurately measure minute divisions?

a) Plain scale
b) Diagonal scale
c) Scale of chords
Answer: b
Explanation: Minute divisions are accurately measured by using diagonal scales. Diagonal
scales are also when three different units of measurements are needed to be measured.
With the help of these scales we can get a relation between three different units.
Diagonal Scales – 2
This set of Tough Engineering Drawing Questions and Answers focuses on
“Diagonal Scales – 2”.
1. Which of the following scales is used when there are three units that need to
be measured?
a) Plain scale
c) Diagonal scale
70
d) Vernier scale
Answer: c
Explanation: Diagonal scale is used when three different units of measurements are
needed to be measured. With the help of this scale we can get the reading in three
different units. This scale also helps in accurate measurement of minute divisions.
2. Which of the following scales is used to accurately measure minute divisions?

a) Plain scale
b) Diagonal scale
c) Scale of chords
Answer: b
Explanation: Minute divisions are accurately measured by using diagonal scales. Diagonal
scales are also when three different units of measurements are needed to be measured.
With the help of these scales we can get a relation between three different units.
3. What is the length of AB in the following scale?
a) 2.74 m
b) 3.74 m
c) 2.47 m
d) 3.47 m
Answer: a
Explanation: Reading of the diagonal involves reading in three ways. The first
measurement is taken in the meters scale, the second is from the decimeters scale and the
third is from the centimeters scale. Hence in meters scale, the value is 2 m from 0; in
decimeters scale, the value is 7 dm and in the centimeters scale, the value is 4 cm. Hence
length of AB = 2.74 m.
71
4. What is the maximum length of the given scale?
a) 3 dm
b) 4 dm
c) 3 m
d) 4 m
Answer: d
Explanation: The maximum length that can be measured using the given scale is 4 meters.
It is clear that wee can measure 3 m from the meters scale. The rest 1 meter is measured
as 10 decimeter. Hence 3 + 1 = 4 meters is the maximum length.
5. If the given scale is 1: 60, what is the length of the scale?
a) 6.67dm
b) 0.67 cm
c) 6.67 cm
d) 66.67 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: The length of the scale is determined by the formula, length of the scale =
72
representative fraction x maximum length to be measured, that is, length of the scale = 1 ÷
60 x 4 x 100 = 6.67 cm. Hence the length of the scale is 6.67 cm.
6. From the given scale, we can measure 4.56 m.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The maximum length that can be measured is 4 meters. Hence any value
beyond 4.00 meters cannot be measured using the above scale. Measuring a value in
diagonal scale, the line needs to coincide with one of the line in the scale and not go
beyond it.
7. From the given scale below, what is the length of PQ?
a) 3 yd 2 ft 0”
b) 3 yd 1 ft 10”
c) 3 yd 0 ft 10”
d) 4 yd 2 ft 0”
Answer: b
Explanation: The distance from the 0 on the horizontal to the point Q is 3 yards. In the feet
73
scale, the point P lies on 1 feet and in the inches scale, the point P lies on 10 inches.
Hence, the length of PQ is 3 yards 1 foot 10 inches.
8. What is the maximum length that can be measured using the given scale?
a) 6 yards
b) 5 yards
c) 6 feet
d) 15 feet
Answer: a
Explanation: It is clear that we can measure up to 5 yards directly. But in addition to the
five yards, we have 3 feet in the feet scale which equals to one yard. Hence the maximum
length that can be measured is 6 yards.
9. What is the length of the scale, if the scale is 1:30?
a) 0.6 yard
b) 7.2 feet
c) 0.2 feet
d) 7.2 inches
Answer: d
Explanation: The length of the scale is measured as; length of the scale = representative
fraction x maximum length to be measured. Hence, length of the scale = 1 ÷ 30 x 6 x 3 x
12 = 7.2 inches. Representative fraction for the scale 1:30 is 1/30.
74
10. From the given scale, we can measure 5 yards 3 feet and 0 inches.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: We can measure 5 yards and 3 feet using the given scale, as 5 yards are
clearly indicated on the yards scale and 3 feet is also indicated on the feet scale. 3 feet
equals 1 yard. Hence, 5 yard 3 feet is nothing but 6 yards and that is the maximum length
that can be measured by the scale.
Construction of Parallel & Perpendicular Lines – 1

1. Given are the steps to draw a perpendicular to a line at a point within the line,
when the point is near the centre of line.
Arrange the steps. Let AB be the line and P be the point in it
i. P as centre, take convenient radius R1 and draw arcs on the two sides of P on
the line at C, D.
ii. Join E and P
iii. The line EP is perpendicular to AB
iv. Then from C, D as centre, take R2 radius (greater than R1), draw arcs which
cut at E.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, i, iv, iii
Answer: a
Explanation: Here uses the concept of locus. Every 2 points have a particular line that is
every point on line is equidistant from both the points. The above procedure shows how the
line is build up using arcs of similar radius.
75
when the point is near an end of the line.
Arrange the steps. Let AB be the line and P be the point in it.
i. Join the D and P.
ii. With any point O draw an arc (more than semicircle) with radius of OP, cuts AB
at C.
iii. Join the C and O and extend till it cuts the large arc at D.
iv. DP gives the perpendicular to AB.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, i, iv
Answer: d
Explanation: There exists common procedure for obtaining perpendiculars for lines. But
changes are due changes in conditions weather the point lies on the line, off the line, near
the centre or near the ends etc.
when the point is near the centre of line.
Arrange the steps. Let AB be the line and P be the point in it
i. Join F and P which is perpendicular to AB.
ii. Now C as centre take same radius and cut the arc at D and again D as centre
with same radius cut the arc further at E.
iii. With centre as P take any radius and draw an arc (more than semicircle) cuts
AB at C.
iv. Now D, E as centre take radius (more than half of DE) draw arcs which cut at
F.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, i, iv, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: Generally in drawing perpendiculars to lines involves in drawing a line which
gives equidistance from either side of the line to the base, which is called the locus of
points. But here since the point P is nearer to end, there exists some peculiar steps in
drawing arcs.
76
4. Given are the steps to draw a perpendicular to a line from a point outside the
line, when the point is near the centre of line.
Arrange the steps. Let AB be the line and P be the point outside the line
i. The line EP is perpendicular to AB
ii. From P take convenient radius and draw arcs which cut AB at two places, say
C, D.
iii. Join E and P.
iv. Now from centers C, D draw arc with radius (more than half of CD), which cut
each other at E.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iv, iii, i
Answer: d
Explanation: At first two points are taken from the line to which perpendicular is to draw
with respect to P. Then from two points equidistant arcs are drawn to meet at some point
which is always on the perpendicular. So by joining that point and P gives perpendicular.
line, when the point is near an end of the line.
i. The line ED is perpendicular to AB
ii. Now take C as centre and CP as radius cut the previous arc at two points say
D, E.
iii. Join E and D.
iv. Take A as center and radius AP draw an arc (semicircle), which cuts AB or
extended AB at C.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, ii, i, iii
d) ii, iv, iii, i
Answer: c
Explanation: The steps here show how to draw a perpendicular to a line from a point when
the point is nearer to end of line. Easily by drawing arcs which are equidistance from either
sides of line and coinciding with point P perpendicular has drawn.
77
line, when the point is nearer the centre of line.
i. Take P as centre and take some convenient radius draw arcs which cut AB at
C, D.
ii. Join E, F and extend it, which is perpendicular to AB.
iii. From C, D with radius R1 (more than half of CD), draw arcs which cut each
other at E.
iv. Again from C, D with radius R2 (more than R1), draw arcs which cut each
other at F.
a) i, iii, iv, ii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iv, iii, i
Answer: a
Explanation: For every two points there exists a line which has points from which both the
points are equidistant otherwise called perpendicular to line joining the two points. Here at
1st step we created two on the line we needed perpendicular, then with equal arcs from
either sides we created the perpendicular.
7. Given are the steps to draw a parallel line to given line AB at given point P.
Arrange the steps.
i. Take P as centre draw a semicircle which cuts AB at C with convenient radius.
ii. From C with radius of PD draw an arc with cuts the semicircle at E.
iii. Join E and P which gives parallel line to AB.
iv. From C with same radius cut the AB at D.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iv, iii, i
Answer: a
Explanation: There exists some typical steps in obtaining parallel lines for required lines at
given points which involves drawing of arcs, necessarily, here to form a parallelogram
since the opposite sides in parallelogram are parallel.
8. Given are the steps to draw a parallel line to given line AB at a distance R.
Arrange the steps.
78
i. EF is the required parallel line.
ii. From C, D with radius R, draw arcs on the same side of AB.
iii. Take two points say C, D on AB as far as possible.
iv. Draw a line EF which touches both the arc (tangents) at E, F.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iv, iii, i
Answer: b
Explanation: Since there is no reference point P to draw parallel line, but given the
distance, we can just take arcs with distance given from the base line and draw tangent
which touches the both arcs.
9. Perpendiculars can’t be drawn using _____________

a) T- Square
b) Set-squares
c) Pro- circle
d) Protractor
Answer: c
Explanation: T-square is meant for drawing straight line and also perpendiculars. And also
using set-squares we can draw perpendiculars. Protractor is used to measure angles and
also we can use to draw perpendiculars. But pro-circle consists of circles of different
diameters.
10. The length through perpendicular gives the shortest length from a point to the
line.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The statement given here is right. If we need the shortest distance from a
point to the line, then drawing perpendicular along the point to line is best method. Since
the perpendicular is the line which has points equidistant from points either side of given
line.
Construction of Parallel & Perpendicular Lines – 2
79
1. Using how many methods can you draw perpendicular lines through a point
within the lines?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: c
Explanation: We can draw perpendicular lines using three methods. In one method, if the
point is nearer to the centre of the line to which the perpendicular is to be made then we
can use the bisector method where we cut two arcs on the line and from those
intersections we cut another to the point.
2. How many ways can we draw parallel lines to an existing line?

a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: There are two ways by which we can draw parallel lines to an existing line.
The first method is when we have to draw parallel lines to a line through a given point. The
other method is to draw parallel lines to a line through a given distance.
3. While drawing perpendicular line through a point which is nearer to the middle
of a given line, ______ is cut at two points on the line.
a) A circle
b) A square
c) A rectangle
d) An arc
Answer: d
Explanation: While drawing perpendicular line through a point which is nearer to the middle
of a given line, an arc is cut at two points on the line. From these two intersection points,
we draw other arcs with same radius and they are made to cut each other.
4. While drawing a perpendicular to a given line through a point nearer to the end
of the line, which of the following properties of the circle is used?
a) The diameter of a circle always subtends an angle of 90˚ on the
circumference.
b) The angle at the circumference is half the angle at the centre of the circle.
80
c) The summation of the opposite angles of a quadrilateral is always 180 ˚.
d) In an arc the angle subtended by any two points on the circumference is
always same.
Answer: a
Explanation: While drawing a perpendicular to a given line through a point nearer to the
end of the line, the geometric property of the circle that the diameter of a circle always
subtends an angle of 90˚ on the circumference of the circle is used to draw the
perpendicular line.
5. For drawing a perpendicular through a point outside a given line, which of the
following method is used after drawing an arc from that point to the line
intersecting at two points?
a) Angle bisector
b) Subtending an angle
d) Drawing a quadrilateral
Answer: c
Explanation: For drawing a perpendicular through a point outside a given line, an arc is
drawn from that point to the line intersecting at two points. Then a perpendicular bisector is
drawn between those points and thus making a perpendicular through the point outside the
line.
6. While drawing a perpendicular to a line from a point within the line but nearer
to the end of the line, all the arcs drawn in the process are of _______
a) Different radii
b) Different radii but one
c) Same radii but one
d) Same radii
Answer: d
Explanation: While drawing a perpendicular to a line from a point within a line but nearer to
the end of the line, all the arcs drawn in the process are of same radii. There four arcs
drawn in the process and all of them have the same radius.
81
7. In the given figure which of the following construction line is drawn first?
a) Line AP
b) Arc DPC
c) Arc DQC
d) Line DC
Answer: b
Explanation: For drawing perpendicular to a given line through a point that is outside the
line and is nearer to the end of the line we first cut an arc with radius equal to AD, keeping
centre at A. then we draw another arc with radius DP keeping centre at P. Then join both
intersection points we get the perpendicular.
8. For drawing parallel lines to a given line through a given point we make use of
____
a) Arcs
b) Triangles
c) Lines
d) Quadrilaterals
Answer: a
Explanation: For drawing parallel lines to a given line through a given point we make use of
arcs. By cutting the given line using an arc with centre as the given point and of convenient
radius, then using the same radius cutting an arc with centre with the new intersection
point and so on we make the parallel line.
9. Which of the following arcs is made first to draw a parallel line to the given line
PQ?
82
a) A
b) B
c) C
d) D
Answer: c
Explanation: The first arc drawn is C with centre A and any convenient radius. Then from C
with the same radius another arc is drawn to the line PQ which cuts at D. And again from C
another arc is drawn with radius equal to AD and it cuts at B and then A and B are joined
giving the required parallel line.
10. While drawing a parallel line to the given line through a given distance, what
all we need to draw?
a) Quadrilaterals
b) Arcs and tangent
c) Tangents
d) Circles
Answer: b
Explanation: While drawing a parallel line to a given line through a given distance, we need
to draw arcs and a tangent. The arcs are drawn on the same side of the given line and with
radius as the given distance. Then a tangent is drawn joining both the arcs.
Drawing Regular Polygons & Simple Curves – 1

1. A Ogee curve is a ___________
a) semi ellipse
b) continuous double curve with convex and concave
c) freehand curve which connects two parallel lines
83
d) semi hyperbola
Answer: b
Explanation: An ogee curve or a reverse curve is a combination of two same curves in
which the second curve has a reverse shape to that of the first curve. Any curve or line or
mould consists of a continuous double curve with the upper part convex and lower part
concave, like ‘’S’’.
2. Given are the steps to construct an equilateral triangle, when the length of side
is given. Using, T-square, set-squares only. Arrange the steps.
i. The both 2 lines meet at C. ABC is required triangle
ii. With a T-square, draw a line AB with given length
iii. With 30o-60o set-squares, draw a line making 60o with AB at A
iv. With 30o-60o set-squares, draw a line making 60o with AB at B
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: d
Explanation: Here gives the simple procedure since T-square and 30o-60o set-squares. And
also required triangle is equilateral triangle. The interior angles are 60o, 60o, 60o(180o /3 =
60o). Set- squares are used for purpose of 60o.
3. Given are the steps to construct an equilateral triangle, with help of compass,
when the length of side is given. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a line AB with given length
ii. Draw lines joining C with A and B
iii. ABC is required equilateral triangle
iv. With centers A and B and radius equal to AB, draw arcs cutting each other at
C
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: a
Explanation: Here gives the simple procedure to construct equilateral triangle. Since we
used compass we can construct any type of triangle but with set-squares it is not possible
to construct any type of triangles such as isosceles, scalene etc.
84
4 Given are the steps to construct an equilateral triangle, when the altitude of
triangle is given. Using, T-square, set-squares only. Arrange the steps.
i. Join R, Q; T, Q. Q, R, T is the required triangle
ii. With a T-square, draw a line AB of any length
iii. From a point P on AB draw a perpendicular PQ of given altitude length
iv. With 30o-60o set-squares, draw a line making 30o with PQ at Q on both sides
cutting at R, T
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: d
Explanation: Here gives the simple procedure since T-square and 30o-60o set-squares. The
interior angles are 60o, 60o, 60o (180o /3 = 60o). Altitude divides the sides of equilateral
triangle equally. Set- squares are used for purpose of 30o.
5. Given are the steps to construct an equilateral triangle, with help of compass,
when the length of altitude is given. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a line AB of any length. At any point P on AB, draw a perpendicular PQ
equal to altitude length given
ii. Draw bisectors of CE and CF to intersect AB at R and T respectively.QRT is
required triangle
iii. With center Q and any radius, draw an arc intersecting PQ at C
iv. With center C and the same radius, draw arcs cutting the 1st arc at E and F
a) i, iii, iv, ii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: a
Explanation: This is the particular procedure used for only constructing equilateral triangle
using arcs, when altitude is given, since we used similar radius arcs to get 30 o on both
sides of a line. Here we also bisected arc using the same procedure from bisecting lines.
6. How many pairs of parallel lines are there in regular Hexagon?

a) 2
b) 3
c) 6
85
d) 1
Answer: b
Explanation: Hexagon is a closed figure which has six sides, six corners. Given is regular
hexagon which means it has equal interior angles and equal side lengths. So, there will be
3 pair of parallel lines in a regular hexagon.
7. Given are the steps to construct a square, when the length of side is given.
Using, T-square, set-squares only. Arrange the steps.
i. Repeat previous step and join A, B, C and D to form a square
ii. With a T-square, draw a line AB with given length.
iii. At A and B, draw verticals AE and BF
iv. With 45o set-squares, draw a line making 45o with AB at A cuts BF at C
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: d
Explanation: Square is closed figure with equal sides and equal interior angles which is
90o. In the above steps, it is given the procedure to draw square using set-squares. 45o
set-square is used since 90/2 = 45.
8. How many pairs of parallel lines are there in regular pentagon?

a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) 5
Answer: a
Explanation: Pentagon is a closed figure which has five sides, five corners. Given is regular
pentagon which means it has equal interior angles and equal side lengths. Since five is
odd number so, there exists angles 36o, 72o, 108o, 144o, 180o with sides to horizontal.
9. Given are the steps to construct a square using compass, when the length of
side is given. Arrange the steps.
i. Join A, B, C and D to form a square
ii. At A with radius AB draw an arc, cut the AE at D
86
iii. Draw a line AB with given length. At A draw a perpendicular AE to AB using
arcs
iv. With centers B and D and the same radius, draw arcs intersecting at C
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: b
Explanation: Here we just used simple techniques like drawing perpendiculars using arcs
and then used the compass to locate the fourth point. Using compass it is easier to draw
different types of closed figures than using set-squares.
10. Given are the steps to construct regular polygon of any number of sides.
Arrange the steps.
i. Draw the perpendicular bisector of AB to cut the line AP in 4 and the arc AP in
6
ii. The midpoint of 4 and 6 gives 5 and extension of that line along the equidistant
points 7, 8, etc gives the centers for different polygons with that number of sides
and the radius is AN (N is from 4, 5, 6, 7, so on to N)
iii. Join A and P. With center B and radius AB, draw the quadrant AP
iv. Draw a line AB of given length. At B, draw a line BP perpendicular and equal
to AB
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iii, ii, iv, i
c) iv, iii, i, ii
d) ii, iii, iv, i
Answer: c
Explanation: Given here is the method for drawing regular polygons of different number of
sides of any length. This includes finding a line where all the centers for regular polygons
lies and then with radius taking any end of 1st drawn line to center and then completing
circle at last, cutting the circle with the same length of initial line. Thus we acquire
polygons.
Drawing Regular Polygons & Simple Curves – 2
87
1. What is the shape with ‘n’ no. of sides, in which all the sides are equal, called?
a) Rectangle
b) Circle
c) Triangle
d) Regular polygon
Answer: d
Explanation: A regular polygon is a shape with 4 or more sides and all the sides are of
equal length. A regular polygon with five, six, seven, etc. sides are called as regular
pentagon, regular hexagon, regular heptagon, etc. respectively.
2. For drawing a regular hexagon, the fastest method is to draw the hexagon
using circle and then cutting arcs equal to the diameter which is equal to the side
of the regular hexagon.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: For drawing a regular hexagon, the fastest method is to draw a circle with
diameter equal to the length of the side of the regular hexagon and then dividing the circle
into six parts by cutting arcs equal to the diameter of the circle on its circumference. Then
the intersection points are joined to form the hexagon.
3. _______ is a curve with two same curves in which one curve is a reverse of
the other curve.
a) Ellipse
b) Parabola
c) Ogee
d) Hyperbola
Answer: c
Explanation: An ogee curve is a curve with two curves in which one curve is a reverse of
the other curve. Both curves are of same radii. They both are tangent to parallel lines or in
other words the tangents to both the curves are parallel to each other.
4. For drawing a polygon with side of given length, first we draw a ______ with
centre at one of the ends of the length and the radius as length.
a) Circle
b) Arc
c) Semicircle
d) Quarter circle
88
Answer: c
Explanation: For drawing a polygon with side of given length, first we draw a semicircle
with centre at one of the ends of the length and the radius as the length. The next step is to
divide the semicircle into the number of sides of the polygon.
5. The second step in drawing a polygon is to divide the semicircle into the
number of ____ the polygon has.
a) Vertices
b) Edges
c) Diagonals
d) Sides
Answer: d
Explanation: The second step in drawing a polygon is to divide the semicircle into the
number of sides the polygon has. In the first we draw a semicircle with centre at one of the
ends of the length and the radius is taken as the length of the side of the polygon.
6. The third step involved in drawing a polygon is to join the _____ one being the
second division on the semicircle and the other being the first centre.
a) Points
b) Lines
c) Planes
d) Surfaces
Answer: a
Explanation: The third step involved in drawing a polygon is to join the points one being the
second division on the semicircle and the other being the first centre through which the
c=semicircle was made in the first step.
7. While constructing a regular hexagon using a T-square and 30˚-60˚ set

square, we draw circles.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In drawing a regular hexagon using a T-square and a 30˚ -60˚ set square, we
draw parallel lines and not circles. As it is impossible to draw circles using T-square and
30˚ -60˚ set squares. We draw these parallel li nes using angles.
8. To draw an arc of given radius touching two straight lines at right angles with
each other, we first draw ______ with centre at the intersection point of the two
89
lines on both the lines.
a) An arc
b) A circle
c) A square
d) A triangle
Answer: a
Explanation: To draw an arc of given radius touching two straight lines at right angles with
each other, we first draw an arc with centre at the intersection point of the two lines on both
the lines. Then we draw another from the new intersection of the arc and the lines.
9. In the second step in drawing the arc of given radius touching two straight
lines at right angles with each other, we draw another arc from the centre at the
new intersection of the arc and the lines and keeping the radius same.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: In the second step in drawing the arc of given radius touching two straight
lines at right angles with each other, we draw another arc from the centre at the new
intersection of the arc and the lines and keeping the radius same. The intersection of these
two new arcs is the centre of the required arc.
10. The tangent to both the curves in an ogee curve is perpendicular to each
other.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The tangent to both the curves in an ogee curve is parallel and not
perpendicular to each other. An ogee curve is a curve with two curves with one of the
curve being a reverse curve to the other. Hence it is also called as reverse curve.
Drawing Tangents and Normals for Different Conditions of

Circle – 1
1. Given are the steps to draw a tangent to any given circle at any point P on it.
Arrange the steps.
i. Draw the given circle with center O and mark the point P anywhere on the
circle.
90
ii. With centers O and Q draw arcs with equal radius to cut each other at R.
iii. Join R and P which is the required tangent.
iv. Draw a line joining O and P. Extend the line to Q such that OP = PQ.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: a
Explanation: Tangent is a line which touches a curve at only one point. Every tangent is
perpendicular to its normal. Here we first found the normal which passes through center
and point. Then drawing perpendicular to it gives the tangent.
2. Given are the steps to draw a tangent to given circle from any point outside the
circle. Arrange the steps.
i. With OP as diameter, draw arcs on circle at R and R1.
ii. Draw the given circle with center O.
iii. Join P and R which is one tangent and PR1 is another tangent.
iv. Mark the point P outside the circle.
a) ii, iv, iii, i
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: d
Explanation: Usually when a point is outside the circle there exists two tangents. For which
we first join the center with point P and then taking distance from center to P as diameter
circle is drawn from midpoint of center and P to cut circle at two points where tangents
touch the circle.
3. Given are the steps to draw a tangent to given arc even if center is unknown
and the point P lies on it. Arrange the steps. Let AB be the arc.
i. Draw EF, the bisector of the arc CD. It will pass through P.
ii. RS is the required tangent.
iii. With P as center and any radius draw arcs cutting arc AB at C and D.
iv. Draw a perpendicular RS to EF through P.
a) ii, iv, iii, i
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
91
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: c
Explanation: Even if the center of arc is unknown, just by taking any some part of arc and
bisecting that with a line at required point p gives us normal to tangent at P. So then from
normal drawing perpendicular gives our required tangent.
4. Given are the steps to draw a tangent to given circle and parallel to given line.
Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a perpendicular to given line and extend to cut the circle at two points P
and Q.
ii. At P or Q draw perpendicular to normal then we get the tangents.
iii. PQ is the normal for required tangent.
iv. Draw a circle with center O and line AB as required.
a) ii, iv, iii, i
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: Normal of curve will be perpendicular to every parallel tangent at that point.
We just drawn the longest chord (diameter) and then perpendicular it gives the required
tangents. Since circle is closed figure there exist two tangents parallel to each other.
5. How many external tangents are there for two circles?

a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: External tangents are those which touch both the circles but they will not
intersect in between the circles. The tangents touch at outmost points of circles that are
ends of diameter if the circles have same diameter.
6. How many internal tangents are there for two circles?

a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer: c
92
Explanation: Internal tangents are those which touch both the circle and also intersect each
other on the line joining the centers of circles. And the internal tangents intersect each
other at midpoint of line joining the center of circles only if circles have same diameter.
7. For any point on the any curve there exist two normals.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Here we take point on the curve. There exist multiple tangents for some curve
which are continuous, trigonometric curves, hyperbola etc. But for curves like circles,
parabola, ellipse, cycloid etc. have only one tangent and normal.
8. Arrange the steps. These give procedure to draw internal tangent to two given
circles of equal radii.
i. Draw a line AB which is the required tangent.
ii. Draw the given circles with centers O and P.
iii. With center R and radius RA, draw an arc to intersect the other circle on the
other circle on the other side of OP at B.
iv. Bisect OP in R. Draw a semi circle with OR as diameter to cut the circle at A.
a) ii, iv, iii, i
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: a
Explanation: Since the circles have same radius. The only two internal tangents will
intersect at midpoint of line joining the centers. So we first found the center and then point
of intersection of tangent and circle then from that point to next point it is drawn a arc
midpoint as center and join the points gave us tangent.
9. There are 2 circles say A, B. A has 20 units radius and B has 10 units radius
and distance from centers of A and B is 40 units. Where will be the intersection
point of external tangents?
93
a) to the left of two circles
b) to the right of the two circles
c) middle of the two circles
d) they intersect at midpoint of line joining the centers
Answer: b
Explanation: A has 20 units radius and B has 10 units radius. So, the tangents go along the
circles and meet at after the second circle that is B that is right side of both circles. And we
asked for external tangents so they meet away from the circles but not in between them.
10. There are 2 circles say A, B. A is smaller than B and they are not intersecting
at any point. Where will be the intersection point of internal tangents for these
circles?
a) to the left of two circles
b) to the right of the two circles
c) middle of the two circles
d) they intersect at midpoint of line joining the centers
Answer: b
Explanation: A is smaller than B so the intersection point of internal tangents will not be on
the midpoint of line joining the centers. And we asked for internal tangents so they will not
meet away from the circles. They meet in between them.
Drawing Tangents and Normals for Different Conditions of

Circle – 2
94
1. A tangent to a circle is a line which touches the circle at one and only one
point.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: A tangent to a circle is a line which touches the circle at one and only one
point. The line joining the centre of the circle and that one point whose length is equal to
the radius is perpendicular to the tangent.
2. The line perpendicular to a tangent and is passing through the point of contact
is called as _____
a) Perpendicular bisector
b) Angle bisector
c) Normal
d) Tangent
Answer: c
Explanation: The line perpendicular to a tangent and is passing through the point of contact
is called as the normal. The line joining the centre and the point of contact is perpendicular
to the tangent and hence can be called as normal to the tangent.
3. In the following figure, the tangent at point A can be drawn by _______
a) Angle bisector
b) Perpendicular bisector
c) Rectangle
d) Arc
Answer: b
Explanation: In the given figure, the tangent to the circle with centre O at point A can be
drawn by using the property of perpendicular bisector. Since from the figure it is clear that
95
the length of OA is equal to the length of AB and the perpendicular bisector of OB is the
tangent at A.
4. How many tangents can be drawn from a point outside a given circle?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
Answer: c
Explanation: Two tangents can be drawn from a point outside a given circle. The method to
draw tangent to the circle first involves joining the point and the centre and then drawing a
semicircle with that length as diameter. Then join the intersection points on the circle and
the point outside you get the tangent.
5. In the following figure, how will make a tangent from the point outside the
circle?
a) By drawing a semicircle with diameter as OA

b) By drawing a perpendicular bisector
c) By drawing an angle bisector
d) By drawing circle with the same radius from A
Answer: a
Explanation: In the given figure, we can draw a tangent from the point outside i.e. point A
to the circle by drawing a semicircle with diameter as OA. The intersection point of this
semicircle with the circle is joined with the point A to form the tangent.
6. How many tangents to a given circle, can we draw parallel to a given line?
a) 1
b) 2
96
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: We can draw two tangents to a given circle which will be parallel to a given
line. The given line can be outside or inside the circle but we can draw two parallel lines
tangent to the circle. Both the lines will touch the circle at one and only one point
respectively.
7. In how many ways can there be a common tangent between two circles?
a) 3
b) 4
c) 1
d) 2
Answer: d
Explanation: There are two ways in which the circles can have a common tangent. One is
internal tangents in which the common tangent is touching the internal part of the circle
with respect to the other circle and the other way is external tangent.
8. How many internally common tangents can two circles have?

a) 3
b) 1
c) 2
d) 4
Answer: c
Explanation: Two circles can have two internally touching common tangents. Both the
tangents intersect at a point which is equidistant from the centers of both the circles. In
other words they intersect at a point which bisects the line joining the centers of the circles.
9. To draw a tangent to an arc of unknown radius and centre though any point on
the arc we use ________
a) Angle bisectors
b) Semicircles
c) Arc
d) Perpendicular bisector
Answer: d
Explanation: To draw a tangent to an arc of an unknown radius and a centre through any
point on the arc we the principle of perpendicular bisectors. First we cut the arc at two
97
sides of the point by an arc of any radius and we use perpendicular bisector to draw the
normal and from there we draw the tangent.
10. How is a normal to a tangent drawn?

a) Angle bisector
b) Perpendicular bisector
c) Rectangle
d) Semicircle
Answer: b
Explanation: We draw a normal to a tangent by using perpendicular bisector. Cut the
tangent at two points on both sides of the point of contact and then keeping center at the
new intersection points cut another arc on the up and down of the point of contact. Join
these points and you get a normal.
Construction of Ellipse – 1
1. Which of the following is incorrect about Ellipse?
a) Eccentricity is less than 1
b) Mathematical equation is X2 /a2 + Y2/b2 = 1
c) If a plane is parallel to axis of cone cuts the cone then the section gives ellipse
d) The sum of the distances from two focuses and any point on ellipse is
constant
Answer: c
Explanation: If a plane is parallel to axis of cone cuts the cone then the cross-section gives
hyperbola. If the plane is parallel to base it gives circle. If the plane is inclined with angle
more than external angle of cone it gives parabola. If the plane is inclined and cut every
generators then it forms a ellipse.
2. Which of the following constructions doesn’t use elliptical curves?

a) Cooling towers
b) Dams
c) Bridges
d) Man-holes
Answer: a
Explanation: Cooling towers, water channels use Hyperbolic curves as their design.
Arches, Bridges, sound reflectors, light reflectors etc use parabolic curves. Arches,
bridges, dams, monuments, man-holes, glands and stuffing boxes etc use elliptical curves.
98
3. The line which passes through the focus and perpendicular to major axis is
________
a) Minor axis
b) Latus rectum
c) Directrix
d) Tangent
Answer: b
Explanation: The line bisecting the major axis at right angles and terminated by curve is
called the minor axis. The line which passes through the focus and perpendicular to major
axis is latus rectum. Tangent is the line which touches the curve at only one point.
4. Which of the following is the eccentricity for ellipse?

a) 1
b) 3/2
c) 2/3
d) 5/2
Answer: c
Explanation: The eccentricity for ellipse is always less than 1. The eccentricity is always 1
for any parabola. The eccentricity is always 0 for a circle. The eccentricity for a hyperbola
is always greater than 1.
5. Axes are called conjugate axes when they are parallel to the tangents drawn
at their extremes.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: In ellipse there exist two axes (major and minor) which are perpendicular to
each other, whose extremes have tangents parallel them. There exist two conjugate axes
for ellipse and 1 for parabola and hyperbola.
6. Steps are given to draw an ellipse by loop of the thread method. Arrange the
steps.
i. Check whether the length of the thread is enough to touch the end of minor
axis.
ii. Draw two axes AB and CD intersecting at O. Locate the foci F1 and F2.
iii. Move the pencil around the foci, maintaining an even tension in the thread
throughout and obtain the ellipse.
iv. Insert a pin at each focus-point and tie a piece of thread in the form of a loop
99
around the pins.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: This is the easiest method of drawing ellipse if we know the distance between
the foci and minor axis, major axis. It is possible since ellipse can be traced by a point,
moving in the same plane as and in such a way that the sum of its distances from two foci
is always the same.
7. Steps are given to draw an ellipse by trammel method. Arrange the steps.
i. Place the trammel so that R is on the minor axis CD and Q on the major axis
AB. Then P will be on ellipse.
ii. Draw two axes AB and CD intersecting each other at O.
iii. By moving the trammel to new positions, always keeping R on CD and Q on
AB, obtain other points and join those to get ellipse.
iv. Along the edge of a strip of paper which may be used as a trammel, mark PQ
equal to half the minor axis and PR equal to half of major axis.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: This method uses the trammels PQ and PR which ends Q and R should be
placed on major axis and minor axis respectively. It is possible since ellipse can be traced
by a point, moving in the same plane as and in such a way that the sum of its distances
from two foci is always the same.
8. Steps are given to draw a normal and a tangent to the ellipse at a point Q on it.
Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a line ST through Q and perpendicular to NM.
ii. ST is the required tangent.
iii. Join Q with the foci F1 and F2.
iv. Draw a line NM bisecting the angle between the lines drawn before which is
normal.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
100
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: c
Explanation: Tangents are the lines which touch the curves at only one point. Normals are
perpendiculars of tangents. As in the circles first we found the normal using foci (centre in
circle) and then perpendicular at given point gives tangent.
9. Which of the following is not belonged to ellipse?

a) Latus rectum
b) Directrix
c) Major axis
d) Asymptotes
Answer: d
Explanation: Latus rectum is the line joining one of the foci and perpendicular to major axis.
Asymptotes are the tangents which meet the hyperbola at infinite distance. Major axis
consists of foci and perpendicular to minor axis.
Construction of Ellipse – 2
1. Mathematically, what is the equation of ellipse?
a) x2/a2 + y2/b2 = -1
b) x2/a2 – y2/b2 = 1
c) x2/a2 + y2/b2 = 1
d) x2/a2 – y2/b2 = 1
Answer: c
Explanation: Equation of ellipse is given by; x2/a2 + y2/b2 = 1. Here, a and b are half the
distance of lengths of major and minor axes of the ellipse. If the value of a = b then the
resulting ellipse will be a circle with centre (0,0) and radius equal to a units.
2. In general method of drawing an ellipse, a vertical line called as ____ is drawn

first.
a) Tangent
b) Normal
c) Major axis
d) Directrix
Answer: d
101
Explanation: In general method of drawing an ellipse, a vertical line called as directrix is
drawn first. The focus is drawn at a given distance from the directrix drawn. The
eccentricity of the ellipse is less than one.
3. If eccentricity of ellipse is 3/7, how many divisions will the line joining the
directrix and the focus have in general method?
a) 10
b) 7
c) 3
d) 5
Answer: a
Explanation: In general method of drawing an ellipse, if eccentricity of the ellipse is given
as 3/7 then the line joining the directrix and the focus will have 10 divisions. The number is
derived by adding the numerator and denominator of the eccentricity.
4. In the general method of drawing an ellipse, after parting the line joining the
directrix and the focus, a _____ is made.
a) Tangent
b) Vertex
d) Normal
Answer: b
Explanation: In the general method of drawing after parting the line joining the directrix and
the focus, a vertex is made. An arc with radius equal to the length between the vertex and
the focus, is drawn with the vertex as the centre.
5. An ellipse is defined as a curve traced by a point which has the sum of

distances between any two fixed points always same in the same plane.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: An ellipse can also be defined as a curve that can be traced by a point
moving in the same plane with the sum of the distances between any two fixed points
always same. The two fixed points are called as focus.
6. An ellipse has ____ foci.

a) 1
b) 2
102
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: An ellipse has 2 foci. These foci are fixed in a plane. The sum of the distances
of a point with the foci is always same. The ellipse can also be defined as the curved
traced by the points which exhibit this property.
7. If information about the major and minor axes of ellipse is given then by how
many methods can we draw the ellipse?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer: d
Explanation: There are 5 methods by which we can draw an ellipse if we know the major
and minor axes of that ellipse. Those five methods are arcs of circles method, concentric
circles method, loop of the thread method, oblong method, trammel method.
8. In arcs of circles method, the foci are constructed by drawing arcs with centre
as one of the ends of the ____ axis and the radius equal to the half of the ____
axis.
a) Minor, major
b) Major, major
c) Minor, minor
d) Major, minor
Answer: a
Explanation: In arcs of circles method, the foci are constructed by drawing arcs with centre
as one of the ends of the minor axis and the radius equal to the half of the major axis. This
method is used when we know only major and minor axes of the ellipse.
9. If we know the major and minor axes of the ellipse, the first step of drawing the
ellipse, we draw the axes ____ each other.
a) Parallel to
b) Perpendicular bisecting
c) Just touching
d) Coinciding
Answer: b
Explanation: If we know the major and minor axes of the ellipse, the first step of the
103
drawing the ellipse is to draw the major and minor axes perpendicular bisecting each other.
The major and the minor axes are perpendicular bisectors of each other.
10. Loop of the thread method is the practical application of ______ method.
a) Oblong method
b) Trammel method
c) Arcs of circles method
d) Concentric method
Answer: c
Explanation: Loop of the thread method is the practical application of the arcs of circles
method. The lengths of the ends of the minor axis are half of the length of the major axis.
In this method a pin is inserted at the foci point and the thread is tied to a pencil which is
used to draw the curve.
Construction of Parabola
1. Which of the following is incorrect about Ellipse?
a) Eccentricity is less than 1
b) Mathematical equation is x2 = 4ay
c) Length of latus rectum is 4a
d) The distance from focus to vertex is equal to perpendicular distance from
vertex to directrix
Answer: a
Explanation: The eccentricity is equal to one. That is the ratio of perpendicular distance
from point on curve to directrix is equal to distance from point to focus. The eccentricity is
less than 1 for ellipse, greater than one for hyperbola, zero for circle.
2. Which of the following constructions use parabolic curves?

a) Cooling towers
b) Water channels
c) Light reflectors
d) Man-holes
Answer: a
Explanation: Arches, Bridges, sound reflectors, light reflectors etc use parabolic curves.
Cooling towers, water channels use Hyperbolic curves as their design. Arches, bridges,
dams, monuments, man-holes, glands and stuffing boxes etc use elliptical curves.
104
3. The length of the latus rectum of the parabola y2 =ax is ______
a) 4a
b) a
c) a/4
d) 2a
Answer: b
Explanation: Latus rectum is the line perpendicular to axis and passing through focus ends
touching parabola. Length of latus rectum of y2 =4ax, x2 =4ay is 4a; y2 =2ax, x2=2ay is 2a;
y2 =ax, x2 =ay is a.
4. Which of the following is not a parabola equation?

a) x2 = 4ay
b) y2 – 8ax = 0
c) x2 = by
d) x2 = 4ay2
Answer: d
Explanation: The remaining represents different forms of parabola just by adjusting them
we can get general notation of parabola but x2 = 4ay2 gives equation for hyperbola. And
x2 + 4ay2 =1 gives equation for ellipse.
5. The parabola x2 = ay is symmetric about x-axis.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: From the given parabolic equation x2 = ay we can easily say if we give y
values to that equation we get two values for x so the given parabola is symmetric about y-
axis. If the equation is y2 = ax then it is symmetric about x-axis.
6. Steps are given to find the axis of a parabola. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a perpendicular GH to EF which cuts parabola.
ii. Draw AB and CD parallel chords to given parabola at some distance apart
from each other.
iii. The perpendicular bisector of GH gives axis of that parabola.
iv. Draw a line EF joining the midpoints lo AB and CD.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
105
Answer: b
Explanation: First we drawn the parallel chords and then line joining the midpoints of the
previous lines which is parallel to axis so we drawn the perpendicular to this line and then
perpendicular bisector gives the axis of parabola.
7. Steps are given to find focus for a parabola. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a perpendicular bisector EF to BP, Intersecting the axis at a point F.
ii. Then F is the focus of parabola.
iii. Mark any point P on the parabola and draw a perpendicular PA to the axis.
iv. Mark a point B on the on the axis such that BV = VA (V is vertex of parabola).
Join B and P.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: c
Explanation: Initially we took a parabola with axis took any point on it drawn perpendicular
to axis. And from the point perpendicular meets the axis another point is taken such that
the vertex is equidistant from before point and later point. Then from that one to point on
parabola a line is drawn and perpendicular bisector for that line meets the axis at focus.
8. Which of the following is not belonged to ellipse?

a) Latus rectum
b) Directrix
c) Major axis
d) Axis
Answer: c
Explanation: Latus rectum is the line joining one of the foci and perpendicular to major axis.
Major axis and minor axis are in ellipse but in parabola only one focus and one axis exists
since eccentricity is equal to 1.
Construction of Hyperbola
1. Which of the following is Hyperbola equation?
a) y2 + x2/b2 = 1
b) x2= 1ay
c) x2 /a2 – y2/b2 = 1
106
d) X2 + Y2 = 1
Answer: c
Explanation: The equation x2 + y2 = 1 gives a circle; if the x2 and y2 have same co-efficient
then the equation gives circles. The equation x2= 1ay gives a parabola. The equation y2 +
x2/b2 = 1 gives an ellipse.
2. Which of the following constructions use hyperbolic curves?

a) Cooling towers
b) Dams
c) Bridges
d) Man-holes
Answer: a
Explanation: Cooling towers, water channels use Hyperbolic curves as their design.
Arches, Bridges, sound reflectors, light reflectors etc use parabolic curves. Arches,
bridges, dams, monuments, man-holes, glands and stuffing boxes etc use elliptical curves.
3. The lines which touch the hyperbola at infinite distance are ________
a) Axes
b) Tangents at vertex
c) Latus rectum
d) Asymptotes
Answer: d
Explanation: Axis is line passing through the focuses of hyperbola. The line which passes
through the focus and perpendicular to major axis is latus rectum. Tangent is the line which
touches the curve at only one point.
4. Which of the following is the eccentricity for hyperbola?

a) 1
b) 3/2
c) 2/3
d) 1/2
Answer: b
Explanation: The eccentricity for ellipse is always less than 1. The eccentricity is always 1
for any parabola. The eccentricity is always 0 for a circle. The eccentricity for a hyperbola
is always greater than 1.
5. If the asymptotes are perpendicular to each other then the hyperbola is called
rectangular hyperbola.
107
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: In ellipse there exist two axes (major and minor) which are perpendicular to
each other, whose extremes have tangents parallel them. There exist two conjugate axes
for ellipse and 1 for parabola and hyperbola.
6. A straight line parallel to asymptote intersects the hyperbola at only one point.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: A straight line parallel to asymptote intersects the hyperbola at only one point.
This says that the part of hyperbola will lay in between the parallel lines through outs its
length after intersecting at one point.
7. Steps are given to locate the directrix of hyperbola when axis and foci are
given. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a line joining A with the other Focus F.
ii. Draw the bisector of angle FAF1, cutting the axis at a point B.
iii. Perpendicular to axis at B gives directrix.
iv. From the first focus F1 draw a perpendicular to touch hyperbola at A.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: d
Explanation: The directrix cut the axis at the point of intersection of angular bisector of lines
passing through the foci and any point on hyperbola. Just by knowing this we can find the
directrix just by drawing perpendicular at that point to axis.
8. Steps are given to locate asymptotes of hyperbola if its axis and focus are
given. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw a perpendicular AB to axis at vertex.
ii. OG and OE are required asymptotes.
iii. With O midpoint of axis (centre) taking radius as OF (F is focus) draw arcs
cutting AB at E, G.
iv. Join O, G and O, E.
a) i, iii, iv, ii
108
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: Asymptotes pass through centre is main point and then the asymptotes cut
the directrix and perpendiculars at focus are known and simple. Next comes is where the
asymptotes cuts the perpendiculars, it is at distance of centre to vertex and centre to focus
respectively.
9. The asymptotes of any hyperbola intersects at __________

a) On the directrix
b) On the axis
c) At focus
d) Centre
Answer: d
Explanation: The asymptotes intersect at centre that is midpoint of axis even for conjugate
axis it is valid. Along with the hyperbola asymptotes are also symmetric about both axes so
they should meet at centre only.
Construction of Cycloidal Curves

1. ___________ is a curve generated by a point fixed to a circle, within or outside
its circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line.
a) Cycloid
b) Epicycloid
c) Epitrochoid
d) Trochoid
Answer: d
Explanation: Cycloid form if generating point is on the circumference of generating circle.
Epicycloid represents generating circle rolls on directing circle. Epitrochoid is that the
generating point is within or outside the generating circle but generating circle rolls on
directing circle.
2. ___________ is a curve generated by a point on the circumference of a circle,

which rolls without slipping along another circle outside it.
a) Trochoid
b) Epicycloid
109
c) Hypotrochoid
d) Involute
Answer: b
Explanation: Trochoid is curve generated by a point fixed to a circle, within or outside its
circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line. ‘Hypo’ represents the generating
circle is inside the directing circle.
3. __________ is a curve generated by a point on the circumference of a circle

which rolls without slipping on a straight line.
a) Trochoid
b) Epicycloid
c) Cycloid
d) Evolute
Answer: c
circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line. Cycloid is a curve generated by a
point on the circumference of a circle which rolls along a straight line. ‘Epi’ represents the
directing path is circle.
4. When the circle rolls along another circle inside it, the curve is called a
__________
a) Epicycloid
b) Cycloid
c) Trochoid
d) Hypocycloid
Answer: d
Explanation: Cycloid is a curve generated by a point on the circumference of a circle which
rolls along a straight line. ‘Epi’ represents the directing path is circle. Trochoid is curve
generated by a point fixed to a circle, within or outside its circumference, as the circle rolls
along a straight line. ‘Hypo’ represents the generating circle is inside the directing circle.

Generating point is within the circumference of circle and generating circle
1. i. Inferior trochoid
rolls on straight line.
110
Generating point is on the circumference of circle and generating circle rolls
2. ii. Epicycloid
on straight line.
Generating point is outside the circumference of circle and generating circle

3. iii. Cycloid
rolls on straight line.
Generating point is on the circumference of circle and generating circle rolls Superior
4. iv.
along another circle outside it. trochoid
a) 1, i; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, ii
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: a
circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line. Inferior or superior depends on
whether the generating point in within or outside the generating circle. If directing path is
straight line then the curve is cycloid.
Generating point is within the circumference of circle and generating circle Superior
1. i.
rolls on another circle outside it Epitrochoid
Generating point is within or outside the circumference of circle and Inferior

2. ii.
generating circle rolls inside another circle. Epitrochoid
Generating point is outside the circumference of circle and generating

3. iii. Hypotrochoid
circle rolls on another circle outside it.
Generating point is on the circumference of circle and generating circle

4. iv. Hypocycloid
rolls along another circle inside it.
111
a) 1, i; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, ii
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: b
Explanation: Inferior or superior depends on whether the generating point in within or
outside the generating circle. ‘Hypo’ represents the generating circle is inside the directing
circle. Trochoid is curve generated by a point fixed to a circle, within or outside its
circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line.
7. Steps are given to find the normal and tangent for a cycloid. Arrange the steps
if C is the centre for generating circle and PA is the directing line. N is the point
on cycloid.
i. Through M, draw a line MO perpendicular to the directing line PA and cutting at
O.
ii. With centre N and radius equal to radius of generating circle, draw an arc
cutting locus of C at M.
iii. Draw a perpendicular to ON at N which is tangent.
iv. Draw a line joining O and N which is normal.
a) iii, i, iv, ii
b) ii, i, iv, iii
c) iv, ii, i, iii
d) i, iv, iii, ii
Answer: b
Explanation: The normal at any point on a cycloidal curve will pass through the
corresponding point of contact between the generating circle and the directing line. So with
help of locus of centre of generating circle we found the normal and then tangent.
8. Steps are given to find the normal and tangent to an epicycloid. Arrange the
steps if C is the centre for generating circle and O is the centre of directing cycle.
N is the point on epicycloid.
i. Draw a line through O and D cutting directing circle at M.
ii. Draw perpendicular to MN at N. We get tangent.
iii. With centre N and radius equal to radius of generating circle, draw an arc
cutting the locus of C at D.
iv. Draw a line joining M and N which is normal.
a) iii, i, iv, ii
112
b) ii, i, iv, iii
c) iv, ii, i, iii
d) i, iv, iii, ii
Answer: a
Explanation: The normal at any point on an epicycloidal curve will pass through the
corresponding point of contact between the generating circle and the directing circle. And
also with help of locus of centre of generating circle we found the normal and then tangent.
9. The generating circle will be inside the directing circle for _________
a) Cycloid
b) Inferior trochoid
c) Inferior epitrochoid
d) Hypocycloid
Answer: d
Explanation: The generating circle will be inside the directing circle for hypocycloid or
hypotrochoid. Trochoid is a curve generated by a point fixed to a circle, within or outside its
circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line or over circle if not represented with
hypo as prefix.
10. The generating point is outside the generating circle for____________

a) Cycloid
b) Superior Trochoid
c) Inferior Trochoid
d) Epicycloid
Answer: b
Explanation: If the generating point is on the circumference of generating circle then the
curve formed may be cycloids or hypocycloids. Trochoid is a curve generated by a point
fixed to a circle, within or outside its circumference, as the circle rolls along a straight line
or a circle. But here given is outside so it is superior trochoid.
Construction of Involute
113
1. Mathematical equation for Involute is ___________
Answer: b
Explanation: x= a cos3 Ɵ is equation for hypocycloid, x= (a+ b) cosƟ – a cos ( (a+b)/aƟ) is
equation for epicycloid, y = a (1-cosƟ) is equation for cycloid and x = r cosƟ + r Ɵ sinƟ is
equation for Involute.
2. Steps are given to draw involute of given circle. Arrange the steps f C is the
centre of circle and P be the end of the thread (starting point).
i. Draw a line PQ, tangent to the circle and equal to the circumference of the
circle.
ii. Draw the involute through the points P1, P2, P3 ……..etc.
iii. Divide PQ and the circle into 12 equal parts.
iv. Draw tangents at points 1, 2, 3 etc. and mark on them points P1, P2, P3 etc.
such that 1P1 =P1l, 2P2 = P2l, 3P3= P3l etc.
a) ii, i, iv, iii
b) iii, i , iv, ii
c) i, iii, iv, ii
d) iv, iii, i, ii
Answer: c
Explanation: Involute is curve which is formed by thread which is yet complete a single
wound around a circular object so thus the thread having length equal to circumference of
circular object. And the involute curve follows only the thread is kept straight while
wounding.
3. Steps are given to draw tangent and normal to the involute of a circle (center is
C) at a point N on it. Arrange the steps.
i. With CN as diameter describe a semi-circle cutting the circle at M.
ii. Draw a line joining C and N.
iii. Draw a line perpendicular to NM and passing through N which is tangent.
iv. Draw a line through N and M. This line is normal.
a) ii, i, iv, iii
114
b) iii, i , iv, ii
c) i, iii, iv, ii
d) iv, iii, i, ii
Answer: a
Explanation: The normal to an involute of a circle is tangent to that circle. So simply by
finding the appreciable tangent of circle passing through the point given on involute gives
the normal and then by drawing perpendicular we can find the tangent to involute.
4. Steps given are to draw an involute of a given square ABCD. Arrange the
steps.
i. With B as centre and radius BP1 (BA+ AD) draw an arc to cut the line CB-
produced at P2.
ii. The curve thus obtained is the involute of the square.
iii. With centre A and radius AD, draw an arc to cut the line BA-produced at a
point P1.
iv. Similarly, with centres C and D and radii CP2 and DP3 respectively, draw arcs
to cut DC-produced at P3 and AD-produced at P4.
a) ii, i, iv, iii
b) iii, i , iv, ii
c) i, iii, iv, ii
d) iv, iii, i, ii
Answer: b
Explanation: It is easy to draw involutes to polygons. First we have to point the initial point
and then extending the sides. Then cutting the extended lines with cumulative radiuses of
length of sides gives the points on involute and then joining them gives involute.
5. Steps given are to draw an involute of a given triangle ABC. Arrange the steps.
i. With C as centre and radius C1 draw arc cutting AC-extended at 2.
ii. With A as center and radius A2 draw an arc cutting BA- extended at 3
completing involute.
iii. B as centre with radius AB draw an arc cutting the BC- extended at 1.
iv. Draw the given triangle with corners A, B, C.
a) ii, i, iv, iii
b) iii, i , iv, ii
c) i, iii, iv, ii
d) iv, iii, i, ii
Answer: d
115
Explanation: It will take few simple steps to draw involute for a triangle since it has only 3
sides. First we have to point the initial point and then extending the sides. Then cutting the
extended lines with cumulative radiuses of length of sides gives the points on involute and
then joining them gives involute.
6. Steps given are to draw an involute of a given pentagon ABCDE. Arrange the
steps.
i. B as centre and radius AB, draw an arc cutting BC –extended at 1.
ii. The curve thus obtained is the involute of the pentagon.
iii. C as centre and radius C1, draw an arc cutting CD extended at 2.
iv. Similarly, D, E, A as centres and radius D2, E3, A4, draw arcs cutting DE, EA,
AB at 3, 4, 5 respectively.
a) ii, i, iv, iii
b) iii, i , iv, ii
c) i, iii, iv, ii
d) iv, iii, i, ii
Answer: c
Explanation: It is easy to draw involutes to polygons. First we have to point the initial point
and then extending the sides. Then cutting the extended lines with cumulative radiuses of
length of sides gives the points on involute and then joining them gives involute.
7. For inferior trochoid or inferior epitrochoid the curve touches the directing line
or directing circle.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Since in the inferior trochoids the generating point is inside the generating
circle the path will be at a distance from directing line or circle even if the generating circle
is inside or outside the directing circle.
8. ‘Hypo’ as prefix to cycloids give that the generating circle is inside the directing
circle.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: ‘Hypo’ represents the generating circle is inside the directing circle. ‘Epi’
represents the directing path is circle. Trochoid represents the generating point is not on
the circumference of generating circle.
116
Construction of Spiral
1. Which of the following represents an Archemedian spiral?
a) Tornado
b) Cyclone
c) Mosquito coil
d) Fibonacci series
Answer: c
Explanation: Archemedian spiral is a curve traced out by a point moving in such a way that
its movement towards or away from the pole is uniform with the increase of the vectorial
angle from the starting line. It is generally used for teeth profiles of helical gears etc.
2. Steps are given to draw normal and tangent to an archemedian curve. Arrange
the steps, if O is the center of curve and N is point on it.
i. Through N, draw a line ST perpendicular to NM. ST is the tangent to the spiral.
ii. Draw a line OM equal in length to the constant of the curve and perpendicular
to NO.
iii. Draw the line NM which is the normal to the spiral.
iv. Draw a line passing through the N and O which is radius vector.
a) ii, iv, i, iii
b) i, iv, iii, ii
c) iv, ii, iii, i
d) iii, i, iv, ii
Answer: c
Explanation: The normal to an archemedian spiral at any point is the hypotenuse of the
right angled triangle having the other two sides equal in length to the radius vector at that
point and the constant of the curve respectively.
3. Which of the following does not represents an Archemedian spiral?

a) Coils in heater
b) Tendrils
c) Spring
d) Cyclone
Answer: d
Explanation: Tendrils are a slender thread-like structures of a climbing plant, often growing
in a spiral form. For cyclones the moving point won’t have constant velocity. The
archemedian spirals have constant increase in length of moving point. Spring is a helix.
117
4. Match the following. Given points are about spirals.
1. The point about which the line rotates is called ___________ i. Radius vector
2. The line joining any point on the curve with the pole is called ________ ii. Convolution
3. Each complete revolution of the spiral is termed as ___________ iii. Vectorial angle
4. Angle between radius vector and the line in its initial position is called _____ iv. Pole
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, iv; 2, i; 3, ii; 4, iii
d) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
Answer: c
Explanation: The line joining any point on the curve with the pole is called radius vector.
Angle between radius vector and the line in its initial position is called vectorial angle. Each
complete revolution of the spiral is termed as convolutions. A spiral may make any number
of convolutions before it reaches the pole.
1. Tendrils i. Helix
2. Spring ii. Archemedian spiral
3. Mosquito coil iii. Fibonacci spiral
4. Cyclone iv. Lituus spiral
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
118
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, i; 3, ii; 4, iii
Answer: d
Explanation: These are general structures we used to see in our daily life which have
certain particular names when comes to spirals. Since some of them are natural structures
they may obey or disobey the perfect spiral shapes but looks alike to particular spirals.
6. Match the following, given are the equations of different types of spirals.
1. Lituus spiral i. r = a + b. Ѳ
2. Logarithmic spiral ii. r=Ɵ-1/2
3. Archemedian spiral iii r= a ebӨ
4. Fermat’s spiral iv. r=Ɵ1/2
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, i; 3, ii; 4, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: Given are equations in polar co-ordinate system, which have r (radius) and
theta Ɵ (angle). Where a, b are some constants and e represents exponential function.
7. Logarithmic spiral is also called Equiangular spiral.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The logarithmic spiral is also known as equiangular spiral because of its
property that the angle which the tangent at any point on the curve makes with the radius
vector at that point is constant. The values of vectorial angles are in arithmetical
progression.
119
8. In logarithmic Spiral the radius vectors are in arithmetical progression.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In logarithmic Spiral the values of vectorial angles are in arithmetical
progression and radius vectors are in geometrical progression that is the lengths of
consecutive radius vectors enclosing equal angles are always constant.
9. The mosquito coil we generally see in house hold purposes and heating coils
in electrical heater etc are generally which spiral.
a) Logarithmic spiral
b) Equiangular spiral
c) Fibonacci spiral
d) Archemedian spiral
Answer: d
Explanation: Archemedian spiral is a curve traced out by a point moving in such a way that
its movement towards or away from the pole is uniform with the increase of the vectorial
angle from the starting line. The use of this curve is made in teeth profiles of helical gears,
profiles of cam etc.
Basics of Conic Sections – 1

1. The sections cut by a plane on a right circular cone are called as ______
a) Parabolic sections
b) Conic sections
c) Elliptical sections
d) Hyperbolic sections
Answer: b
Explanation: The sections cut by a plane on a right circular cone are called as conic
sections or conics. The plane cuts the cone on different angles with respect to the axis of
the cone to produce different conic sections.
2. Which of the following is a conic section?

a) Circle
b) Rectangle
c) Triangle
d) Square
120
Answer: a
Explanation: Circle is a conic section. When the plane cuts the right circular cone at right
angles with the axis of the cone, the shape obtained is called as circle. If the angle is
oblique we get the other parts of the conic sections.
3. In conics, the _____ is revolving to form two anti-parallel cones joined at the
apex.
a) Ellipse
b) Circle
c) Generator
d) Parabola
Answer: c
Explanation: In conics, the generator is revolving to form two anti-parallel cones joined at
the apex. The plane is then made to cut these cones and we get different conic sections. If
we cut at right angles with respect to the axis of the cone we get a circle.
4. While cutting, if the plane is at an angle and it cuts all the generators, then the
conic formed is called as ______
a) Circle
b) Ellipse
c) Parabola
d) Hyperbola
Answer: b
Explanation: If the plane cuts all the generators and is at an angle to the axis of the cone,
then the resulting conic section is called as ellipse. If the cutting angle was right angle and
the plane cuts all the generators then the conic formed would be circle.
5. If the plane cuts at an angle to the axis but does not cut all the generators then
what is the name of the conics formed?
a) Ellipse
b) Hyperbola
c) Circle
d) Parabola
Answer: d
Explanation: If the plane cuts at an angle with respect to the axis and does not cut all the
generators then the conics formed is a parabola. If the plane cuts all the generators then
the conic section formed is called as ellipse.
121
6. When the plane cuts the cone at angle parallel to the axis of the cone, then
_____ is formed.
a) Hyperbola
b) Parabola
c) Circle
d) Ellipse
Answer: a
Explanation: When the plane cuts the cone at an angle parallel to the axis of the cone, then
the resulting conic section is called as hyperbola. If the plane cuts the cone at an angle
with respect to axis of the cone then the resulting conic sections are called as ellipse and
parabola.
7. Which of the following is not a conic section?

a) Apex
b) Hyperbola
c) Ellipse
d) Parabola
Answer: a
Explanation: Conic sections are formed when a plane cuts through the cone at an angle
with respect to the axis of the cone. If the angle is right angle then the conics is circle, if the
angle is oblique then the resulting conics are parabola and ellipse.
8. The locus of point moving in a plane such that the distance between a fixed
point and a fixed straight line is constant is called as ________
a) Conic
b) Rectangle
c) Square
d) Polygon
Answer: a
Explanation: The locus of a point moving in a plane such that the distance between a fixed
point and a fixed straight line is always constant. The fixed straight line is called as directrix
and the fixed point is called as focus.
9. The ratio of the distance from the focus to the distance from the directrix is
called as eccentricity.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
122
Explanation: The ratio of the distance from the focus to the distance from the directrix is
called as eccentricity. It is denoted as e. The value of eccentricity can give information
regarding which type of conics it is.
10. Which of the following conics has an eccentricity of unity?

a) Circle
b) Parabola
c) Hyperbola
d) Ellipse
Answer: b
Explanation: Eccentricity is defined as the ratio of the distance from the focus to the
distance from the directrix. It is denoted as e. The value of eccentricity can give information
regarding which type of conics it is. The eccentricity of parabola is unity that is 1.
11. Which of the following has an eccentricity less than one?

a) Circle
b) Parabola
c) Hyperbola
d) Ellipse
Answer: d
regarding which type of conics it is. The eccentricity of ellipse is less than one.
12. If the distance from the focus is 10 units and the distance from the directrix is
30 units, then what is the eccentricity?
a) 0.3333
b) 0.8333
c) 1.6667
d) 0.0333
Answer: a
distance from the directrix. Hence from the formula of eccentricity, e = 10 ÷ 30 = 0.3333.
Since the value of eccentricity is less than one the conic is ellipse.
13. If the value of eccentricity is 12, then what is the name of the conic?
a) Ellipse
b) Hyperbola
123
c) Parabola
d) Circle
Answer: b
Explanation: Eccentricity is defined as the ration of the distance from the focus to the
distance from the directrix. It is denoted as e. If the value of eccentricity is greater than
unity then the conic section is called as hyperbola.
14. If the distance from the focus is 3 units and the distance from the directrix is 3
units, then how much is the eccentricity?
a) Infinity
b) Zero
c) Unity
d) Less than one
Answer: c
Explanation: Eccentricity is defined as the ration of the distance from the focus to the
distance from the directrix and it is denoted as e. Hence from the definition, e = 3 ÷ 3 = 1.
Hence the value of eccentricity is equal to unity.
15. If the distance from the focus is 2 mm and the distance from the directrix is
0.5 mm then what is the name of the conic section?
a) Circle
b) Ellipse
c) Parabola
d) Hyperbola
Answer: d
Explanation: The eccentricity is defined as the ratio of the distance from the focus to the
distance from the directrix. It is denoted as e. If the value of the eccentricity is greater than
unity then the conic section is called as hyperbola.

1. Which of the following is a conic section?
a) Apex
b) Circle
c) Rectangle
d) Square
Answer: b
124
Explanation: Conic sections are formed when a plane cuts through the cone at an angle
with respect to the axis of the cone. If the angle is right angle then the conics is circle, if the
angle is oblique then the resulting conics are parabola and ellipse.
2. Which of the following has an eccentricity more than unity?

a) Parabola
b) Circle
c) Hyperbola
d) Ellipse
Answer: c
regarding which type of conics it is. The eccentricity of hyperbola is more than one.
3. If the distance from the focus is 10 units and the distance from the directrix is
30 units, then what is the name of the conic?
a) Circle
b) Parabola
c) Hyperbola
d) Ellipse
Answer: d
distance from the directrix. Hence from the formula of eccentricity, e = 10 ÷ 30 = 0.3333.
Since the value of eccentricity is less than one the conic is ellipse.
4. If the distance from the focus is 2 mm and the distance from the directrix is 0.5
mm then what is the value of eccentricity?
a) 0.4
b) 4
c) 0.04
d) 40
Answer: b
distance from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Therefore, by definition, e = 2 ÷ 0.5 = 4.
Hence the conic section is called as hyperbola.
5. If the distance from the focus is 3 units and the distance from the directrix is 3
units, then what is the name of the conic section?
125
a) Ellipse
b) Hyperbola
c) Circle
d) Parabola
Answer: d
distance from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Therefore, by definition, e = 3 ÷ 3 = 1.
Hence the conic section is called as parabola.
6. If the distance from the directrix is 5 units and the distance from the focus is 3
units then what is the name of the conic section?
a) Ellipse
b) Parabola
c) Hyperbola
d) Circle
Answer: a
distance from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Hence, by definition, e = 3 ÷ 5 = 0.6.
Hence the conic section is called as ellipse.
7. If the distance from a fixed point is greater than the distance from a fixed
straight line then what is the name of the conic section?
a) Parabola
b) Circle
c) Hyperbola
d) Ellipse
Answer: c
Explanation: The fixed point is called as focus and the fixed straight line is called as
directrix. Eccentricity is defined as the ratio of the distance from the focus to the distance
from the directrix and it is denoted by e. If e is greater than one then the conic section is
called as hyperbola.
8. If the distance from a fixed straight line is equal to the distance from a fixed
point then what is the name of the conic section?
a) Ellipse
b) Parabola
c) Hyperbola
d) Circle
126
Answer: b
Explanation: The fixed straight line is called as directrix and the fixed point is called as
focus. Eccentricity is defined as the ratio of the distance from the focus to the distance from
the directrix and it is denoted by e. Eccentricity of parabola is unity.
9. If the distance from the directrix is greater than the distance from the focus
then what is the value of eccentricity?
a) Unity
b) Less than one
c) Greater than one
d) Zero
Answer: b
distance from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Therefore, by definition the value of
eccentricity is less than one hence the conic section is ellipse.
10. If the distance from the directrix is 5 units and the distance from the focus is 3
units then what is the value of eccentricity?
a) 1.667
b) 0.833
c) 0.60
d) 0.667
Answer: c
distance from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Therefore, by definition, e = 3 ÷ 5 = 0.6.
Hence the conic section is called as ellipse.
11. If the distance from a fixed straight line is 5mm and the distance from a fixed
point is 14mm then what is the name of the conic section?
a) Hyperbola
b) Parabola
c) Ellipse
d) Circle
Answer: a
the directrix and it is denoted by e. Hence from definition e = 14 ÷ 5 = 2.8. The eccentricity
of hyperbola is greater than one.
127
12. If the distance from the directrix is greater than the distance from the focus
then what is the name of the conic section?
a) Hyperbola
b) Parabola
c) Ellipse
d) Circle
Answer: c
distance from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Therefore, by definition the value of
eccentricity is less than one hence the conic section is ellipse.
13. If the distance from a fixed straight line is equal to the distance from a fixed
point then what is the value of eccentricity?
a) Unity
b) Greater than one
c) Infinity
d) Zero
Answer: a
the directrix and it is denoted by e. Hence from definition e = x ÷ x = 1.
14. If the distance from a fixed point is greater than the distance from a fixed
straight line then what is the value of eccentricity?
a) Unity
b) Infinity
c) Zero
d) Greater than one
Answer: d
Explanation: The fixed point is called as focus and the fixed straight line is called as
directrix. Eccentricity is defined as the ratio of the distance from the focus to the distance
from the directrix and it is denoted by e. Hence from definition, the value of eccentricity is
greater than one.
15. If the distance from a fixed straight line is 5mm and the distance from a fixed
point is 14mm then what is the value of eccentricity?
a) 0.357
b) 3.57
128
c) 2.8
d) 0.28
Answer: c
the directrix and it is denoted by e. Hence from definition e = 14 ÷ 5 = 2.8.

1. Choose the correct option.
Answer: b
Explanation: The point where the extension of major axis meets the curve is called vertex.
The conic is defined as the locus of a point in such a way that the ratio of its distance from
a fixed point and a fixed straight line is always constant. The ratio gives the eccentricity.
The fixed point is called the focus and the fixed line is called directrix.

1. E < 1 i. Rectangular hyperbola
2. E = 1 ii. Hyperbola
3. E > 1 iii. Ellipse
4. E > 1 iv. Parabola
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, iii; 2, iv; 3, ii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: c
Explanation: The conic is defined as the locus of a point in such a way that the ratio of its
distance from a fixed point and a fixed straight line is always constant. The fixed point is
129
called the focus and the fixed line is called directrix. The change in ratio as given above
results in different curves.
3. A plane is parallel to a base of regular cone and cuts at middle. The cross-
section is __________
a) Circle
b) Parabola
c) Hyperbola
d) Ellipse
Answer: a
Explanation: A cone is formed by reducing the cross-section of circle the point. So there
exist circles along the cone parallel to base. Since the given plane is parallel to base of the
regular cone. The cross-section will be circle.
4. The cross-section is a _________ when a plane is inclined to the axis and cuts
all the generators of a regular cone.
a) Rectangular Hyperbola
b) Hyperbola
c) Circle
d) Ellipse
Answer: d
Explanation: A cone is a solid or hollow object which tapers from a circular base to a point.
Here given an inclined plane which cuts all the generators of a regular cone. So the cross-
section will definitely ellipse.
5. The curve formed when eccentricity is equal to one is _________

a) Parabola
b) Circle
c) Semi-circle
d) Hyperbola
Answer: a
Explanation: The answer is parabola. Circle has an eccentricity of zero and semi circle is
130
part of circle and hyper eccentricity is greater than one.
6. The cross-section gives a __________ when the cutting plane is parallel to

axis of cone.
a) Parabola
b) Hyperbola
c) Circle
d) Ellipse
7. A plane cuts the cylinder the plane is not parallel to the base and cuts all the
generators. The Cross-section is _________
a) Circle
b) Ellipse
c) Parabola
d) Hyperbola
Answer: b
Explanation: Given is a plane which is inclined but cutting all the generators so it will be
ellipse. Cutting of all generators gives us information that the cross-section will be closed
curve and not parabola or hyperbola. Circle will form only if plane is parallel to base.
8. A plane cuts the cylinder and the plane is parallel to the base and cuts all the
generators. The Cross-section is _________
a) Circle
b) Ellipse
c) Parabola
d) Rectangular hyperbola
Answer: a
Explanation: The plane which is parallel to base will definitely cut the cone at all
generators. Here additional information also given that the plane is parallel to base so the
131
cross-section will be circle.
9. The curve which has eccentricity zero is _______

a) Parabola
b) Ellipse
c) Hyperbola
d) Circle
Answer: d
Explanation: The eccentricity is the ratio of distance from a point on curve to focus and to
distance from the point to directrix. For parabola it is 1 and for ellipse it is less than 1 and
for hyperbola it is greater than 1. And for circle it is zero.
10. Rectangular hyperbola is one of the hyperbola but the asymptotes are
perpendicular in case of rectangular hyperbola.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Asymptotes are the tangents which meet the curve hyperbola at infinite
distance. If the asymptotes are perpendicular to each other then hyperbola takes the name
of rectangular hyperbola.
Construction of Evolutes and Helix

1. Steps are given to determine the centre of curvature at a given point on a
conic. Arrange the steps. Let P be the given point on the conic and F is the focus.
Join P with F.
Draw a line NR perpendicular to PN and cutting PF or PF-extended at R.
Draw a line RO perpendicular to PR and cutting PN-extended at O which is
centre of curvature.
At P, draw a normal PN, cutting the axis at N.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
132
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: a
Explanation: The centre O of the circle of curvature lies on the normal to the curve at P.
This centre is called center of curvature at P. So for that we first found normal and
accordingly the curve we found center of curvature.
2. Steps are given to determine the centre of curvature at a given point on an

Ellipse. Arrange the steps. Let P be the given point on the conic and F and F1
are the foci.
i. Produce F1G to H so that GH = VF. Join H with F.
ii. Then O is the required centre of curvature.
iii. Draw a line GO parallel to HF and intersecting the axis at O.
iv. Draw a line F1G inclines to the axis and equal to VF1.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: First we just took the arbitrary line passing through one of the foci and then
extended up to the length from that focus to opposite vertex and then extended further up
to length of distance between vertex and respective focus. Drawing parallel lines on to the
focus gave us O.
3. Steps are given to determine the centre of curvature at a given point on an

Ellipse. Arrange the steps. Let P be the given point on the conic and F is one of
the focus.
i. Join A with C.
ii. Then O1 and O2 are the centres of curvature when the point P is at A and C
respectively.
iii. Draw a rectangle AOCE in which AO = ½ major axis and CO = ½ minor axis.
iv. Through E, draw a line perpendicular to AC and cutting the major axis at O1
and the minor axis O2.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
133
Answer: c
focus gave us O.
4. Steps are given to determine the centre of curvature at a given point on a

hyperbola. Arrange the steps. Let P be the given point on the conic, V is vertex
and F and F1 are the foci.
i. Draw a line GO parallel to HF and cutting the axis at O.
ii. Draw a line F1G inclined to the axis and equal to FV1.
iii. Then O is the centre of curvature at the vertex V.
iv. On F1G, mark a point H such that HG = VF. Join H with F.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: d
focus gave us O.
5. Steps are given to draw the evolute of a cycloid. Arrange the steps.
i. Mark a point P on the cycloid and draw the normal PN to it.
ii. Similarly, mark a number of points on the cycloid and determine centres of
curvature at these points.
iii. The curve drawn through these centres is the evolute of the cycloid. It is an
equal cycloid.
iv. Produce PN to Op so that NOp = PN. Op is the centre of curvature at the point
P.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: a
Explanation: Evolute is generally the locus of center of curvature from point on any curve.
134
So for center of curvature we first need to draw normals at the point on curve and then
center of curvature and then similarly other center of curvatures and joining the whole
gives us the evolute.
6. Steps are given to draw the evolute of a hypocycloid. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw the diameter PQ of the rolling circle. Join Q with O, the centre of the
directing circle.
ii. Mark a number of points on the hypocycloid and similarly, obtain centres of
curvature at these points. The curve drawn through these centres is the evolute
of the hypocycloid.
iii. Produce PN to cut OQ- produced at Op, which is the centre of curvature at the
point P.
iv. Mark a point P on the hypocycloid and draw the normal PN to it.
a) i, iv, ii, iii
b) iv, i, iii, ii
c) iii, i, iv, ii
d) ii, iv, i, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: Evolute is generally the locus of center of curvature from point on any curve.
So for that we first found the center of curvature of a point and then similarly other joining
the whole gives us the evolute.
7. The evolute of the involute of a circle is the circle itself.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: In the involute of a circle, the normal NM at any point N is tangent to the circle
at the point of contact M. M is the centre of curvature at the point N. Hence, the evolute of
the involute is the circle itself.
8. The difference between two consecutive crest/root of a screw is called

__________
a) Helix
b) Mean diameter
c) Pitch
d) Revolution
Answer: b
Explanation: Mean diameter is the average of maximum diameter and the minimum
135
diameter which is caused by the crest and root of screws, bolts etc. revolution is the one
complete turn of helix around its own axis.
9. Pitch of the given bolt is 10 mm. The bolt completed the ½ revolution in
forward direction. How much the bolt advances through axis?
a) 10 mm
b) 5 mm
c) 2.5 mm
d) 20 mm
Answer: b
Explanation: The axial advance of the point during one complete revolution is called the
pitch of the helix. So here pitch is 10 mm and the point start upwards from the base of the
cylinder, in ½ revolutions, the point will move up to a distance of 5mm from base.
10. Helix angle can be expressed as tanӨ = __________________
Answer: a
Explanation: The helix is seen as a straight line and is the hypotenuse of a right-angled
triangle having base equal to the circumference of the circle and the vertical side equal to
the pitch of the helix. The angle Ɵ which it makes with the base, is called the helix angle.
11. Number of revolutions are 10 and pitch is 2mm. Find the length of spring.
a) 10
b) 40
c) 30
d) 20
Answer: d
Explanation: Here there is mention the type of edges of spring so there would be no
additional length. Length of the bolt = pitch x number of revolutions, L = 2 mm x 10, L = 20
mm.
136
12. Length of spring is 5cm and pitch measured is 4mm. Find the number of
revolutions.
a) 20
b) 12.5
c) 13
d) 12
Answer: d
Explanation: Here there is mention the type of edges of spring so there would be no
additional length. Length of the bolt = pitch x number of revolutions, 5cm = 50 mm =4 x (r),
r = 50/4 =12.5 mm.
Construction of Helical Springs

1. A Spring is made of wire whose cross-section is a square of 15 mm side. Inner
diameter of spring is 60 mm then outer diameter will be _________
a) 45
b) 75
c) 90
d) 80
Answer: c
Explanation: Outer diameter is equal to the sum of inner diameter and 2 times the diameter
of wire. Here the cross section of wire is square so diameter can be considered as 15 mm.
outer diameter = 60 +2 x 15 = 90 mm.
2. A Spring is made of wire whose cross-section is an equilateral triangle of 8

mm side. Inner diameter of spring is 40 mm then outer diameter will be
_________
a) 57.88 mm
b) 54.88 mm
c) 60 mm
d) 56 mm
Answer:
Explanation: Outer diameter = inner diameter + (2 x diameter of wire), Here wire has cross
section of equilateral triangle of side 8 mm so it covers a length of 8.94 (square root (82 +
42 )) mm from inner to outer end of spring. Outer diameter = 40 + 2 x 8.94 = 57.88 mm.
137
3. Spring index = _________________
Answer: a
Explanation: Spring index is the ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire. Pitch to
circumference ration is helix angle. In mechanical components usually have some standard
in sizes and shapes etc. for which they should maintain some ratio among particular things
to indicate some of various sized similar components.
4. Mean diameter of coil is given as 100 mm and diameter of wire is 5 mm.

Spring index is________
a) 40
b) 30
c) 25
d) 20
Answer: d
Explanation: Spring index is the ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire. Spring
index = 100mm / 5 mm =20. Spring index does not have units since it is ration of similar
units.
5. Spring index is given as 12.5 and diameter of wire given is 5 mm. Mean
diameter of coil is _______
a) 60 mm
b) 62.5 mm
c) 6 cm
d) 56.2 mm
Answer:
Explanation: Spring index is the ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire. 12.5 =
mean diameter of coil / 5mm, mean diameter of coil = 12.5 x 5 mm = 62.5 mm. We need to
use same units while substituting in formulae.
138
6. Spring index is given as 15 and mean diameter of coil is 90 mm. Diameter of
wire is __________
a) 6 mm
b) 5 mm
c) 7 mm
d) 8 mm
Answer: a
Explanation: The ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire gives spring index. 90
mm / diameter of wire = 15, diameter of wire = 90 mm / 15 = 6 mm. This spring index
sometimes gives the strength to spring and used in calculating stress through it.
7. Mean diameter of coil is 170 mm and spring index is 17. Diameter of wire is
_________
a) 1 cm
b) 5 mm
c) 153 mm
d) 1.5 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: The ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire gives spring index. 170
mm / diameter of wire = 17, diameter of wire = 170 mm / 17 = 10 mm= 1 cm.
8. Diameter of wire is 7.5 mm and spring index is 15. Outer diameter of the coil is
___________
a) 112.5 mm
b) 120 mm
c) 1.2 cm
d) 20 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire gives spring index.
Mean diameter is average of outer and inner diameter of coil in other words outer diameter
= diameter of wire +mean diameter or inner diameter = mean diameter – diameter of wire.
Mean diameter = 7.5 x 15 = 112.5 mm. Outer diameter = 112.5 mm + 7.5 mm = 120 mm.
9. Mean diameter of coil is 100 mm and inner diameter is 95 mm, spring index is
__________
a) 10
b) 5
c) 12
139
d) 15
Answer: a
Explanation: Spring index is the ratio of mean diameter of coil to diameter of wire. Outer
diameter = inner diameter + 2 x diameter of wire. So here diameter of wire is 10 mm.
Spring index = 100mm/10mm = 10.
10. Outer diameter is 95 mm and inner diameter is 88 mm. Mean diameter is

________
a) 90 mm
b) 91.5 mm
c) 95.1 mm
d) 88 mm
Answer: b
Explanation: Mean diameter is average of outer and inner diameter of spring. Difference
between the outer and inner diameter gives diameter of wire and ratio of mean diameter to
diameter of wire gives spring index.
11. Inner diameter of the coil is 70 mm and diameter of wire is 8 mm, spring
index is ________
a) 9.25
b) 8.75
c) 9.75
d) 7.8
Answer: c
Explanation: Outer diameter = inner diameter + 2 x diameter of wire, outer diameter = 70
+2 x 8 = 86 mm. Spring index = mean diameter of coil / diameter of wire. Spring index =
((86+70)/2)/8 = 9.75.
12. Spring index is 10 and diameter of wire is 10 mm. Outer diameter of coil is
__________
a) 100 mm
b) 90 mm
c) 110 mm
d) 120 mm
Answer: c
Explanation: Spring index = mean diameter of coil / diameter of wire, 10 = mean diameter
/10 mm, mean diameter = 10 x 10 mm = 100 mm. Outer diameter = mean diameter +
diameter of wire, Outer diameter = 100 mm+ 10 mm = 110 mm.
140
Construction of Screw Threads
1. For a Double-threaded screw, Pitch of the helix = lead = ______ the pitch of
the screw.
a) Four times
b) Thrice
c) Twice
d) One time
Answer: c
Explanation: In double-threaded screws, two threads of the same size run parallel to each
other. The axial advance per revolution namely the lead is made twice the lead of the
single-threaded screw, the pitch of the thread being kept the same in both cases.
2. When a double –threaded screw is made to turn 120 degrees about axis. How
much the screw advances through axis?
a) 1⁄3 of pitch of helix
b) 1⁄3 of pitch of screw
c) 1⁄4 of pitch of helix
d) The advancement is equal to pitch of helix.
Answer: a
Explanation: For a Double-threaded screw, Pitch of the helix = lead = Twice the pitch of the
screw. 120 is 1⁄3 part of 360 (complete rotation). So the lead advances to 1⁄3 of pitch of helix
and 2⁄3 of pitch of screw.
3. A triple-threaded screw advances ________ times of its pitch of screw for one
complete rotation.
a) 6
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: c
Explanation: In a Double-threaded screw, Pitch of the helix = lead = Twice the pitch of the
screw, similarly in a triple-threaded screw, pitch of the helix = lead = Thrice the pitch of the
screw and so on.
4. A multiple-threaded screw is designed in such a way for one complete rotation

of screw advances to a distance of 5 times the pitch of the screw. If need to
make the lead only up to 3 times of the pitch of screw then how much angle
141
should we rotate the screw?
a) 214 degrees
b) 216 degrees
c) 120 degrees
d) 72 degrees
Answer: b
Explanation: Given that for one complete rotation the screw advances to a distance of 5
times the pitch of screw but we need only 3 times the pitch of screw. Total rotation is 360
degrees. 360 x 3/5 = 216 degrees.
5. A double –threaded screw has pitch of screw 2 mm. How much the screw
advances if it is made 3 revolutions?
a) 5
b) 6
c) 12
d) 10
Answer: c
Explanation: It is given the screw is double- threaded screw which advances to a distance
of 2 times the pitch of screw for one complete turn also given pitch of 2 mm. so for one turn
the screw advances to 2 x 2mm = 4 mm. The screw is made to turn 3 revolutions so the
screw advances to 3 x 4 mm =12 mm.
6. A triple –threaded screw is made 4 revolutions. What is the pitch of screw if

the screw advances to 6 cm?
a) 24 mm
b) 5 mm
c) 1 cm
d) 5 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The screw advances to 6 cm = 60 mm if 4 revolutions are made that is it will
advances 60/4 = 15 mm if one revolution is made. 15 mm is the pitch of helix. Given the
screw is triple –threaded so pitch of screw is 15/ 3 = 5 mm.
7. A double–threaded screw is made _____ revolutions. The pitch of screw is 6

mm and the screw advanced to 6 cm.
a) 6
b) 5
c) 7
142
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: Pitch of the screw is 6 mm given screw is double-threaded so for one
revolution the screw advances to 6 mm x 2 = 12 mm. But the screw advanced to 6 cm = 60
mm. Number of revolutions = total screw advancement/ screw advancement for single
revolution = 60 /12 = 5.
8. A multiple-threaded screw has pitch of screw 4mm and if the screw is made to
5 revolutions the screw will advances to 40 mm. What type of screw is it?
a) Single-threaded screw
b) Double threaded screw
c) Triple-threaded screw
d) Four –threaded screw
Answer: b
Explanation: 5 revolutions = 40 mm, 1 revolution = 40mm/5 = 8 mm. Given pitch of screw
is 4 mm that is pitch of helix is equal to two times of pitch of screw. So the screw used here
is double-threaded screw.
9. For a triple threaded screw the pitch of screw is 5 mm. The lead (pitch of helix)
is______
a) 15
b) 8
c) 10
d) 30
Answer: a
Explanation: In a Double-threaded screw, Pitch of the helix = lead = Twice the pitch of the
screw, similarly in a triple-threaded screw, pitch of the helix = lead = Thrice the pitch of the
screw and so on. Lead = 3 x 5 mm = 15 mm.
10. The double-threaded screw is made to rotate one complete rotation the
screw advanced to 10 mm. Lead (pitch of helix) is given as 10 mm. The pitch of
screw is ____
a) 10 mm
b) 5 mm
c) 1 mm
d) 12 mm
Answer: b
Explanation: In a double –threaded screw, the lead = the pitch of helix = 2 times of pitch of
143
screw. The pitch of screw = 10mm / 2 =5 mm. Even if the single- threaded screw is
changed to double threaded screw the cross-section of thread and pitch of screw won’t
change.
11. The double- threaded screw is made to rotate 2 revolutions for this the screw
advances to 40 mm. What is the pitch of helix?
a) 40 mm
b) 10 mm
c) 20 mm
d) 22 mm
Answer: c
Explanation: 2 revolutions = 40 mm so 1 revolution = 40 mm/ 2 = 20 mm. In any type of
screw the advancement of screw for one revolution is equal to pitch of helix. So here also
the pitch of helix is 20 mm.
12. The triple- threaded screw is made to rotate 10 revolutions for this the screw
advances to 90 mm. What is the pitch of screw?
a) 4.5 mm
b) 9 mm
c) 1 mm
d) 3 mm
Answer: d
Explanation: 90 mm advance = 10 revolutions, 1 revolution = 9 mm advancement. Since it
is triple threaded it advances to 3 times of pitch of screw. Therefore the pitch of screw is
9mm /3 = 3 mm.
Helix upon a Cone

1. In a regular cone the angle between base and slanting surface is 45 degrees
and the base diameter is 100 mm. If a helix is to be build on such a cone with a
pitch of 5. How many revolutions do the helix made in this cone?
a) 14.1
b) 18
c) 10
d) 20
Answer: c
Explanation: Given angle between base and slanting surface is 45 and diameter of base is
144
100 mm height of cone is 100/2 x tan (45) =50. Pitch of helix is 5. Number of revolutions =
total length of helix/ pitch of helix = 50/5 = 10.
2. In a regular cone the angle between base and slanting surface is 60 degrees
and the base diameter is 75 mm. If a helix is to be build on such a cone up to half
of cones height with 6 revolutions in it. Pitch of the helix is?
a) 10.8
b) 5.4
c) 6.4
d) 12.9
Answer: b
Explanation: Height of cone = diameter/2 x tan (angle) = 75/2 x tan (60) = 129.9mm/2=
64.95 mm. Half height is 32.475 mm. Helix made 6 revolution is this height so one
revolution height is 32.475/6 = 5.4 mm which is the pitch of helix.
3. A conical spring is to be designed with base diameter 100 mm and other end
diameter 50 mm and pitch of spring is 5 mm to a height of 80 mm. How many
revolutions are there in spring?
a) 15
b) 16
c) 17
d) 18
Answer: b
Explanation: Whatever the end diameters of a conical spring the number of revolutions
depends on the pitch and height of the spring. Number of revolutions = length of
spring/pitch of helix = 80 mm/5 mm = 16.
4. Pitch of helix is 7 mm and number of revolutions is 15. Length of spring is?

a) 100 mm
b) 10.5 cm
c) 110 mm
d) 12 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Length of spring = pitch of helix x number of revolutions, 7 mm x 15 = 0.7 cm
x 15 = 10.5 cm = 105 mm. Length also includes diameter of wire but here it is not
mentioned and also not given the diameter of wire.
145
5. Base diameter of conical helix is 80 mm, height of spring is 30 mm, angle
between the base and slanting side of cone is 45 degrees and diameter of wire is
4 mm. What is the outer diameter at top edge of spring?
a) 14
b) 24
c) 32
d) 18
Answer: c
Explanation: Since the given angle is 45 degrees the max height of helix is equal to radius
of base. Height given is 30 mm due to wire diameter the total helix height will be 26. 40 -26
=14 will be the radius of top end helix and due to diameter of wire the outer diameter of top
end is 14 x 2 + 4= 32 mm.
6. Mean diameter of conical spring is 100 mm, height of spring is 50 mm, angle
5 mm. What is the inner diameter at top edge of spring?
a) 10
b) 5
c) 20
d) 15
Answer: c
Explanation: Since the given angle is 45 degrees the max height of spring is equal to
radius of base. Height given is 50 mm. Due to diameter of wire height of helix is 45 mm.
50-45 =5 will be the radius of top end helix and due to diameter of wire the inner diameter
of top end is 5 x 2 -5= 5 mm.
7. Conical spring is also called tapered spring.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Yes, conical spring is also called tapered spring since the diameter
throughout the spring varies that is increases or decreases from one to other. Conical
springs are better than cylindrical springs since conical springs can resist buckling effect.
8. The base diameter of a conical helix is 120 mm and other end diameter is 70
mm. The height of helix is 40 mm. What is the angle between the base and
slanting side is?
a) 58 degrees
146
b) 60 degrees
c) 30 degrees
d) 45 degrees
Answer: a
Explanation: Base radius= 60 mm. Other end radius = 35 mm. 60 mm– 35mm = 25 mm.
height is 40 mm. tan (angle) = height/ base radius = 40 mm/25 mm = 1.6. Angle = tan-
1(1.6) = 57.99 degrees approximately equals to 58 degrees.
9. The base diameter of a conical helix is 100 mm. The angle between the base
and slanting side is 45 degrees. Pitch of helix is 5 mm. What is the height of helix
and number of revolutions?
a) 50 mm, 10
b) 25 mm, 5
c) 30 mm, 7
d) 100 mm, 15
Answer: a
Explanation: Base radius = 50 mm. Angle given is 45 degrees. Tan (angle) = height/ base,
tan (45) = height/ 50, height = 50 x tan (45) = 50 mm, so at height of 50 mm the helix end.
Number of revolutions = height/ pitch = 50 mm/ 5 mm = 10.
10. The base diameter of a conical helix is 100 mm and other end diameter is 80
mm. The height of helix is 50 mm. What is the angle between the base and
slanting side is?
a) 58 degrees
b) 79 degrees
c) 89 degrees
d) 45 degrees
Answer: a
Explanation: Base radius= 50 mm. Other end radius = 40 mm. 50 mm– 40mm = 10 mm.
height is 50 mm. tan (angle) = height/ base radius = 50 mm/10 mm = 5. Angle = tan-1(5) =
78.69 degrees approximately equals to 79 degrees.
11. The base diameter of a conical helix is 80 mm. The angle between the base
and slanting side is 60 degrees. Pitch of helix is 6 mm. What is the height of helix
and number of revolutions?
a) 69.2 mm, 12
b) 39.2 mm, 6
c) 30 mm, 7
147
d) 80 mm, 12
Answer: a
Explanation: Base radius = 40 mm. Angle given is 60 degrees. Tan (angle) = height/ base,
tan (60) = height/ 40, height = 40 x tan (60) = 69.2 mm, so at height of 69.2 mm the helix
end. Number of revolutions = height/ pitch = 69.2 mm/ 6 mm = 11.5 approximately 12.
12. Base diameter of conical helix is 60 mm, height of spring is 30 mm, angle
3 mm. What is the outer diameter at top edge of spring?
a) 14
b) 15
c) 30
d) 18
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the given angle is 45 degrees the max height of helix is equal to radius
of base. Height given is 30 mm due to wire diameter the total helix height will be 26. 30 -26
=4 will be the radius of top end helix and due to diameter of wire the outer diameter of top
end is 4 x 2 + 3= 15 mm.
13. Base diameter of conical helix is 50 mm, height of helix is 30 mm, angle
between the base and slanting side of cone is 60 degrees. What is the top end
diameter of the helix?
a) 7.67 mm
b) 15.3 mm
c) 14.7 mm
d) 6.7 mm
Answer: b
Explanation: Base radius = 25 mm. 30/tan (60) = difference between the base radius and
top end radius = 17.3 mm. 25 mm- 17.3 mm = 7.67 mm (radius of top end radius).
Diameter is 15.3 mm.
Cam
1. The shape of the cam to transmit uniform linear motion is determined by the
application of the principle of ___________________
a) Logarithmic spiral
b) Archimedean spiral
148
c) Equitorial spiral
d) Fibonacci spiral
Answer: b
Explanation: Archimedean curve is traced out by a point moving in such a way that its
movement towards or away from the pole is uniform such that the angle and distance
follows the linear function from the starting line. This is used in teeth profiles of helical
gears and cam profiles etc.
2. Cam converts ____________ to ___________

a) force, energy
b) rotary motion, linear motion
c) kinetic energy, potential energy
d) potential energy, kinetic energy
Answer: b
Explanation: Spring stores the forces in form of potential energy but cam is just a machine
member which is designed as shaft or plate etc. as for required movement follower either
uniform or variable, depending up on the shape of cam profile.
3. What is the following term not related to cam?

a) Base circle
b) Rise, fall
c) Dwell period
d) Pitch
Answer: d
Explanation: Base circle is the minimum rise contour that follower can make from cam
profile. Rise and fall are the movement of follower as per profile of cam. Dwell period is that
during which the follower will not rise or fall from its position. Pitch is related to helix.
4. A cam profile is drawn which gives a uniform rise and fall of 40 mm to a point
during each revolution of cam. The follower will rise to a distance of 20 mm if the
shaft is rotated to an angle of _____
a) 180 degrees
b) 90 degrees
c) 120 degrees
d) 150 degrees
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a cam profile is made throughout without any dwell and also with
149
continuous rise- fall period. So 180 = maximum rise. And since the given profile is uniform
it follows the linear function. 40 is for 180 and 20 is for 90 degrees.
5. A cam profile is drawn which gives a uniform rise and fall of 60 mm to a point
during each revolution of cam. The follower will rise to a distance of ____ mm if
the shaft is rotated to an angle of 180 degrees.
a) 20
b) 40
c) 30
d) 60
Answer: d
continuous rise- fall period. So 180 = maximum rise = 60 mm and further the follower fall
uniformly while shaft rotating from 180 degree position to 360 degree position.
6. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall throughout the cam
without any dwell period and rise and fall periods should be same. The follower is
making a rise of 40 mm when the shaft is rotated to an angle of 150 degrees.
What is the maximum rise in follower?
a) 48
b) 57.5
c) 62.5
d) 50
Answer: a
continuous rise- fall period. So 180 = maximum rise, since uniform the rise or fall follows
linear function. (40/150) x 180 = 48 mm.
7. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall throughout the cam,
without any dwell period and rise and fall periods should be same. The maximum
rise in follower is 50 mm. How much the follower will rise when the shaft is
rotated to an angle of 120 degrees?
a) 25 mm
b) 43.3 mm
c) 33.3 mm
d) 30 mm
Answer: c
150
continuous rise- fall period. So at 180 degrees there will be maximum rise. Since it is
uniform rise-fall it follows linear function. 50/180 x 120 = 33.3 mm.
8. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall within half of cam,
the remaining is dwell period, and without any dwell period in between the rise -
fall periods and rise and fall periods should be same. The maximum rise in
follower is 30 mm. How much the follower will rise when the follower is 120
degrees from its initial position of cam?
a) 30
b) 20
c) 15
d) 10
Answer: d
Explanation: According to the given conditions there is only movement in follower up to 180
degrees of shaft rotation and between it at the middle the follower make maximum rise that
is at 90 degrees. 120 – 90 = 30 degrees. For 90 degrees it is 30 mm so for 30 degrees it
will be 10 mm when the follower is 120 degrees from its initial position of cam.
9. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall within half of cam,
the remaining is dwell period, and without any dwell period in between the rise-
fall periods and rise and fall periods should be same. The maximum rise in
follower is 45 mm. How much the follower will rise when the follower is 45
a) 22.5
b) 0
c) 30
d) 15
Answer: a
is at 90 degrees. 90- 45 = 45 degrees. For 90 degrees it is 45 mm so for 45 degrees it will
be 45/2 = 22.5 mm when the follower is 45 degrees from its initial position of cam.
10. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall within second half
of cam profile, the first half is dwell period, without any dwell period in between
the rise and fall periods and rise and fall periods should be same. The maximum
rise in follower is 45 mm. How much the follower will rise when the follower is 120
151
a) 15
b) 30
c) 20
d) 0
Answer: d
Explanation: According to the given conditions there is only movement in follower from 180
degrees to 360 degrees of shaft rotation and between it, at the middle of rise-fall period the
follower make maximum rise that is at 270 degrees. So the follower will not move since
there is no rise or fall at angle 120 in cam designed.
11. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall within second half
of cam profile, the first half is dwell period, without any dwell period in between
the rise and fall periods and rise and fall periods should be same. The maximum
rise in follower is 55 mm. How much the follower will rise when the follower is 240
a) 18.3
b) 0
c) 27.5
d) 36.6
Answer: a
Explanation: According to the given conditions there is only movement in follower from 180
degrees to 360 degrees of shaft rotation and between it, at the middle of rise-fall period the
follower make maximum rise that is at 270 degrees. And this follows the linear function.
360- 180 = 180, 360- 270 = 90, 360-240= 120 degrees. For 90 degrees from 180 degree
position it is 55 mm so for other 30 degrees it will be 55 x 1/3 = 18.3 mm when the follower
is 240 degrees from its initial position of cam.
12. A cam should be designed only using uniform rise and fall within first half of
cam profile, the remaining is dwell period, and without any dwell period in
between the rise-fall periods and rise and fall periods should be same. The
maximum rise in follower is 35 mm. How much the follower will rise when the
follower is 240 degrees from its initial position of cam?
a) 17.5
b) 11.6
c) 0
d) 23.3
Answer: c
152
is at 90 degrees. So there will be no rise in the follower in the second half of cam profile.
13. The cam profile draw for knife edge follower and roller follower will be
different.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Whatever the follower will be the cam profile is drawn only considering the
rise, fall, dwell periods and what is function needed. But the terminology of circles that exist
in cam profile changes a little bit.
Loci of Points by Different Methods

1. The locus of a point P about another point O such that its distance from O is
constant is ________
a) a line passing through O
b) two parallel lines equidistant from O
c) a circle with center O
d) a curve with O in it
Answer: c
Explanation: Since in the circle the distance from any point P on it to centre O is equal
which is called radius of that circle. The compass is built based on this locus concept in
drawing circles.
2. The locus of a point P such that its distance from a fixed line AB is constant
is____________
a) a circle with AB as largest chord (diameter)
b) a line perpendicular to AB passing through midpoint of AB
c) a line parallel to AB
d) a line perpendicular to AB cutting AB at centre
Answer: c
Explanation: There is no other chance of locating point P whose distance from a fixed line
is constant other than a line parallel to given line and passing through point P and this help
in drawing parallel lines.
153
3. Locus of a point P equidistant from two fixed points A and B is ____________
a) an ellipse
b) a line perpendicular to AB passing through midpoint of AB
c) a circle with AB as largest chord
d) a parallel line of AB
Answer: b
Explanation: The line which makes equal distance from the two fixed points will definitely
pass through the midpoint of line joining the two points and will definitely perpendicular to
the line formed by joining the two points.
4. The locus of point which is equidistant from 2 non parallel lines is

___________
a) a straight line bisecting the angle between them
b) a line which cuts both lines at same distances from point of intersection of
given lines
c) a closed curve around them
d) a line perpendicular to 1st line
Answer: a
Explanation: The line obtained is the angular bisector of the two lines given so carries
points which are equidistant from the both the lines, if the lines are perpendicular to each
other the line makes 45 degrees with both the line, if the lines are parallel then locus would
be parallel line to both and will in between them making same distance from both the lines.
5. Locus of a point P equidistant from a fixed line and fixed point F is

_____________
a) a circle with centre F
b) a ellipse with foci P and F
c) a parabola
d) a hyperbola
Answer: c
Explanation: The point T given here is otherwise known as focus in parabola and also the
ratio to perpendicular distance from the fixed line to distance from P to T is called
eccentricity which is equal to 1 for parabola.
6. Locus of the point P such that the sum of distances from two fixed points is
always constant is __________
a) a ellipse
b) a hyperbola
154
c) a parabola having those fixed point on its axis
d) a line perpendicular to line joining those two points and passing through the
midpoint of it
Answer: a
Explanation: The two points given are foci of ellipse. Ellipse is a curve whose eccentricity is
less than one. The process given is one of the methods to draw ellipse in easy way. Since
the sum of distances from two fixed points to point P on curve is always constant.
7. A sliding member AB has attached to a rocker BC, this BC is attached to crank

CD. D is fixed end and as crank is rotating about D the slider slides parallel to it.
What is the locus of point P on any point on rocker?
a) Ellipse
b) Circle
c) Line
d) Semi-circle
Answer: a
Explanation: The whole mechanism given here is slider crank mechanism. The C traces
the path of circle. But as the rocker has ends in which one is sliding and other is making
circle the point on such a member will always trace the path ellipse.
8. A sliding member AB has attached to a rocker BC, this BC is attached to crank

CD. D is fixed end and as crank is rotating about D the slider slides parallel to it.
What is the locus of C?
a) Ellipse
b) Circle
c) Line
d) Semi-circle
Answer: b
Explanation: The whole mechanism given here is slider crank mechanism. The asked point
C which is at end of crank always rotates around the D and the member length will not
change so the curve traced by that point is circle.
9. Locus of the point P which is rotating about another point O with uniform
angular velocity and the PO is increasing at constant rate is ________
a) an ellipse
b) archimedean spiral
c) helix
d) logarithmic spiral
155
Answer: b
Explanation: It is a curve traced out by a point moving in such a way that it’s movement
towards or away from the pole is uniform with the increase of vectorial angle from the
starting line. These types of curves are used in drawing profiles of cam.
10. The locus of point P whose perpendicular distance from a fixed line and
distance from a point T is equal is _______________
a) a circle
b) an ellipse
c) a parabola
d) a hyperbola
Answer: c
Explanation: The point T given here is otherwise known as focus in parabola and also the
ratio to perpendicular distance from the fixed line to distance from P to T is called
eccentricity which is equal to 1 for parabola.
11. The locus of point P moving such that the ratio of the lengths of consecutive
distances from point O enclosing equal angles is always constant
is_________________
a) archimedean spiral
b) logarithmic spiral
c) a parabola
d) a circle
Answer: b
Explanation: The distance from the P to O that is pole is called radius vector. The values of
vectorial angles are in arithmetic progression and the corresponding values of radius
vectors are in geometrical progression.
Basics of Orthographic Projections

1. The straight lines which are drawn from various points on the contour of an
object to meet a plane are called as _________
a) connecting lines
b) projectors
c) perpendicular lines
d) hidden lines.
Answer: b
156
Explanation: The object will generally kept at a distance from planes so to represent the
shape in that view projectors are drawn perpendicular to plane in orthographic projection.
Projectors are simply called lines of sights when an observer looks towards an object from
infinity.
2. When the projectors are parallel to each other and also perpendicular to the
plane, the projection is called ___________________________
a) Perspective projection
b) Oblique projection
c) Isometric projection
d) Orthographic projection
Answer: d
Explanation: In orthographic projection the projectors are parallel to each other and also
perpendicular to the plane but in oblique projection the projectors are inclined to the plane
of projection and projectors are parallel to each other.
3. In the Oblique projection an object is represented by how many views?

a) one view
b) two views
c) three views
d) four views
Answer: a
Explanation: Oblique projection is one method of pictorial projection. Oblique projection
shows three dimensional objects on the projection plane in one view only. This type of
drawing is useful for making an assembly of an object and provides directly a production
drawing.
4. The object we see in our surrounding usually without drawing came under
which projection?
a) Perspective projection
b) Oblique projection
c) Isometric projection
d) Orthographic projection
Answer: a
Explanation: Perspective projection gives the view of an object on a plane surface, called
the picture plane, as it would appear to the eye, when viewed from a fixed position. It may
also be defined as the figure formed on the projection plane when visual rays from the eye
to the object cut the plane.
157
5. In orthographic projection each projection view represents how many
dimensions of an object?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
Answer: b
Explanation: In orthographic projection and oblique projection the projection planes which
represent one view of an object only shows width, height; width, thickness; height,
thickness only but in isometric and perspective projections width, height and thickness can
also be viewed.
6. In orthographic projection an object is represented by two or three views on

different planes which _________________
a) gives views from different angles from different directions
b) are mutually perpendicular projection planes
c) are parallel along one direction but at different cross-section
d) are obtained by taking prints from 2 or 3 sides of object
Answer: b
Explanation: By viewing in mutual perpendicular planes- Vertical plane, horizontal plane,
profile plane which indirectly gives us front view in x-direction, top-view in y –direction and
thickness in z-direction which are mutually perpendicular. Ortho means perpendicular.
7. To represent the object on paper by orthographic projection the horizontal

plane (H.P) should be placed in which way?
a) The H.P is turned in clockwise direction up to 90 degrees
b) The H.P is turned in anti-clockwise direction up to 90 degrees
c) H.P plane is placed to left side of vertical plane parallel to it
d) H.P plane is placed to right side of vertical plane parallel to it
Answer: a
Explanation: The vertical plane and horizontal plane are perpendicular planes intersected
at reference line. So on paper to represent perpendicular planes any of the planes should
arrange to get real picture of required projection.
8. The hidden parts inside or back side of object while represented in

orthographic projection are represented by which line?
a) Continuous thick line
b) Continuous thin line
158
c) Dashed thin line
d) Long-break line
Answer: c
Explanation: Continuous thick line is used for visible outlines, visible edges, crests of screw
threads, limits of full depth thread etc. Continuous thin line is used for extension, projection,
short centre, leader, reference lines, imaginary lines of intersection etc.
9. Orthographic projection is the representation of two or more views on the

mutual perpendicular projection planes.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Orthographic projection is the representation of two or more views on the
mutual perpendicular projection planes. But for oblique projection the object is viewed in
only one view. And in isometric view the object is kept resting on the ground on one of its
corners with a solid diagonal perpendicular to the V.P.
10. In perspective projection and oblique projection the projectors are not parallel
to each other.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In Oblique projection the projectors are parallel to each other but inclined to
projection plane but in perspective projection all the projectors are not parallel to each
other and so to projection plane.
11. What is additional 3rd view on orthographic projection in general for simple
objects?
a) Front view
b) Top view
c) Side view
d) View at 45 degrees perpendicular to horizontal plane
Answer: c
Explanation: In general for simple objects engineers use only front view and top view or
else front view and side view or else top view and side view. If every view is visualized side
view gives height and thickness of object.
159
12. The front view of an object is shown on which plane?
a) Profile plane
b) Vertical plane
c) Horizontal plane
d) Parallel plane
Answer: b
Explanation: The front view will be represented on vertical plane, top view will be
represented on horizontal plane and side view will be shown on profile plane. The front
view shows height and width of object.
13. The Top view of an object is shown on which plane?

a) Profile plane
b) Vertical plane
c) Horizontal plane
d) Parallel plane
Answer: c
Explanation: The front view will be shown on vertical plane, top view will be represents on
horizontal plane and side view will be represents on profile plane. The top view gives
thickness and width of the object.
14. The side view of an object is shown on which plane?

a) Profile plane
b) Vertical plane
c) Horizontal plane
d) Parallel plane
Answer: a
Explanation: The front view will be represents on vertical plane, top view will be shown on
horizontal plane and side view will be represents on profile plane. The side view gives
height and thickness of object.
Planes of Projections and Four Quadrants

1. The 2nd quadrant is in which position?
a) Below H.P, behind V.P
b) Above H.P, behind V.P
c) Above H.P, in-front of V.P
d) Below H.P, in-front of V.P
160
Answer: b
Explanation: The position of reference planes will be similar to quadrants in x, y plane co-
ordinate system. As the 2nd quadrant lies above the x-axis and behind the y-axis here also
the 2nd quadrant is above H.P, behind V.P.
2. The 3rd quadrant is in which position?

Answer: a
ordinate system. As the 3rd quadrant lies below the x-axis and behind the y-axis here also
the 3rd quadrant is below H.P, behind V.P.
3. The 4th quadrant is in which position?

Answer: d
ordinate system. As the 4th quadrant lies below the x-axis and in front of the y-axis here
also the 4th quadrant is below H.P, in front of V.P.
4. The 1st quadrant is in which position?

Answer: c
ordinate system. As the 1st quadrant lies above the x-axis and in front of the y-axis here
also the 1st quadrant is above H.P, in front of V.P.
5. The position of the views with respect to the reference line will not change
according to the quadrant in which the object may be situated.
a) True
161
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The position of the views with respect to the reference line will change
according to the quadrant in which the object may be situated because the representation
of views will on 2 dimensional sheet for that the planes has to rotate and with respective to
reference line and this will be different for different quadrant.
6. The first and the third quadrants are always opened out while rotating the
planes.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: According to the standards it is made that the planes rotate in clockwise
direction while drawing the orthographic projections of objects on the different quadrant. So
as the horizontal rotates 90 degrees in clockwise with respect to reference line the views in
2nd and 4th quadrants overlap but in 1st and 3rd the views will not coincide so they are
said to be opened.
7. An object is kept in one of the quadrants of principal planes of projection, for

both the front view and top view of the object, the view came first and then the
object (the observer is at top right side of principal planes). The object is in which
quadrant?
a) 1st quadrant
b) 2nd quadrant
c) 3rd quadrant
d) 4th quadrant
Answer: c
Explanation: If we imagine the principal planes and the observer at top right side of those
planes we can clearly watch the positions of object with respect to their view. Here the
object is in 3rd quadrant so view will come first.

both the front view and top view of the object the object came first and then the
views on planes (the observer is at top right side of principal planes). The object
is in which quadrant?
a) 1st quadrant
b) 2nd quadrant
c) 3rd quadrant
162
d) 4th quadrant
Answer: a
object is in 1st quadrant so object will come first in both the views.

the front view the view is first and object is next and for top view the object came
first and then the view on plane (the observer is at top right side of principal
planes). The object is in which quadrant?
a) 1st quadrant
b) 2nd quadrant
c) 3rd quadrant
d) 4th quadrant
Answer: b
object is in 2nd quadrant so view will come first for front view and object will come first for
top view.
10. The line formed by intersection of principal planes is called _____________

a) projection line
b) origin line
c) line of intersection
d) reference line
Answer: d
Explanation: The line formed by intersection of principal planes or reference planes of
projection that is the vertical plane or frontal plane and horizontal plane is called reference
line which is denoted by the letters xy.
11. The vertical plane is also called _____________

a) straight plane
b) perpendicular plane
c) frontal plane
d) pole plane
Answer: c
Explanation: Vertical plane will be vertical to ground and perpendicular with horizontal
plane. As the observer will always be at right-top side of planes of projections the front
163
view will always be placed on vertical plane only so the vertical plane is also called frontal
plane.
12. The negative horizontal plane and positive horizontal makes _____ angle
with each other.
a) 90 degrees
b) 180 degrees
c) 120 degrees
d) 270 degrees
Answer: b
Explanation: The negative horizontal plane means the part of horizontal plane which lies in
2nd quadrant. The positive and negative planes are parallel to each other so the angle
between the parallel planes is always 180 degrees.
13. The positive vertical plane and positive horizontal plane makes _______
angle with each other in anti clockwise direction.
a) 180 degrees
b) 270 degrees
c) 0 degrees
d) 90 degrees
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the direction is anti-clockwise direction so the angle in 270 degrees if it
is given clockwise direction the angle should be 90 degrees since the given planes are
consecutive planes in planes of projection.
First Angle Projection Method

1. In 1st angle projection the object is kept in _________
a) 1st quadrant
b) 2nd quadrant
c) 3rd quadrant
d) 4th quadrant
Answer: a
Explanation: We can keep object in any quadrant of projection planes but every time we
keep in different quadrants gives different relative positions in projections. Here 1st angle
represents the initial stage in forming projection of planes so 1st quadrant represents 1st
angle projection.
164
2. 1st angle projection is recommended by _____________
a) USA
b) ISI
c) Bureau of Indian Standards
d) ASME
Answer: c
Explanation: First angle projection is recommended by Bureau of Indian Standards but
USA and other countries recommend third angle projection. The changes in both the
projections are relative positions in projection.
3. In 1st angle projection the _________ lies between ___________ and

____________
a) object, projection plane, observer
b) projection plane, object, observer
c) reference line, side view, front view
d) reference line, left side view, right side view
Answer: a
Explanation: The observer is always at the right side top end. So as the observer watches
the object comes first and then the projection plane as the object in the 1st quadrant in 1st
angle projection. So object lies between projection plane and observer.
4. In 1st angle projection the front view will be below the top view.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: As the object is in first quadrant and the front view projects on vertical plane
and top view projects on horizontal plane. And for representing the projection the horizontal
plane has to turn 90 degrees in clockwise direction. The top view will be below the front
view.
5. In 1st angle projection the positions of front and top views are __________
a) top view lies above the front view
b) front view lies above the top view
c) front view lie left side to top view
d) top view lie left side to front view
Answer: b
Explanation: As the object is in first quadrant and the front view projects on vertical plane
165
plane has to turn 90 degrees in clockwise direction.
6. In 1st angle projection the left side view will be left side of front view.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In first angle projection the object’s left side will be projected only if we watch
from left side of object and the impression will fall to the right side of front view similar to
the other side also so the left side view is placed on the right side of front view.
7. The positions of right side view and front view of an object kept in 1st quadrant
and projection are drawn?
a) Right side view is right side of front view
b) Right side view is left side of front view
c) Right side view is above the front view
d) Right side view is below the front view
Answer: b
Explanation: In first angle projection the object’s right side will be projected only if we watch
from right side of object and the impression will fall to the left side of front view similar to
the other side also so the right side view is placed on the left side of front view.
8. The positions of reference line and top view in 1st angle projection are
__________
a) reference line lies above the top view
b) reference line lies below the top view
c) reference line lie left side to top view
d) reference line lie right side to top view
Answer: a
Explanation: Reference line will be the xy line which is formed by intersection of vertical
plane and horizontal plane. In the first angle projection the projections of object is taken by
placing object in 1st quadrant and top view is projected on to horizontal plane which is after
the reference line.
9. If an object is placed in 1st quadrant such that one of the surfaces of object is
coinciding with vertical plane, what is the correct position of views from the
following?
a) The front view touches the reference line
166
b) The side view touches the reference line
c) The top view touches the reference line
d) The bottom view touches the reference line
Answer: c
Explanation: In the first angle projection the projections of object is taken by placing object
in 1st quadrant. If the object’s surface is coinciding the vertical plane which indirectly
saying the distance from vertical plane is zero so top view of that object touches the
reference line.
coinciding with horizontal plane, what is the correct position of views from the
following?
Answer: a
Explanation: In the first angle projection the projections of object is taken by placing object
in 1st quadrant. If the object’s surface is coinciding the horizontal plane which indirectly
saying the distance from horizontal plane is zero so front view of that object touches the
reference line.
coinciding with both vertical plane and horizontal plane, what is the correct
position of views from the following?
a) The top view touches the reference line
b) The top view and side view touch each other
c) Both side views touch each other
d) The top view and front touches each other at reference line
Answer: d
Explanation: If the object is placed in 1st quadrant and the object’s surface is coinciding
with both the horizontal plane and vertical plane which indirectly saying the distance from
both the planes is zero so both top and front views of that object touches the reference
line.
12. Where is the position of bottom view in 1st angle projection?

a) left side of right hand side view
b) right side of right hand side view
167
c) above the front view
d) below the top view
Answer: c
Explanation: First angle projection means the object is placed in first quadrant and the top
view of the object is below the front view so the bottom view is above the front view. This is
obtained as the bottom view is viewed from bottom and so is projected upwards.
13. Where is the position of back view in 1st angle projection?

Answer: b
Explanation: In the first angle projection the top view of the object is below the front view
and then come the side views to the left and right of front view and then back view which
can either be kept on ends of side views but as standard notation it is placed on right side
of right side view.
Third Angle Projection Method

1. In 3rd angle projection the object is kept in _________
a) 1st quadrant
b) 2nd quadrant
c) 3rd quadrant
d) 4th quadrant
Answer: c
Explanation: We can keep object in any quadrant of projection planes but every time we
keep in different quadrants gives different relative positions in projections. Here 3rd angle
represents the initial stage in forming projection of planes so 3rd quadrant represents 3rd
angle projection.
2. 3rd angle projection is recommended by _____________

a) USA
b) ISI
c) Bureau of Indian Standards
d) IS
Answer: a
168
Explanation: Third angle projection is recommended by USA and other countries and 1st
angle projection is recommended by Bureau of Indian Standards. The changes in both the
projections are relative positions in projection.
3. In 3rd angle projection the _________ lies between ___________ and

____________
a) object, projection plane, observer
b) projection plane, object, observer
c) reference line, side view, front view
d) reference line, left side view, right side view
Answer: b
Explanation: The observer is always at the right side top end. So as the observer watches
the projection plane comes first and then the object as the object in the 3rd quadrant in 3rd
angle projection, so plane of projection lies between object and observer.
4. In 3rd angle projection the front view will be below the top view.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: As the object is in third quadrant and the front view projects on vertical plane
plane has to turn 90 degrees in clockwise direction. The top view will be above the front
view.
5. In 3rd angle projection the positions of front view and top views are?
a) Top view lies above the front view
b) Front view lies above the top view
c) Front view lie left side to top view
d) Top view lie left side to front view
Answer: a
Explanation: As the object is in third quadrant and the front view projects on vertical plane
plane has to turn 90 degrees in clockwise direction.
6. In 3rd angle projection the left side view will be left side of front view.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
169
Explanation: In third angle projection the object’s left side will be projected only if we watch
from right side of object so impression will fall to the left side of front view since the plane
of projection is back side of object and also the right side view is placed on the right side of
front view.
7. The positions of right side view and front view of an object kept in 3rd quadrant
and projection are drawn?
a) right side view is right side of front view
b) right side view is left side of front view
c) right side view is above the front view
d) right side view is below the front view
Answer: a
Explanation: In third angle projection the object’s right side will be projected only if we
watch from left side of object and the impression will fall to the right side of front view
similar to the other side also so the left side view is placed on the left side of front view.
8. The positions of reference line and top view in 3rd angle projection are?
a) reference line lies above the top view
b) reference line lies below the top view
c) reference line lie left side to top view
d) reference line lie right side to top view
Answer: b
Explanation: Reference line will be the xy line which is formed by intersection of vertical
plane and horizontal plane. In the third angle projection the projections of object is taken by
placing object in 3rd quadrant and top view is projected on to horizontal plane which is
above the reference line.
9. If an object is placed in 3rd quadrant such that one of the surfaces of object is
coinciding with vertical plane, what is the correct position of views from the
following?
Answer: c
Explanation: In the third angle projection the projections of object is taken by placing object
in 3rd quadrant. If the object’s surface is coinciding the vertical plane which indirectly
170
saying the distance from vertical plane is zero so top view of that object touches the
reference line.
coinciding with horizontal plane, what is the correct position of views from the
following?
Answer: a
Explanation: In the third angle projection the projections of object is taken by placing object
in 3rd quadrant. If the object’s surface is coinciding the horizontal plane which indirectly
saying the distance from horizontal plane is zero so front view of that object touches the
reference line.
coinciding with both vertical plane and horizontal plane, what is the correct
position of views from the following?
a) The top view touches the reference line
b) The top view and side view touch each other
c) Both side views touch each other
d) The top view and front touches each other at reference line
Answer: d
Explanation: If the object is placed in 3rd quadrant and the object’s surface is coinciding
with both the horizontal plane and vertical plane which indirectly saying the distance from
both the planes is zero so both top and front views of that object touches the reference
line.
12. Where is the position of bottom view in 3rd angle projection?

Answer: d
Explanation: Third angle projection means the object is placed in third quadrant and the top
view of the object is above the front view so the bottom view is below the front view. This is
obtained as the top view is placed above so bottom should be placed below.
171
13. Where is the position of back view in 3rd angle projection?
Answer: b
Explanation: In the third angle projection the top view of the object is above the front view
and then come the side views to the left and right of front view and then back view which
can either be kept on ends of side views but as standard notation it is placed on right side
of right side view.
BIS Code of Practice

1. Code of Practice for General Engineering Drawing is published in ________
a) 1960
b) 1955
c) 2003
d) 1973
Answer: b
Explanation: The Indian standards Institution now Bureau of Indian Standards, in its earlier
versions of Indian standard (IS: 696) ‘Code of Practice for General Engineering Drawing’
published in 1955 and revised in 1960 had recommended the use of third –angle projection
method.
2. The second revised version of the B.I.S. published in _______

a) 1960
b) 1955
c) 2003
d) 1973
Answer: d
Explanation: In the second revised version of this standard published in December 1973,
the committee responsible for it preparation left the option of selecting first-angle or third
angle projection method to the users.
3. In which year the B.I.S. standard got revised and recommended the use of
third angle projection method?
a) 1960
172
b) 1955
c) 2003
d) 1973
Answer: a
Explanation: The Indian standards Institution now Bureau of Indian Standards, in its earlier
versions of Indian standard (IS: 696) ‘Code of Practice for General Engineering Drawing’
published in 1955 and revised in 1960 had recommended the use of third –angle projection
method.
4. The committee again reviewed the position and finally recommended revised
____________ for implementation of 1st angle projection.
a) SP: 46 -1988
b) SP: 45 -1988
c) SP: 46 – 1955
d) SP: 46 – 1960
Answer: a
Explanation: The committee again reviewed the position and finally recommended revised
SP: 46 -1988 and SP: 46 -2003 for implementation of first-angle method of projection in our
country, by replacing earlier IS: 696 drawing standard.
5. Finally the standards SP: 46- 2003 and SP: 46 – 1988 are revised and
replaced with earlier __________ drawing standards.
a) IS: 698
b) IS: 697
c) IS: 696
d) IS: 695
Answer: c
Explanation: The committee again reviewed the position and finally recommended revised
SP: 46 -1988 and SP: 46 -2003 for implementation of first-angle method of projection in our
country, by replacing earlier IS: 696 drawing standard.
6. IS 15021: Part 2: 2001 is standard for _________________________

a) axonometric representations
b) orthographic representations
c) di-metric representations
d) isometric representations
Answer: b
Explanation: IS 15021: Part 2: 2001 is standard for Orthographic representations. IS
173
11065: Part 2: 1985 is standard for Di-metric projection. IS 11065: Part 1: 1984 is standard
for Isometric projection.
7. IS 11065: Part 2: 1985 is standard for _________________________

a) di-metric projection
b) isometric projection
c) orthographic projection
d) sizes and layout of drawing sheets
Answer: a
Explanation: IS 15021: Part 2: 2001 is standard for Orthographic representations. IS
11065: Part 2: 1985 is standard for Di-metric projection. IS 11065: Part 1: 1984 is standard
for Isometric projection. IS 10711: 2001/ISO 5457: 1999 is standard for Sizes and Layout
of Drawing Sheets.
8. IS 10711: 2001/ISO 5457: 1999 is standard for______________________

a) scales for use in technical drawings
b) folding of drawing prints
c) sizes and Layout of Drawing Sheets
d) axonometric projection
Answer: c
Explanation: IS 10711: 2001/ISO 5457: 1999 is standard for Sizes and Layout of Drawing
Sheets. IS 10713: 1983/ISO 5455: 1979 is standard for Scales for use in technical
drawings. IS 11664: 1986 is standard for Folding of drawing prints.
9. IS 10713: 1983/ISO 5455: 1979 is standard for____________________

Answer: a
10. IS 11664: 1986 is standard for __________________

174
Answer: b
Problems on Orthographic Projection

1. A regular cone is rested on base on horizontal plane the front view will be
_____________
a) circle
b) scalene triangle
c) equilateral triangle
d) isosceles triangle
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the cone is regular cone that means the tip of cone will be at center if
viewed from top, so for such a cone the front view will be triangle and in particular
isosceles triangle and the top view will be circle.
2. A Cube is placed on horizontal plane such that one of the space diagonal is
perpendicular to horizontal plane the top view will be _____________
a) octagon
b) square
c) hexagon
d) rectangle
Answer: c
Explanation: A cube is a 3 dimensional object whose length, width and thickness will be
same and also given space diagonal is perpendicular to horizontal plane the top view, side
view and front view will be hexagon only.
3. A cylinder’s axis is perpendicular to profile plane the top view will be

______________
a) circle
b) cylinder
c) rectangle
d) parallelogram
Answer: c
175
Explanation: Given a cylinder whose axis is perpendicular to profile plane so the top view
and front view will be rectangle and side view will be circle. If the cylinder is slightly tilted
with respect to profile then top view and front view will be parallelogram.
4. An egg is placed vertical to horizontal plane the top view will be

______________
a) ellipse
b) circle
c) oval
d) sphere
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the egg is placed vertical to horizontal plane the front view and side
view will be same and it might be conical, oval or elliptical etc. the top view always be
circle. That’s why the egg boxes are made impression of semi spheres.
5. A Cardboard is made to cut in shape of ‘A’ and as we placed in projection

planes and from top view the legs of cardboard touch the profile plane and
cardboard is parallel to horizontal plane. Which of the following is wrong?
a) The front view gives thickness of cardboard
b) The side views give width of cardboard
c) The front view gives height of cardboard
d) The top view gives thickness of cardboard
Answer: d
Explanation: From given information we can understand that the cardboard is parallel to
horizontal plane and direction of ‘A’ placed in projection planes so the front view and side
view gives thickness, the front view and top view gives height of cardboard and side view
and top view gives width of cardboard.
6. An object is placed in between projection planes, the front view and side view
gives the same rectangle and top view is giving square the object is
________________
a) a square cylinder, such that square base is parallel to horizontal plane
b) a square cylinder, such that square base is parallel to vertical plane
c) a square cylinder, such that square base is parallel to profile plane
d) a square cylinder, such that axis is parallel to horizontal
Answer: a
Explanation: Given that the object is viewing from front and side as rectangle and top view
176
is square so we can understand that pyramid has height more than the side of square and
accordingly the view the object can be cuboid (square cylinder).
7. A plate of negligible thickness of circular shape is placed parallel to horizontal

plane the front view will be ____________
a) line
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a plate which is in circular shape given plate is parallel to horizontal
plane so the front view and side views will be line whose length is equal to diameter of
circle as the thickness is negligible the front view, side view can’t be rectangle and top view
will be circle.
8. A regular tetrahedron is placed on horizontal plane on one of its base, the front
view, top view and side view gives triangle.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: A regular tetrahedron is formed by enclosing 4 equal triangles. And given one
of the base is parallel to horizontal so in what angle the tetrahedron might be turned the
front view and side view will be triangle.
9. A regular cone is placed on horizontal plane on its base the top view is
_____________
a) circle
b) rectangle
c) square
d) triangle
Answer: a
Explanation: A regular cone generally will have base circle and constant difference in
cross-section. When a cone placed on horizontal that is base is parallel to horizontal plane
then the front view and side views will show triangle for both and top view will shows circle.
10. The views will change if we keep the object in different quadrants.
a) True
b) False
177
Answer: b
Explanation: Whenever we change the object from one quadrant to other quadrant the
relative positions of projection drawn will change accordingly but the views of the object will
not change.
11. A Square pyramid is resting on vertical plane with base parallel to vertical
plane. The side view will be _____________
a) triangle
b) polygon with 4 sides
c) square
d) polygon with 5 sides
Answer: a
Explanation: A Square pyramid have base of square which is resting on vertical plane as
said above so the side views, top view and bottom view gives the triangle and front view
and back view gives square.
12. A triangular prism is placed in projection plane such that the square surface
is parallel to horizontal plane. The top view, front view will be __________
a) square, rectangle respectively
b) rectangle, triangle respectively
c) rectangle, rectangle respectively
d) triangle, rectangle respectively
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a triangular prism is placed in projection plane such that the square
base is parallel to horizontal plane. A triangular prism is nothing but triangular cylinder as
per position given the front view and top view will be rectangle and side view will be
triangle.
13. A pentagonal prism is placed the axis is perpendicular to horizontal plane, the
top view and front view are ______________
a) pentagon, rectangle
b) rectangle, rectangle
c) pentagon, triangle
d) rectangle, triangle
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a pentagonal prism is placed in projection plane such that the axis is
perpendicular to horizontal plane. A pentagonal prism is nothing but pentagonal cylinder as
178
per position given the front view and side view will be rectangle and top view will be
pentagon.
14. A regular rhombic bi-pyramid is placed in projection planes such that one of
its longest diagonal is perpendicular to vertical plane the front view will be
____________
a) square
b) rhombus
c) triangle
d) rectangle
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a regular rhombic bi-pyramid is placed in projection planes such that
one of its longest diagonal is perpendicular to vertical plane. As per position given the front
view and side view will be rhombus and top view will be square.
15. A hexagonal nut is placed on horizontal plane such that the axis is
perpendicular to profile plane. The top view and side view will be
_______________
a) rectangle, hexagon
b) hexagon, rectangle
c) rectangle, rectangle
d) rectangle, circle
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a hexagonal nut is placed on horizontal plane such that the axis is
perpendicular to profile plane. As per position given the front view, back view, top view and
bottom view will be rectangle and side view will be hexagon.
Projection of Points in First Quadrant

1. Two points are placed in 1st quadrant of projection planes such that the line
joining the points is perpendicular to profile plane the side view and top view will
be ______________
a) single point, two points
b) two points, single point
c) single point, single point
d) two points, two points
Answer: a
179
Explanation: Here given the two points such that the joining line is perpendicular to profile
plane in 1st quadrant asked side view and top view. The views in any quadrant will remain
same but the relative positions in projection will change accordingly the quadrant.
2. A point is 5 units away from the vertical plane and 4 units away from profile
plane and 3 units away from horizontal plane in 1st quadrant then the projections
are drawn on paper the distance between the front view and top view of point is
_____________
a) 7 units
b) 8 units
c) 9 units
d) 5 units
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the point is 3 units away from the horizontal plane the distance from the
point to xy reference line will be 3 units. And then the point is at distance of 5 units from the
vertical plane the distance from reference line and point will be 5, sum is 8.
are drawn on paper the distance between the side view and front view of point is
_______________
a) 12 units
b) 6 units
c) 10 units
d) 8 units
Answer: c
Explanation: Since the point is 2 units away from the profile plane the distance from the
point to reference line will be 2 units. And then the point is at distance of 8 units from the
vertical plane the distance from reference line and point will be 8,sum is 10.
are drawn on paper the distance between the front view and side view of point is
______________
a) 10
b) 5
c) 9
d) 7
180
Answer: b
profile plane the distance from reference line and point will be 2 units, sum is 5.
______________
a) 29 units
b) 21 units
c) 32 units
d) 11 units
Answer: c
point to reference line will be 12 units. And then the point is at distance of 20 units from
are drawn on paper the shortest distance from top view and side view of point is
_____________
a) 10.29
b) 5.14
c) 9
d) 7
Answer: c
Explanation: Since here distance from side view and top view is asked for that we need the
distance between the front view and side view (3+2); front view and top view (7+2)and
these lines which form perpendicular to each other gives needed distance, answer is
square root of squares of both the distances √(52+92 ) =10.29 units.
7. If a point P is placed in between the projection planes. The distance from side
view to reference line towards front view and the distance between top view and
reference line towards top view will be same.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
181
Explanation: The projection will be drawn by turning the other planes parallel to vertical
plane in clockwise direction along the lines of intersecting of planes. And so as we fold
again the planes at respective reference lines and then drawing perpendiculars to the
planes at those points the point of intersection gives the point P.
are drawn on paper the distance between the side view and top view of point is
________________
a) 29 units
b) 21 units
c) 35.8 units
d) 17.9 units
Answer: c
square root of squares of both the distances √(212+292 ) = 35.80 units.
9. A point is 5 units away from the vertical plane and profile plane and 10 units
away from horizontal plane in 1st quadrant then the projections are drawn on
paper the distance between the side view and top view of point is
_________________
a) 15
b) 10
c) 32.5
d) 18.02 units
Answer:
plane and horizontal plane in 1st quadrant then the projections are drawn on
paper the distance between the front view and top view of point is
______________
a) 27
182
b) 15
c) 12
d) 24
Answer: a
Explanation: Since the point is 12 units away from the horizontal plane the distance from
the point to xy reference line will be 12 units. And then the point is at distance of 15 units
from the vertical plane the distance from reference line and point will be 15, sum is 27.
11. A point is 12 units away from the vertical plane and profile plane 15 units
away from horizontal plane in 1st quadrant then the projections are drawn on
paper the distance between the front view and side view of point is
________________
a) 27
b) 15
c) 12
d) 24
Answer: d
point to xy reference line will be 12 units. And then the point is at distance of 12 units from
the profile plane the distance from reference line and point will be 12, sum is 24.
12. A point is 7 units away from the vertical plane and horizontal plane 9 units
away from profile plane in 1st quadrant then the projections are drawn on paper
the distance between the front view and top view of point is _____________
a) 27
b) 15
c) 16
d) 14
Answer: d
vertical plane the distance from reference line and point will be 7, sum is 14 units.
away from profile plane in 1st quadrant then the projections are drawn on paper
the distance between the side view and top view of point is ______________
a) 37.73 units
b) 32.98 units
183
c) 16
d) 8
Answer: d
square root of squares of both the distances √202+322 ) = 37.73 units.
Projection of Points in Second Quadrant

1. A point is in 2nd quadrant 20 units away from the horizontal plane and 10 units
away from the vertical plane. Orthographic projection is drawn. What is the
distance from point of front view to reference line, top view point to reference
line?
a) 20, 10
b) 10, 20
c) 0, 20
d) 10, 0
Answer: a
Explanation: Given object is point placed in 2 nd quadrant the top view gives the distance
from vertical plane (10) and front view gives the distance from horizontal plane (20) both
are placed overlapped in orthographic projection since the object is placed in 2nd
quadrant.
2. A point is in 2nd quadrant 15 units away from the vertical plane and 10 units
away from the horizontal plane. Orthographic projection is drawn. What is the
line?
a) 15, 10
b) 10, 15
c) 0, 15
d) 10, 0
Answer: b
Explanation: Given object is point the top view gives the distance from vertical plane (15)
and front view gives the distance from horizontal plane (10) both are placed overlapped in
184
orthographic projection since the planes need to rotate to draw projection as the object is
placed in 2nd quadrant.
3. A point is in 2nd quadrant, 15 units away from the vertical plane, 10 units away
from the horizontal plane and 8 units away from the profile plane. Orthographic
projection is drawn. What is the distance from point of front view to point of top
view?
a) 5
b) 2
c) 7
d) 8
Answer: a
Explanation: As the point is in 2nd quadrant while drawing the projections the planes should
rotate along the hinges such that the plane with top view overlaps the front view. So the
distance between them is difference of distances from respective planes that is 5 (15-10)
here.
4. A point is in 2nd quadrant, 15 units away from the vertical plane, 10 units away
projection is drawn. What is the distance from point of front view to point of side
view?
a) 25
b) 23
c) 18
d) 5
Answer: b
Explanation: Side view is obtained by turning the profile plane along the hinge with vertical
parallel to vertical plane. Side view and front view have same distance from reference line.
Sum of distances from the point to vertical plane and profile plane gives the following that
is 15+8 = 23 units.
5. A point in 2nd quadrant is 15 cm away from both the horizontal plane and
vertical plane and orthographic projections are drawn. The distance between the
points formed by front view and top view is _________
a) 0
b) 30
c) 15
d) 15+ distance from profile
185
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. While drawing orthographic projections the
front view and top view overlaps and also the distance of point is same from planes of
projections so the distance between them is zero.
6. A point in 2nd quadrant is 10 units away from the horizontal plane and 13 units
away from both the vertical plane and profile plane. Orthographic projections are
drawn find the distance from side view and front view.
a) 10
b) 13
c) 20
d) 26
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. The front view and side view lie parallel to
the horizontal plane when orthographic projections are drawn. The distance from side view
to vertical reference is 13 and distance from front view to profile plane is 13. Sum is
13+13= 26.
7. A point in 2nd quadrant is 25 units away from both the horizontal plane and
profile plane and 15 units away from the vertical plane. Orthographic projections
are drawn find the distance from side view and front view.
a) 25
b) 15
c) 30
d) 40
Answer: d
to vertical reference is 15 and distance from front view to profile plane is 25. Sum is 15+25
=40.
8. A point in 2nd quadrant is 12 units away from the horizontal plane and vertical
plane and 13 units away from both the profile plane. Orthographic projections are
a) 13
b) 26
c) 25
d) 24
186
Answer: c
to vertical reference is 12 and distance from front view to profile plane is 13. Sum 12 + 13
=25.
9. A point in 2nd quadrant is 15 units away from the horizontal plane and 10 units
away from both the vertical plane and profile plane. Orthographic projections are
drawn find the distance from side view and top view.
a) 25
b) 20.6
c) 25.49
d) 15.8
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. Since here distance from side view and top
view is asked for that we need the distance between the front view and side view (10+10);
front view and top view (10-15) and these lines which form perpendicular to each other
gives needed distance, answer is √(202+52 ) = 20.6 units.
10. A point in 2nd quadrant is 25 units away from both the horizontal plane and
profile plane 15 units away from the vertical plane. Orthographic projections are
a) 40
b) 50.99
c) 33.54
d) 41.23
Answer: d
gives needed distance, answer is √(402+102 ) = 41.23units.
11. A point in 2nd quadrant is 12 units away from the horizontal plane and vertical
plane 13 units away from both the profile plane. Orthographic projections are
a) 25.6
b) 25
c) 17.69
187
d) 13
Answer: b
gives needed distance, answer is √(252+02 ) = 25units.
12. A point in 2nd quadrant is 10 cm away from the vertical plane and 15 cm away
from the horizontal plane, orthographic projections are drawn. What is the
distance from side view of point to line of vertical reference?
a) 10
b) 15
c) 25
d) Can’t found
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. The distance from the side view of point to
line of vertical reference will be the distance from the point to the vertical plane in plane of
projection that is as given 10 cm.
13. A point is in 2nd quadrant which is 5 meters away from horizontal and 3 meters
away from profile plane. Orthographic projections are drawn. What is the
distance from the top view to xy reference line?
a) 5
b) 3
c) 8
d) Can’t found
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. The xy reference line is between the vertical
plane and horizontal plane but distance from vertical point is not given in question so we
can’t found some given information.
14. A point is in 2nd quadrant which is 7 meters away from horizontal and 2 meters
distance from the front view to xy reference line?
a) 7
b) 2
c) 5
d) 9
188
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. The distance from front view is given by
distance between point and horizontal plane here it is given 7 meters. And distance from
vertical reference will be 2 meters.
15. A point is in 2nd quadrant which is 8 meters away from vertical and 6 meters
distance from the side view to vertical reference line?
a) 8
b) 6
c) 2
d) Can’t found
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 2nd quadrant. The distance from side view is given by
distance between point and vertical plane here it is given 8 meters. And distance from front
view will be 6 meters.
Projection of Points in Third Quadrant

1. Two points are placed in 3rd quadrant of projection planes such that the line
joining the points is perpendicular to vertical plane the side view and top view will
be _______________
a) single point, two points
b) two points, single point
c) single point, single point
d) two points, two points
Answer: d
Explanation: Here given the two points such that the joining line is perpendicular to vertical
plane in 3rd quadrant asked side view and top view. The views in any quadrant will remain
same but the relative positions in projection will change accordingly the quadrant.
plane and 3 units away from horizontal plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections
are drawn on paper the distance between the front view and top view of point is
_______________
a) 10 units
b) 8 units
189
c) 9 units
d) 5 units
Answer: a
____________
a) 12 units
b) 14 units
c) 10 units
d) 8 units
Answer: b
are drawn on paper the distance between the front view and side view of point is
______________
a) 10
b) 5
c) 9
d) 12
Answer: d
_____________
a) 29 units
190
b) 20 units
c) 21 units
d) 17 units
Answer: c
point to reference line will be 12 units. And then the point is at distance of 8 units from
6. A point is 20 cm away from the vertical plane and 8 units away from profile
plane and 17 cm away from horizontal plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections
are drawn on paper the shortest distance from top view and side view of point is
_______________
a) 37
b) 44.65
c) 46.40
d) 37.53
Answer: c
square root of squares of both the distances √(282+372 ) =46.40 units.
7. If a point P is placed in between the projection planes in third quadrant. The

distance from side view to reference line towards front view and the distance
between top view and reference line towards top view will be same.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The projection will be drawn by turning the other planes parallel to vertical
plane in clockwise direction along the lines of intersecting of planes. And so as we fold
again the planes at respective reference lines and then drawing perpendiculars to the
planes at those points the point of intersection gives the point P.
8. A point is 2 m away from the vertical plane and 1 m away from profile plane
and 9 m away from horizontal plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections are
drawn on paper the distance between the side view and top view of point is
_____________
a) 21
191
b) 14.86
c) 11.4
d) 10.4
Answer: b
square root of squares of both the distances √(102+112 ) =14.86 m.
9. A point is 6 units away from the vertical plane and profile plane and 10 units
away from horizontal plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections are drawn on
paper the distance between the side view and top view of point is
________________
a) 15
b) 16
c) 12
d) 20
Answer: d
square root of squares of both the distances √(122+162 ) = 20 units.
10. A point is 15 cm away from the vertical plane and 10 cm away from profile
plane and horizontal plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections are drawn on
paper the distance between the front view and top view of point is
_____________
a) 27 cm
b) 15 cm
c) 12 cm
d) 25 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: Since the point is 10 cm away from the horizontal plane the distance from the
point to xy reference line will be 10 cm. And then the point is at distance of 15 cm from the
vertical plane the distance from reference line and point will be 15, sum is 25 cm.
11. A point is 6 m away from the vertical plane and profile plane 5 m away from
horizontal plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections is drawn on paper the
192
distance between the front view and side view of point is _______________
a) 27
b) 15
c) 12
d) 24
Answer: c
Explanation: Since the point is 6 m away from the profile plane the distance from the point
to xy reference line will be 6 m. And then the point is at distance of 6 from the profile plane
the distance from reference line and point will be 6, sum is 12.
12. A point is 50 cm away from the vertical plane and horizontal plane 80 cm
away from profile plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections is drawn on paper
the distance between the front view and top view of point is _____________
a) 130
b) 100
c) 160
d) 0
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the point is 50 cm away from the horizontal plane the distance from the
point to xy reference line will be 50 cm. And then the point is at distance of 50 cm from the
vertical plane the distance from reference line and point will be 50 cm, sum is 100 cm.
away from profile plane in 3rd quadrant then the projections are drawn on paper
the distance between the side view and top view of point is _________________
a) 13.45
b) 12.72
c) 19
d) 12.04
Answer: a
14. A point is 3 m away from the vertical plane and horizontal planes in 3rd
quadrant then the projections are drawn on paper the distance between the side
view and vertical reference line?
193
a) 3
b) 0
c) Can’t found
d) 6
Answer: a
Explanation: The side view’s distance from reference line will be the perpendicular distance
from vertical plane and front view’s distance from reference line will be the perpendicular
distance from horizontal plane.
15. A point is 3 m away from the vertical plane and 7 m away from profile plane
in 3rd quadrant then the projections are drawn on paper the distance between
the side view and vertical reference line?
a) 6
b) 3
c) 14
d) 7
Answer: b
Explanation: The side view’s distance from vertical reference line will be the perpendicular
distance from vertical plane and top view’s distance from vertical reference line will be the
perpendicular distance from profile plane.
Projection of Points in Fourth Quadrant

. A point is in 4th quadrant 10 units away from the horizontal plane and 20 units
away from the vertical plane. Orthographic projection is drawn. What is the
line?
a) 20, 10
b) 10, 20
c) 0, 20
d) 10, 0
Answer: b
Explanation: Given object is point placed in 4th quadrant the top view gives the distance
from vertical plane (20) and front view gives the distance from horizontal plane (10) both
are placed overlapped in orthographic projection since the object is placed in 4th quadrant.
194
2. A point is in 4th quadrant 15 cm away from the vertical plane and 10 cm away
from the horizontal plane. Orthographic projection is drawn. What is the distance
from point of front view to reference line, top view point to reference line?
a) 15, 10
b) 10, 15
c) 0, 15
d) 10, 0
Answer: b
Explanation: Given object is point the top view gives the distance from vertical plane (15)
and front view gives the distance from horizontal plane (10) both are placed overlapped in
orthographic projection since the planes need to rotate to draw projection as the object is
placed in 4th quadrant.
3. A point is in 4th quadrant, 5 m away from the vertical plane, 1 m away from the
horizontal plane and 8 units away from the profile plane. Orthographic projection
is drawn. What is the distance from point of front view to point of top view?
a) 6
b) 4
c) 10
d) 2
Answer: b
Explanation: As the point is in 4th quadrant while drawing the projections the planes should
rotate along the hinges such that the plane with top view overlaps the front view. So the
distance between them is difference of distances from respective planes that is 5 (5-1)
here.
4. A point is in 4th quadrant, 15 dm away from the vertical plane, 10 dm away

projection is drawn. What is the distance from point of front view to point of side
view?
a) 25
b) 23
c) 18
d) 5
Answer: b
Explanation: Side view is obtained by turning the profile plane along the hinge with vertical
parallel to vertical plane. Side view and front view have same distance from reference line.
195
Sum of distances from the point to vertical plane and profile plane gives the following that
is 15+8 = 23 dm.
5. A point in 4th quadrant is 30 mm away from both the horizontal plane and
vertical plane and orthographic projections are drawn. The distance between the
points formed by front view and top view is ______________
a) 0
b) 30
c) 15
d) 15+ distance from profile
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. While drawing orthographic projections the
front view and top view overlaps and also the distance of point is same from planes of
projections so the distance between them is zero.
6. A point in 4th quadrant is 13 inches away from the horizontal plane and 10
inches away from both the vertical plane and profile plane. Orthographic
projections are drawn find the distance from side view and front view.
a) 10
b) 13
c) 20
d) 26
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. The front view and side view lie parallel to
to vertical reference is 10 and distance from front view to profile plane is 10. Sum is
10+10= 20 inches.
7. A point in 4th quadrant is 10 units away from both the horizontal plane and
profile plane and 15 units away from the vertical plane. Orthographic projections
are drawn find the distance from side view and front view.
a) 25
b) 15
c) 30
d) 40
Answer: a
196
to vertical reference is 15 and distance from front view to profile plane is 10. Sum is 15+10
=25 units.
8. A point in 4th quadrant is 18 units away from the horizontal plane and vertical
plane and 17 units away from both the profile plane. Orthographic projections are
a) 1
b) 24
c) 35
d) 36
Answer: c
to vertical reference is 12 and distance from front view to profile plane is 13. Sum is 18 +
17 =35 units.
9. A point in 4th quadrant is 8 inches away from the horizontal plane and 20
inches away from both the vertical plane and profile plane. Orthographic
projections are drawn find the distance from side view and top view.
a) 41.76
b) 20
c) 43.08
d) 16
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. Since here distance from side view and top
front view and top view (20-8) and these lines which form perpendicular to each other gives
needed distance, answer is √(402+122 ) = 41.76 units.
10. A point in 4th quadrant is 5 m away from both the horizontal plane and profile
plane 3 m away from the vertical plane. Orthographic projections are drawn find
the distance from side view and top view.
a) 8
b) 8.2
c) 10.19
d) 12.8
Answer: b
197
front view and top view (5-3) and these lines which form perpendicular to each other gives
needed distance, answer is √(8^2+2^2 ) = 8.2 m.
11. A point in 4th quadrant is 13 inches away from the horizontal plane and
vertical plane 10 inches away from both the profile plane. Orthographic
projections are drawn find the distance from side view and top view.
a) 26
b) 25.6
c) 17.69
d) 13
Answer: a
gives needed distance, answer is √(262+02 ) = 26 inches.
12. A point in 4th quadrant is 15 cm away from the vertical plane and 10 cm
away from the horizontal plane, orthographic projections are drawn. What is the
distance from side view of point to line of vertical reference?
a) 10
b) 15
c) 25
d) Can’t found
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. The distance from the side view of point to
line of vertical reference will be the distance from the point to the vertical plane in plane of
projection that is as given 15 cm.
13. A point is in 4th quadrant which is 15 inches away from horizontal and 30
inches away from profile plane. Orthographic projections are drawn. What is the
distance from the top view to xy reference line?
a) 5
b) 3
c) 8
d) Can’t found
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. The xy reference line is between the
198
vertical plane and horizontal plane but distance from vertical point is not given in question
so we can’t found some given information.
14. A point is in 4th quadrant which is 17 dm away from horizontal and 12 dm

distance from the front view to xy reference line?
a) 17
b) 12
c) 5
d) 29
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. The distance from front view is given by
distance between point and horizontal plane here it is given 17 dm. And distance from
vertical reference will be 12 dm.
15. A point is in 4th quadrant which is 18 mm away from vertical and 20 mm

distance from the side view to vertical reference line?
a) 18
b) 2
c) 20
d) Can’t found
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the point is in 4th quadrant. The distance from side view is given by
distance between point and vertical plane here it is given 18 mm. And distance from front
view will be 20 mm.
Projection of Straight Lines Parallel to Plane

1. If a line AB parallel to both the horizontal plane and vertical plane then the line
AB is _____________
a) parallel to profile plane
b) lies on profile plane
c) perpendicular to profile plane
d) inclined to profile plane
Answer: c
Explanation: For any line if it is parallel to two perpendicular planes then the line will
199
definitely perpendicular to other plane perpendicular to both the previous planes. And
whether the line lies on the plane or not depends on conditions given but we can’t just
imagine.
2. A line AB of length 20 cm is placed in 1st quadrant and parallel to profile plane

and the end A and B are 15, 10 cm away from the horizontal plane respectively.
The length of the line in top view is ______ cm.
a) 11.18
b) 13.2
c) 17.32
d) 19.36
Answer: d
Explanation: The distance between the projectors drawn from A and B to horizontal plane
gives the length of line in top view given the line parallel to profile plane. The difference in
distances from A and B to horizontal plane is 5 (15-10). Given length is 20 cm so required
length is √(〖20〗^2-5^2 )= 19.36 cm.
3. A line of length 15 cm is parallel to horizontal plane and makes an angle of 30

degrees with vertical plane. The length of line in top view is ____ cm.
a) 30
b) 15
c) 12.9
d) 7.5
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the line is parallel to horizontal plane and makes an angle of 30
degrees with vertical plane. The top view gives the actual length of the line because the top
view is always the projection of objects on horizontal plane to which the line is parallel.
4. A line AB of length 10 cm is placed in 2nd quadrant parallel to vertical plane

and 5 cm away from the vertical plane and ends are 7 cm and 4 cm from
horizontal plane. The top view and front view lines apart from each other.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Accordingly the given distances and length if the projections are drawn the
front view and top view intersect with each other as for 2nd quadrant the projections of
front view and top view overlaps.
200
degrees with vertical plane placed in 3rd quadrant. The length of line in front view
is ____ cm.
a) 32
b) 16
c) 13.8
d) 8
Answer: c
Explanation: The line given is parallel to horizontal plane and makes an angle of 30
degrees with vertical plane so the length of line front view will be cosine (30)x actual length
of line =13.8 cm. There will be no difference the line is in any quadrant.
6. A line AB of length 15 cm is placed in 4th quadrant and parallel to profile plane

and the end A and B are 8, 6 cm away from the horizontal plane respectively.
The length of the line in front view is ______ cm.
a) 14.8
b) 9
c) 7
d) 2
Answer: d
Explanation: The difference in distances from A and B to horizontal plane is 2 (8-6) cm.
And this front view of line in orthographic projection is perpendicular to the reference line
as the line in projection planes is parallel to profile plane.
7. A line AB of length 2 m is placed in 2nd quadrant and parallel to vertical plane

and the end A and B are 0.5 m and 0.3 m away from the horizontal plane
respectively. The length of the line in top view is ______ m.
a) 1.98
b) 1.97
c) 1.936
d) 2
Answer: a
Explanation: The distance between the projectors drawn from A and B to horizontal plane
gives the length of line in top view given the line parallel to vertical plane. The difference in
distances from A and B to horizontal plane is 0.2 (0.5-0.3). Given length is 2 m so required
length is √(22-0.22 )= 1.98m.
201
8. A line of length 30 inches is parallel to profile plane and makes an angle of 60
degrees with vertical plane. The length of line in top view is ____ inches.
a) 30
b) 15
c) 25.9
d) 51.9
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the line is parallel to profile plane and makes 60 degrees with vertical
plane. There will be no need for distance from profile plane. The length of line from top
view will be sin(60) x length of the line= sin(60) x 30 inches =25.9 inches.

degrees with profile plane. The length of line in side view is ____ cm.
a) 25
b) 12.5
c) 88.3
d) 17.67
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the line is parallel to profile plane and makes 45 degrees with profile
plane. There will be no need for distance from profile plane. The length of line from top
view will be sin (45) x length of the line= sin (45) x 25 cm = 17.67 cm
10. The length of line parallel to one of the plane of projection planes will show
same length if view of that line is drawn on to the plane.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The length of line parallel to one of the plane of projection planes will show
same length if view of that line is drawn on to the plane because the projections on the
plane to that line are parallel to other planes.
11. A line parallel to horizontal plane and at a distance of 10 units to it and both
the end of line are 6 units away from the vertical plane. Which of the following
statement is false?
a) The line parallel to vertical plane
b) The side view of line gives a point.
c) The length of line in front view is 10 units.
d) The length of line in top view is 6 units.
202
Answer: d
Explanation: The line which is equidistance from a plane is said to be parallel to it. The line
which is parallel to two perpendicular planes will be perpendicular to other perpendicular
plane to the earlier planes.
12. A line AB of length 12 inches is perpendicular to profile plane at distance of 6

inches from vertical plane and 3 inches from horizontal plane. The distance from
line to xy reference line in top view is _____inches.
a) 6
b) 3
c) 12
d) 0
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the line perpendicular to profile plane. Top view gives the length of line
and distance from the xy reference line which is the perpendicular distance from the line to
vertical plane. It is given in question as 6 inches.
13. A line AB of length 3 m is perpendicular to vertical plane at distance of 2 m

from profile plane and 0.5 m from horizontal plane. The distance from line to xy
reference line in front view is _____m.
a) 1.5
b) 0.5
c) 2
d) 3
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the line perpendicular to vertical plane. Front view shows as point and
distance from the xy reference line and vertical reference line. The distance from horizontal
plane is given in question as 0.5 m.
14. A line AB of length 24 cm is parallel to vertical plane and perpendicular to

profile plane held at a distance of 5 cm away from horizontal plane and 6 cm
away from the vertical plane. The distance from xy reference line to line AB is
_____ cm in top view.
a) 6
b) 12
c) 5
d) 7.8
Answer: a
203
Explanation: Asked for top view, which gives the distance from vertical plane and profile
plane because the top view is parallel to horizontal plane. Also given the line is
perpendicular to profile plane. the distance from xy reference line to line AB will be 6 cm.
15. A line AB of length 24 cm is parallel to vertical plane and perpendicular to

profile plane held at a distance of 5 cm away from horizontal plane and 6 cm
away from the vertical plane. The distance from xy reference line to line AB is
_____ cm in front view.
a) 6
b) 12
c) 5
d) 7.8
Answer: c
Explanation: Asked for front view, which gives the distance from horizontal plane and
profile plane because the front view is parallel to vertical plane. Also given the line is
perpendicular to profile plane. the distance from xy reference line to line AB will be 5 cm.
Projection of Line Contained by Plane

1. A line AB is on the vertical plane of projection planes, which view from the
following gives the actual length of the line AB?
a) Front view
b) Top view
c) Side view
d) Isometric view
Answer: a
Explanation: Any line that lie or parallel to any of plane in projection planes the true length
will be found at view which drawn on to that plane that is here the line is in vertical plane so
the view which fall on vertical plane gives the true length which is other than front view.
2. A line AB is on the horizontal plane inclined to vertical plane at 45 degrees,

which view from the following gives the actual length of the line AB?
a) Front view
b) Top view
c) Side view
d) Isometric view
Answer: b
204
will be found at view which drawn on to that plane that is here the line is in horizontal plane
though it is inclined with other planes the true length will be given at view which fall on
horizontal plane which is top view.
3. A line AB is on the profile plane inclined such that ends of line are 10, 12 cm
away from horizontal plane, which view from the following gives the actual length
of the line AB?
a) Front view
b) Top view
c) Side view
d) Isometric view
Answer: c
will be found at view which drawn on to that plane that is here the line is in profile plane
though it’s ends are at some distance the true length will be given at view which fall on
profile plane which is side view.
4. A line PQ lie in both the vertical plane and profile plane the front and side
views of that line coincides at vertical reference line.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a line present in both the planes but it is know that two perpendicular
planes meet at a line which is reference line so the given line might present on that line
that is coincide with that line so the views also get coincide at that line.
5. If a line RS lie on both vertical and horizontal plane then which of the following
two views coincides to give a line again?
a) Front, Top
b) Top, Side
c) Side, Isometric
d) Isometric, Front
Answer: a
Explanation: Isometric view is that the three dimensions of a solid are not only shown in
one view. Here given the line is present in vertical and horizontal plane so the line will
coincide in the front view and top view.
205
6. If a line LM lies on profile plane and horizontal plane then which of the
following two views coincides to give a line again?
a) Front, Top
b) Top, Side
c) Side, Isometric
d) Isometric, Front
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the line LM is present in both the profile and horizontal planes which
are perpendicular so the line will be at reference line formed between them also the line
will coincide with the view of top and side.
7. If a line AB lies on horizontal plane and vertical plane then which of the
following view gives a point?
a) Side view
b) Top view
c) Front view
d) Isometric view
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the line AB is present in both the vertical and horizontal planes which
are perpendicular so the line will be at xy reference line formed between them which is
perpendicular to profile plane so the side view gives the point.
8. A line of length 55 mm lies on profile plane whose ends are at a distance of 15

mm and 20 mm to horizontal plane. What is the length in top view?
a) 54.77 mm
b) 5 mm
c) 0 mm
d) 35 mm
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the line is of length 55 mm present on profile plane and ends are at 15
and 20 mm away from horizontal plane. As we imagine the projection planes we can get
the top view and distance relation as given here √(552-(20-15)2 ) =54.77 mm.
9. A line of length 35 mm lies on vertical plane whose ends are at a distance of

15 mm and 10 mm to profile plane. What is the length in top view?
a) 0 mm
b) 35 mm
c) 5 mm
206
d) 34.64 mm
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the line is of length 35 mm present on vertical plane and ends are at 15
and 10 mm away from profile plane. As we imagine the projection planes we can get the
top view and distance relation as given here. 15-10 =5 mm.
10. A line of length 12 cm lies on profile plane whose ends are at a distance of 4
cm and 5 cm to vertical plane. What is the length in top view?
a) 5 cm
b) 12 cm
c) 1 cm
d) 11.9 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the line is of length 12 cm present on profile plane and ends are at 4
cm and 5 cm away from vertical plane. As we imagine the projection planes we can get the
top view and distance relation as given here. 5-4 =1 cm.
11. A line of length 10 inches lies on profile plane whose ends are at a distance
of 5 inches and 3 inches to vertical plane. What is the length in front view?
a) 9.79
b) 2
c) 10
d) 0
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the line is of length 10 inches present on profile plane and ends are at
5 and 3 inches away from vertical plane. As we imagine the projection planes we can get
the front view and distance relation as given here. √(102-22 ) = 9.79 inches.
12. A line of length 20 cm lies on profile plane whose ends are at a distance of 5
cm and 7 cm to horizontal plane. What is the length in top view?
a) 7
b) 14.8
c) 15
d) 2
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the line is of length 20 cm present on profile plane and ends are at 5
and 7 cm away from horizontal plane at right angles. As we imagine the projection planes
we can get the top view and distance relation as given here. √(202-(7-5)2 )= 14.8 cm.
207
13. A line of length 15 dm lies on vertical plane whose ends are at a distance of 5
dm and 7 dm to horizontal plane. What is the length in side view?
a) 7
b) 14.8
c) 15
d) 2
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the line is of length 15 dm present on vertical plane and ends are at 5
and 7 dm away from horizontal plane at right angles. As we imagine the projection planes
we can get the side view and distance relation as given here. 7-5 =2 dm.
14. A line of length 15 cm is on vertical plane makes an angle of 50 degrees with

horizontal plane. What is the length of line in side view?
a) 0 cm
b) 11.49 cm
c) 9.6 cm
d) 15 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the line of 15 cm length is present on the vertical plane and making an
angle of 50 degrees with horizontal plane so side view’s length will be 15 x sin (50) = 11.49
cm and front view will be 15 x sin (90-50).
15. A line of length 5 m is on horizontal plane makes an angle of 75 degrees with

profile plane. What is the length of line in side view?
a) 1.29 m
b) 4.82 m
c) 2.41 m
d) 5 m
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the line of 5 m length is present on the horizontal plane and making an
angle of 50 degrees with profile plane so side view’s length will be 5 m x cos (75)=1.29 m
and in front view it will be 5 x sin (75).
Projection of Line Perpendicular to one of the Plane

1. A line of length 15 cm touching the vertical plane and perpendicular to it held
at a distance of 20 cm away from horizontal plane and 5 cm away from the profile
208
plane. Which of the following is false?
a) Front view will be point
b) The line is parallel to horizontal and profile plane
c) The length of the line in side view is 15 cm
d) One end of line is on the horizontal plane
Answer: d
Explanation: As with knowledge of views we can say the views from different sides and
next if a line is perpendicular to one plane of projection planes it will parallel to other
planes. Given one end is on vertical plane so the other end can’t be on perpendicular
plane.
2. A line of length 15 cm touching the vertical plane and perpendicular to it at a

distance of 20 cm away from horizontal plane and 5 cm away from the profile
plane. Which view gives the distance from line to profile plane is 5 cm?
a) Front view
b) Left side view
c) Top view
d) Right side view
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a line of length 15 cm touching the vertical plane and perpendicular to it
at a distance of 20 cm away from horizontal plane and 5 cm away from the profile plane.
So the view gives the distance from line to profile plane is 5 cm is top view.
3. A line of length 7 m touching the vertical plane and perpendicular to it at a

distance of 2 m away from horizontal plane and 5 m away from the profile plane.
Which view gives the distance from line to horizontal plane is 2 m?
a) Front view
b) Left side view
c) Top view
d) Right side view
Answer:
Explanation: Given a line of length 7 m touching the vertical plane and perpendicular to it at
a distance of 2 m away from horizontal plane and 5 m away from the profile plane. So the
view gives the distance from line to horizontal plane is 2 m.
4. A line is perpendicular to profile plane, the perpendicular distance from 1st end
of the line to vertical plane is 20 cm and perpendicular distance of 2nd end of line
to horizontal plane is 10 cm. What is the distance from 1st end of line to vertical
209
plane?
a) 15 cm
b) 20 cm
c) 10 cm
d) Can’t say
Answer: b
Explanation: As the projection of planes are mutual perpendicular plane if a line is
perpendicular to one of the planes then it would be parallel to rest of the planes that is the
both ends will be equidistant from plane.
5. A line is perpendicular to horizontal plane, the perpendicular distance from the

line to vertical plane is 8 inches and perpendicular distance from the line to
profile plane is 5 inches. What is the distance from the line to vertical reference
line if it is viewed from front view?
a) 8 inches
b) 5 inches
c) 3 inches
d) 0 inches
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a line is perpendicular to horizontal plane, the perpendicular distance
from the line to vertical plane is 8 inches and perpendicular distance from the line to profile
plane is 5 inches. So the distance from the line to vertical reference line if it is viewed from
front view is 5 inches.
6. A line is perpendicular to profile plane, the perpendicular distance from the line
to vertical plane is 10 cm and perpendicular distance from the line to horizontal
plane is 5 cm. What is the distance from the line to vertical reference line if it is
viewed from side view?
a) 10 cm
b) 5 cm
c) 7.5 cm
d) 0 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the line is perpendicular to profile plane, the perpendicular distance
from the line to vertical plane is 10 cm and perpendicular distance from the line to
horizontal plane is 5 cm. So the distance from the line to vertical reference line if it is
viewed from side view will be 5cm.
210
7. A line of 12 cm length is perpendicular to profile plane and the least distance
from this line to profile plane is 6 cm. This is at a distance of 4 cm from vertical
plane and 5 cm from the horizontal plane. What is distance from the point on line
far away from the profile plane to profile plane?
a) 12 cm
b) 9 cm
c) 18 cm
d) 6 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a line of 12 cm length is perpendicular to profile plane and the least
distance from this line to profile plane is 6 cm. This is at a distance of 4 cm from vertical
plane and 5 cm from the horizontal plane. So the distance from the point on line far away
from the profile plane to profile plane is 18 cm.
8. A line can’t be perpendicular to two perpendicular planes at the same time.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Plane is collection of infinite lines the lines present in it will parallel to all the
other lines in it. Perpendicular plane is such that the lines present in it will perpendicular to
all the lines present in perpendicular plane. So a line perpendicular to one plane will can’t
be perpendicular to perpendicular plane.

plane and 5 cm from the horizontal plane. What is distance from the line to xy
reference line in top view?
a) 6 cm
b) 4 cm
c) 5 cm
d) 0 cm
Answer: b
plane and 5 cm from the horizontal plane. So the distance from the line to xy reference line
in top view is 4 cm.
211
plane and 5 cm from the horizontal plane. What is the distance from the line to xy
reference line in front view?
a) 0 cm
b) 6 cm
c) 4 cm
d) 5 cm
Answer: d
plane and 5 cm from the horizontal plane. So the distance from the line to xy reference line
in front view is 5 cm.
11. A line is in vertical plane and perpendicular to horizontal plane at a distance

of 10 cm from horizontal plane and 5 cm from profile plane. What is the distance
from vertical reference line to line?
a) 10 cm
b) 0 cm
c) 5 cm
d) 7.5 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the line is in vertical plane and perpendicular to horizontal plane at a
distance of 10 cm from horizontal plane and 5 cm from profile plane. So the distance from
vertical reference line to line is 5 cm.
12. A line is in vertical plane and perpendicular to horizontal plane at a distance

of 10 cm from horizontal and 5 cm from profile plane. What is the distance from
xy reference line to line in top view?
a) 10 cm
b) 5 cm
c) 6 cm
d) 0 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: Top view gives the distance from object to xy reference line and object to
reference line between the profile plane and horizontal plane. But here the line is placed
212
vertical to horizontal plane so the view will be point and also the line is in vertical plane to
distance will be zero.
13. If a line is perpendicular to one of the projection planes and lies on other two
planes then the line will lies on reference line accordingly.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: If a line is perpendicular to one of the projection planes and lies on other two
planes then the line will lies on reference line accordingly. As any line lies on two planes it
will definitely passes through the reference line and so which is perpendicular to other
plane.
Projection of Line Inclined to one Plane and Parallel to

other
1. A line of length 10 cm parallel to horizontal plane and inclined to vertical plane with
an angle of 25 degrees. What is the length in front view?
a) 10 cm
b) 0 cm
c) 9.06 cm
d) 4.22 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: Here accordingly the conditions given that line is parallel to horizontal plane
and inclined to vertical plane at 25 degrees the front view’s length is the cosine of actual
length. 10 cm x cos (25) = 9.06 cm.
2. A line of length 5 inches parallel to horizontal plane and inclined to vertical plane with
an angle of 35 degrees. What is the length in side view?
a) 7.28 inches
b) 2.86 inches
c) 4.09 inches
d) 5 inches
Answer: b
and inclined to vertical plane at 35 degrees the side view’s length is the sine of actual
length. 5 inches x sin (35) = 2.86 inches.
213
3. A line of length 0.3 m parallel to profile plane and inclined to vertical plane with an
angle of 25 degrees. What is the length in side view?
a) 0.3 m
b) 0.27 m
c) 0.12 m
d) 0.15 m
Answer: a
and inclined to vertical plane the side view’s length is the actual length of line but front view
or top view give different lengths.
4. A line of length 5 dm is parallel to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal plane with
an angle of 55 degrees. What is the length in top view?
a) 2.86 dm
b) 4.09 dm
c) 5 dm
d) 2.5 dm
Answer: a
Explanation: Here accordingly the conditions given that line is parallel to vertical plane and
inclined to horizontal plane at 55 degrees the top view’s length is the cosine of actual
length. 5 dm x cos (55) = 2.86 dm.
5. A line of length 5 dm is parallel to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal plane with
an angle of 65 degrees. What is the length in side view?
a) 2.11 dm
b) 4.53 dm
c) 5 dm
d) 0 dm
Answer: b
Explanation: Here accordingly the conditions given that line is parallel to vertical plane and
inclined to horizontal plane at 55 degrees the top view’s length is the cosine of actual
length. 5 dm x sin (65) = 4.53 dm.
6. A line of length 15 cm is parallel to horizontal plane and 10 cm away from it and

making an angle of 45 degrees with profile plane. The distance from line to xy
reference line in front view will be __________
a) 15 cm
b) 10 cm
214
c) 7.07 cm
d) 10.06 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Given line is of any length but we are asked distance from line to xy reference
line in front view which is the distance from the line to horizontal plane even if the line may
inclined to other planes.
7. A line of length 15 cm is parallel to horizontal plane and vertical plane and 10 cm

away from vertical plane. The distance from line to vertical reference line in side view
will be __________
a) 10 cm
b) 15 cm
c) 0 cm
d) 10.06 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: Given line is of any length but given it is parallel to horizontal plane and
vertical plane and 10 cm away from the vertical plane so as the side view gives the
distance from horizontal plane and vertical plane here the distance is 10 cm.
8. A line of length 12 inches is parallel to vertical plane and 5 inches away from it and
ends of it is 3, 4 inches away from the profile plane. The length of line in top view will be
__________
a) 1 inch
b) 3 inches
c) 7 inches
d) 5 inches
Answer: a
Explanation: The line which is parallel to vertical has ends which are 3, 4 inches from
profile plane and asked for top view so the difference between the distances of ends to
profile plane gives the length in top view 4-3=1 inches.
ends of it is 3, 4 inches away from the profile plane. The length of line in top view will be
__________
a) 11.61 inches
b) 11.31 inches
c) 11.95 inches
d) 30.37 inches
215
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a line of length 12 inches and parallel to vertical plane and it may be
any inches away from it the top view is calculated as given here √(122-12 )= 11.95 inches. 1
is because of 4-3 inches = 1 inch.
making an angle of 5 degrees with profile plane. The distance from line to xy reference
line in top view will be ________inches.
a) 5 inches
b) 12 inches
c) 4.9 inches
d) 0.43 inches
Answer: a
Explanation: Given line is of any length but we are asked to find the distance from line to xy
reference line in top view which is the distance from the line to vertical plane even if the
line may inclined to other planes.
ends make 6 and 7 inches from profile plane. The length of line in top view will be
________inches.
a) 11.61 inches
b) 11.31 inches
c) 11.95 inches
d) 30.37 inches
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a line of length 12 inches and parallel to vertical plane and it may be
any inches away from it the top view is calculated as given here √(122-12 )= 11.95 inches. 1
is because of 7-6 inches = 1 inch.
12. A line of length 12 cm is parallel to profile plane and 5 cm away from it and ends
make 6 and 7 cm from horizontal plane. The length of line in side view will be
________cm.
a) 5 cm
b) 12 cm
c) 11.95 cm
d) 11.31 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The front view of line on or parallel to vertical plane gives the actual length.
216
The top view of line on or parallel to horizontal plane gives the actual length. The side view
of line on or parallel to the profile plane gives the actual length.
13. A line of length 25 cm is parallel to horizontal plane and 10 cm away from it and
ends make 10 and 5 cm from profile plane. The length of line in front view will be
________inches.
a) 10 cm
b) 25 cm
c) 24.49 cm
d) 5 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a line of length 25 cm and parallel to horizontal plane and it may be any
inches away from it the front view is calculated as given here √(252-52 )= 24.49 inches. 5 is
because of 10-5 inches = 5 cm.
Projection of Line Inclined to both the Planes

1. A line of length 10 cm at first lied on the horizontal plane parallel to vertical
plane and then keeping one of its ends fixed turned 30 degrees with respect to
vertical plane and then turned 45 degrees with respect to horizontal plane. What
is the length of line in top view?
a) 5 cm
b) 7.07 cm
c) 3.53 cm
d) 10 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: First imagine the line in horizontal plane parallel to vertical plane as here we
are asked to find the top view’s length even if the line is rotated within the horizontal plane
the line length will not change and then rotated with respect to horizontal plane which is
calculated as follows. 10 x cos (45)= 7.07 cm.
2. A line of length 10 cm at first lied on the horizontal plane parallel to vertical

vertical plane and then turned 45 degrees with respect to horizontal plane. What
is the length of line in front view?
a) 8.66 cm
b) 7.07 cm
217
c) 3.53 cm
d) 6.12 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: First imagine the line in horizontal plane parallel to vertical plane as here we
are asked to find the front view’s length even if the line is rotated with respect to horizontal
plane the line length will not change and then rotated with respect to the vertical plane
which is calculated as follows 10 x cos (30) =8.66 cm.
3. A line of length 15 cm at first lied on the vertical plane parallel to horizontal

horizontal plane and then turned 50 degrees with respect to vertical plane. What
a) 9.6 cm
b) 7.5 cm
c) 12.99 cm
d) 11.49 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: First imagine the line in vertical plane parallel to horizontal plane as here we
are asked to find the top view’s length so even if the line is rotated with respect to the
horizontal plane the line length will not change and then rotated with respect to the vertical
plane which is calculated as follows 15 x cos (30) =12.99 cm.

a) 9.6 cm
b) 12.99 cm
c) 7.5 cm
d) 11.49 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: First imagine the line in vertical plane parallel to horizontal plane as here we
are asked to find the front view’s length so even if the line is rotated with respect to the
vertical plane the line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the horizontal
plane which is calculated as follows 15 x cos (50) = 9.6 cm.
5. A line of length 15 cm at first lied on the profile plane parallel to horizontal

218
horizontal plane and then turned 50 degrees with respect to profile plane. What is
the length of line in top view?
a) 9.6 cm
b) 12.99 cm
c) 7.5 cm
d) 11.49 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: First imagine the line in profile plane parallel to horizontal plane as here we
are asked to find the top view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the horizontal
plane the line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the horizontal plane
which is calculated as follows 15 x cos (30) = 12.99 cm.

the length of line in side view?
a) 9.6 cm
b) 12.99 cm
c) 7.5 cm
d) 11.49 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: First imagine the line in profile plane parallel to horizontal plane as here we
are asked to find the side view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the profile plane
the line length will not change and then rotated with respect to the profile plane which is
calculated as follows 15 x cos (50) = 9.6 cm.
7. A line of length 20 cm at first lied on the profile plane parallel to vertical plane
and then keeping one of its ends fixed turned 40 degrees with respect to vertical
plane and then turned 20 degrees with respect to profile plane. What is the
length of line in top view?
a) 18.79 cm
b) 6.8 cm
c) 12.85 cm
d) 15.32 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: First imagine the line in profile plane parallel to vertical plane as here we are
asked to find the top view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the horizontal plane
219
the line length will not change and then rotated with respect to the horizontal plane which is
calculated as follows 20 x sin (40) = 12.85 cm.
8. A line of length 20 cm at first lied on the profile plane parallel to vertical plane
and then keeping one of its ends fixed turned 40 degrees with respect to vertical
plane and then turned 20 degrees with respect to profile plane. What is the
length of line in side view?
a) 18.79 cm
b) 6.8 cm
c) 12.85 cm
d) 15.32 cm
Answer: a
asked to find the side view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the profile plane the
line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the profile plane which is
calculated as follows 20 x cos (20) = 18.79 cm.

a) 9.6 cm
b) 11.4 cm
c) 12.28 cm
d) 8.6 cm
Answer: d
asked to find the side view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the vertical plane the
line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the vertical plane which is
calculated as follows 15 x sin (35) = 8.6 cm.
a) 9.6 cm
b) 11.4 cm
c) 12.28 cm
220
d) 8.6 cm
Answer: b
asked to find the side view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the horizontal plane
the line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the horizontal plane which is
calculated as follows 15 x cos (40) =11.4 cm.
11. A line of length X cm lied on horizontal plane turned 60 degrees with respect
to horizontal plane by keeping one of its ends fixed and attained length of Y cm
top view. Which of the following statement is true?
a) X =Y
b) X=2 * Y
c) X= ½ * Y
d) X >Y
Answer: c
Explanation: As cos (60) =0.5. The X would equal to ½ *Y. The relation would be like this.
X=Y happens if we watch from front view. And X will not be greater than Y as X is made to
turn either it would stay same or become less than it.
12. There will be no change in length if the line is viewed parallel to plane on
which the line is present and also if the line is rotated with respect to
perpendicular planes.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: There will be no change in length if the line is viewed parallel to plane on
which the line is present and also if the line is rotated with respect to perpendicular planes.
If the line is rotated with respect to the same plane on which it is located then a new
measure is formed.
the length of line in top view?
a) 22.65 cm
b) 10.56 cm
c) 14.33 cm
d) 20.47 cm
221
Answer: c
asked to find the side view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the horizontal plane
the line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the horizontal plane which is
calculated as follows 25 x cos (55)= 14.33 cm.
the length of line in side view?
a) 22.65 cm
b) 10.56 cm
c) 14.33 cm
d) 20.47 cm
Answer: b
asked to find the side view’s length so even if the line is rotated within the profile plane the
line length will not change and also rotated with respect to the profile plane which is
calculated as follows 25 x cos(65)= 10.56 cm.
Line contained by a Plane Perpendicular to Both the

Reference Planes
1. Line contained by a plane perpendicular to both the reference planes will lie on
the ___________ plane.
a) horizontal plane
b) vertical plane
c) straight plane
d) profile plane
Answer: d
Explanation: In general the horizontal plane and the vertical plane are referred as
reference planes. So the plane which is perpendicular to the reference planes is profile
plane which is also called as picture plane.
2. If a line is in profile plane making an angle of 30 degrees with vertical plane. In

which angle the line makes with the horizontal plane?
a) Can’t say
222
b) 90 degrees
c) 0 degrees
d) 60 degrees
Answer: d
Explanation: If a line placed within the plane the angles made by the line with other
perpendicular planes will be complimentary that means their sum will be equal to 90
degrees.90 degrees- 30 degrees = 60 degrees.
3. The view which gives the actual length of line in profile plane is ________
a) front view
b) top view
c) side view
d) bottom view
Answer: c
Explanation: The view which is watched parallel to the plane gives the actual length of line
here as is it profile plane the view will be side view if it comes to vertical plane the view is
front view and if it comes to the horizontal plane the view is top view.
4. The length of line placed in profile plane from front view is product of actual
length and ____(angle with horizontal plane).
a) cosine
b) sine
c) tangent
d) secant
Answer: b
Explanation: As the angle is between the line and horizontal plane the height is the length
of line in front view. If angle with vertical is given the length will be product of actual length
and cosine of angle between the line and vertical plane.
5. The length of line placed in profile plane and making an angle of 30 degrees
with the vertical is 5 cm from front view. What is the actual length?
a) 5 cm
b) 8.66 cm
c) 10 cm
d) 5.77 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: The length of line making an angle with vertical if viewed from front view the
223
length will be the product of length of line cosine of angle given. L * cosine (30) =5 cm, X=
5/ cosine (30)= 5.77 cm.
with the horizontal is 10cm from top view. What is the actual length?
a) 7.66 cm
b) 6.4 cm
c) 13.05 cm
d) 15.55 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: The length of line making an angle with horizontal if viewed from front view
the length will be the product of length of line cosine of angle given. X * cosine (40) =10
cm, L= 10/ cosine (40)= 13.05 cm.
with the vertical is 2 m from side view. What is the actual length?
a) 2 m
b) 3.4 m
c) 2.4 m
d) 1.6 m
Answer: a
Explanation: The view given is side view in this view whatever the angle made by line with
any of the other planes except the profile plane it gives the actual length. So here the
actual length and side view length become equal.
with the horizontal is 3 cm from top view. What is the actual length?
a) 3.31 cm
b) 7.09 cm
c) 1.26 cm
d) 2.7 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: The line is making 155 degrees is equal to the line making 25 degrees as
180-155 =25. The length of line from top view will be cosine of actual length. L * cosine
(25) =3 cm, L= 3/ cosine (25)= 3.31 cm.
9. A line of length 20 cm is placed in profile plane making an angle of 65 degrees

with the horizontal. What is the length of line front view?
224
a) 18.12 cm
b) 8.45 cm
c) 20 cm
d) 22.06 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: The length of line making an angle with horizontal if viewed from front view
the length will be the product of length of line sine of angle given. L= length given x sin
(65), L=20 cm x sin (65) = 18.12 cm.
10. A line of length 20 cm is placed in profile plane making an angle of 65

degrees with the horizontal. What is the length of line top view?
a) 18.12 cm
b) 8.45 cm
c) 20 cm
d) 22.06 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: The length of line making an angle with horizontal if viewed from top view the
length will be the product of length of line cosine of angle given. L= length given x cosine
(65), L=20 cm x cosine (65) = 8.45 cm.
11. A line of length 20 cm is placed in profile plane making an angle of 65

degrees with the horizontal. What is the length of line side view?
a) 18.12 cm
b) 8.45 cm
c) 20 cm
d) 22.06 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: The view given is side view in this view whatever the angle made by line with
any of the other planes except the profile plane it gives the actual length. So here the
actual length and side view length become equal.
12. A line of length 1 m is placed in profile plane making an angle of 180 degrees
with the horizontal. What is the length of line top view?
a) 1m
b) 0 m
c) 0.5 m
d) 1.5 m
Answer: a
225
Explanation: Given the line is making 180 degrees with the horizontal which is half
revolution so the length will be constant from top view as in the side view but in front view
the length will be zero meter.
True Length of a Straight Line and its Inclinations with the

Reference Planes
1. A line which is parallel to vertical plane and making an angle of 50 degrees
with horizontal has a length of 5 cm from side view. What is its true length?
a) 6.52 cm
b) 7.77 cm
c) 3.2 cm
d) 3.8 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: True length of line parallel to vertical plane and making angle with horizontal
plane can be of two values either from top view or side view but from front view the length
will be given length. As here it is given side view L= 5/sin (50).
2. A line which is parallel to profile plane and making an angle of 40 degrees with
horizontal has a length of 4 cm from top view. What is its true length?
a) 3.06 cm
b) 5.22 cm
c) 6.22 cm
d) 2.57 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: True length of line parallel to profile plane and making angle with horizontal
plane can be of two values either from top view or front view but from side view the length
will be given length. As here it is given top view L= 4/cos (40).

with profile has a length of 5 cm from top view. What is its true length?
a) 1.71 cm
b) 14.61 cm
c) 5.32 cm
d) 4.69 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: True length of line parallel to vertical plane and making angle with profile
226
will be given length. As here it is given top view L= 5/sin (20).

with horizontal plane has a length of 5 cm from side view. What is its true length?
a) 3.2 cm
b) 3.8 cm
c) 7.77 cm
d) 6.52 cm
Answer: c
will be given length. As here it is given side view L= 5/cos (50).
5. A line which is parallel to horizontal plane and making an angle of 75 degrees

with vertical has a length of 5 cm from top view. What is its true length?
a) 4.82 cm
b) 1.29 cm
c) 19.31 cm
d) 5 cm
Answer: d
can be of two values either from top view or side view but from front view the length will be
given length. As here it is given top view the length given is true length.
6. A line which is parallel to vertical plane is made to turn to an angle of 50

degrees with horizontal and then turned to an angle of 40 degrees with vertical
plane and now the line has a length of 5 cm from top view. What is its true
length?
a) 7.77 cm
b) 6.52 cm
c) 3.8 cm
d) 3.2 cm
Answer: a
given length. As here it is given top view L=5/cosine (50).
227
7. A line which is parallel to horizontal plane is made to turn to an angle of 35
degrees with vertical and then turned to an angle of 45 degrees with horizontal
plane and now the line has a length of 8.5cm from top view. What is its true
length?
a) 7.37 cm
b) 12.02 cm
c) 10.9 cm
d) 6.01 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: True length of line parallel to horizontal plane and making angle with respect
to horizontal can be of two values either from top view or side view but from front view the
length will be given length. As here it is given top view L= 8.5/cos(45).
8. A line which is parallel to horizontal plane is made to turn to an angle of 35

degrees with vertical and then turned to an angle of 45 degrees with horizontal
plane and now the line has a length of 9 cm from front view. What is its true
length?
a) 7.37 cm
b) 5.16 cm
c) 10.9 cm
d) 15.69 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: True length of line parallel to horizontal plane and making angle with vertical
can be of two values either from front view or side view but from top view the length will be
given length. As here it is given front view L = 9/cos(35).
9. A line parallel to profile plane is held at 30 degrees with horizontal plane and
front view gives 2 cm of length. What is the true length of line?
a) 1 cm
b) 1.73 cm
c) 2.3 cm
d) 4 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: True length of line parallel to profile plane and making angle with horizontal
can be of two values either from top view or front view but from side view the length will be
given length. As here it is given front view L= 2/sin (30).
228
10. A line parallel to vertical plane is held at 35 degrees with horizontal plane and
side view gives 3 cm of length. What is the true length of line?
a) 5.2 cm
b) 3.66 cm
c) 2.45 cm
d) 1.72 cm
Answer: a
given length. As here it is given side view L= 3/sin (35).
11. A line parallel to profile plane is held at 25 degrees with vertical plane and
side view gives 2 cm of length. What is the true length of line?
a) 4.7 cm
b) 2 cm
c) 2.2 cm
d) 0.84 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: True length of line parallel to profile plane and making angle with vertical can
be of two values either from top view or front view but from side view the length will be
given length. As here it is given side view the length will be true length.
12. A line parallel to profile plane is held at 85 degrees with vertical plane and top
view gives 20 cm of length. What is the true length of line?
a) 1.7 cm
b) 229 cm
c) 20.07 cm
d) 19.9 cm
Answer: c
Explanation: True length of line parallel to profile plane and making angle with vertical
plane can be of two values either from top view or front view but from side view the length
will be given length. As here it is given top view L= 20/cos(5).
13. A line parallel to horizontal plane is held at 65 degrees with profile plane and
front view gives 6 cm of length. What is the true length of line?
a) 5.43 cm
b) 14.19 cm
c) 2.5 cm
229
d) 6.62 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: True length of line parallel to horizontal plane and making angle with profile
plane can be of two values either from front view or side view but from top view the length
will be given length. As here it is given front view L= 6/sin (65).
Traces of a Line
1. When a line is inclined to a plane, produced if necessary. The point in which
the line meets the plane is called its ________
a) meeting point
b) locus
c) complete end
d) trace
Answer: d
Explanation: When a line is inclined to a plane, it will meet that plane, produced if
necessary. The point in which the line or line produced meets the plane is called its trace.
Even for planes if extended meet the reference planes at its traces.
2. If a line is parallel to both the horizontal plane and vertical plane. It will have
two traces.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The given statement is false if a line is parallel to both horizontal plane and
vertical plane the line will not meet those planes so the line will not have traces on those
planes but it will have trace on profile plane.
3. If a line meets horizontal plane the point of intersection is called

_____________
a) horizontal trace
b) regular trace
c) parallel trace
d) general trace
Answer: a
Explanation: The point of intersection of a line with horizontal plane is called horizontal
230
trace, usually denoted by H.T. as this the point of intersection of a line with vertical plane is
called vertical trace and denoted by V.T.
4. If a line meets vertical plane the point of intersection is called _____________

a) vertical trace
b) straight trace
c) perpendicular trace
d) general trace
Answer: a
Explanation: The point of intersection of a line with vertical plane is called vertical trace and
denoted by V.T. like this the point of intersection of a line with horizontal plane is called
horizontal trace, usually denoted by H.T.
5. A line is perpendicular to horizontal plane. Its horizontal trace coincides with its
_____ view.
a) front
b) top
c) side
d) isometric
Answer: b
Explanation: If a line is perpendicular to the horizontal plane then its horizontal trace
coincides with its top view which is a point. It has no vertical trace because the line is
parallel to vertical plane the line will not touch the vertical plane.
6. A line is perpendicular to vertical plane. Its vertical trace coincides with its
_____ view.
a) front
b) top
c) side
d) isometric
Answer: a
Explanation: If a line is perpendicular to the vertical plane then its vertical trace coincides
with its front view which is a point. It has no horizontal trace because the line is parallel to
horizontal plane the line will not touch the horizontal plane.
7. If a line has one of its ends in the horizontal plane. Its horizontal trace
coincides with the _________
a) front
231
b) top
c) side
d) isometric
Answer: b
Explanation: As the line cuts the horizontal plane the projection of that line on horizontal
plane coincides from top view and so the horizontal trace which is the point formed by
cutting the line with horizontal plane also coincides with the corresponding projection end.
8. If a line has one of its ends in the vertical plane. Its vertical trace coincides with
the _________
a) front
b) top
c) side
d) isometric
Answer: a
Explanation: As the line cuts the vertical plane the projection of that line on vertical plane
coincides from front view and so the vertical trace which is the point formed by cutting the
line with vertical plane also coincides with the corresponding projection end.
9. If a line parallel to one plane then the line will not have trace on that plane.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Trace is that the point of intersection of line with any plane then the point of
intersection is called the trace of the line with respect to given plane. So a line which is
going to intersect will not be parallel to it.
10. A line AB has its one say B end in horizontal plane and vertical plane then
horizontal trace and vertical trace will coincide in __________line.
a) xy reference
b) vertical reference
c) above xy reference
d) below xy reference
Answer: a
Explanation: Vertical reference will be line formed by profile plane and vertical plane. And if
trace is above or below the xy reference line it would meet vertical or horizontal plane at
only once. So if single end is going to meet both planes it would definitely be on xy
reference line.
232
11. A line AB is parallel to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal plane and held
5 cm apart from vertical plane. The expected trace will be placed at __________
a) above 5 cm from xy reference, on vertical plane
b) below 5 cm from xy reference, on horizontal plane
c) on the xy reference
d) above 5 cm from vertical reference, on vertical plane
Answer: b
Explanation: As the given line is parallel to vertical plane the trace will not be on the vertical
plane. And also given the line is 5 cm apart from the vertical plane and also the line is
parallel to vertical so the trace would lie below 5 cm from xy reference, on horizontal plane.
12. A line AB is placed in such a way that the distance from A and B to vertical
plane are 5 and 10 cm and distances from A and B to horizontal plane are 5 and
10 cm each. The traces would present ______________
a) one on above and other below reference line
b) below the reference line
c) on xy reference line
d) above the reference line
Answer: c
Explanation: As the corresponding distances from vertical plane and horizontal plane are
same we can say the line may act as symmetry for both the vertical and horizontal plane
so the traces would fall on xy reference line.
13. A line AB is placed in such a way that the distance from A and B to vertical
plane are 5 and 10 cm and distances from A and B to horizontal plane are 4 and
8 cm each. The traces would present ______________
a) one on above and other below reference line
b) below the reference line
c) on xy reference line
d) above the reference line
Answer: c
Explanation: As the corresponding distances from vertical plane and horizontal plane are in
same ratio we can say the line may act as symmetry for both the vertical and horizontal
plane so the traces would fall on xy reference line.
Basics of Planes
233
This set of Engineering Drawing Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs)
focuses on “Basics of Planes”.
1. Oblique planes come under ________________
a) planes perpendicular to both reference planes
b) planes perpendicular to one reference plane and inclined to other reference
plane
c) planes inclined to both the reference planes
d) planes parallel to one reference plane and perpendicular to other reference
plane
Answer: c
Explanation: Planes may be divided into two main types. i. Perpendicular planes and ii.
Oblique planes, planes which are held inclined to both the reference planes are called
oblique planes, the rest come under perpendicular planes.
2. The planes which are perpendicular to both the reference plane (horizontal
and vertical) are visible clearly only if we watched from ___________
a) front view
b) top view
c) side view
d) isometric view
Answer: c
Explanation: As the required plane is perpendicular to both horizontal plane and vertical
plane the top view and front view gives a line in projections so only from side which is
perpendicular to both the plane as the required plane the object will appear clearly
isometric view also will not give vivid picture.
3. A plane is held parallel to horizontal plane in which view we can watch drawing
on that plane?
a) Top view
b) Front view
c) Back view
d) Side view
Answer: a
Explanation: If a plane is parallel to one of the reference plane the projection parallel to
plane gives the true shape and size as here plane is parallel to horizontal plane the actual
shape is watched from top view.
234
4. A circle is placed at 20 degrees with vertical the view from top view will be
__________
a) line
b) circle
c) ellipse
d) oval
Answer: c
Explanation: If a circle is parallel to one of the reference plane the projection parallel to
plane gives the true shape and size but here plane is inclined so circle transformed to
ellipse. If observer also inclined along with plane the circle will remain circle only.
5. A square is held 30 degrees with horizontal plane and turned 30 degrees with
respect to vertical plane keeping earlier condition constant. The top view will be
________________
a) line
b) square
c) rectangle
d) parallelogram
Answer: c
Explanation: If a square is parallel to one of the reference plane the projection parallel to
plane gives the true shape and size as here plane is inclined so square transformed to
rectangle and further it turned parallel to observer so no change in shape and size.
6. A square is held 30 degrees with horizontal plane and turned 30 degrees with
respect to vertical plane keeping earlier condition constant. The front view will be
_____________
a) line
b) square
c) rectangle
d) parallelogram
Answer: d
Explanation: If a square is parallel to one of the reference plane the projection parallel to
plane gives the true shape and size as here plane is inclined so square transformed to
rectangle and further it turned inclined in other way which gives parallelogram shape for
square.
7. A triangle is placed perpendicular to both the reference planes (horizontal and

vertical plane) which of the following statement is true.
235
a) Front view-line, top view- triangle
b) Front view-triangle, top view- line
c) Front view –line, top view-line
d) Front view-triangle, side view- line
Answer: c
Explanation: The plane which is perpendicular to both the reference planes (horizontal and
vertical plane) is called profile plane or picture plane. The planes parallel to these have top
view and front view as straight line.
8. When a plane is perpendicular to both the reference planes, its traces are
perpendicular to ______________
a) xy reference line
b) lines on horizontal plane
c) lines on vertical plane
d) lines on given plane
Answer: a
Explanation: When a plane is perpendicular to both the reference planes, its traces are
perpendicular to xy reference line and intersect at xy reference line even when the planes
are inclined with both reference planes the traces intersect at xy line.
9. A plane perpendicular to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal plane then

the vertical trace of that plane will be _____________
a) parallel to horizontal plane
b) perpendicular to horizontal plane
c) parallel to xy reference line
d) inclined to horizontal plane
Answer: d
Explanation: When a plane is perpendicular to one of the reference planes and inclined to
the other, its inclination is shown by the angle which its projection on the plane to which it
is perpendicular, makes with xy. Its projection on the plane to which it is inclined, is smaller
than the plane itself.
10. A plane parallel to vertical plane then which of the following is false
statement.
a) vertical trace will not present
b) horizontal trace is parallel to xy
c) front view give true shape and size
d) top view give true shape and size
236
Answer: d
Explanation: When a plane is parallel to a reference plane, it has no trace on that plane. Its
trace on the other reference plane, to which the earlier reference plane is perpendicular, is
parallel to xy reference line.
11. When a plane is perpendicular to a reference plane, its projection on that

plane shows its true shape and size.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: When a plane is perpendicular to a reference plane, its projection on that
plane is a straight line. When a plane is parallel to a reference plane, its projection on that
plane shows its true shape and size.
12. The traces of plane are not intersecting at xy reference line then the plane is
__________
a) inclined to H.P and perpendicular to V.P
b) parallel to H.P and perpendicular to V.P
c) perpendicular to both reference planes
d) inclined to V.P and perpendicular to H.P
Answer: b
Explanation: When a plane has two traces, they, produced if necessary, intersect in xy
except when both are parallel to xy reference line as in case of some oblique planes. And
in those some specific are plane parallel to one reference and perpendicular to other.
Projection of Planes Parallel to one of the Reference

Plane
1. An equilateral triangle of side 10 cm is held parallel to horizontal plane and
base is parallel to xy reference line. The length of line from front view will be
_____
a) 8.66 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 0 cm
d) 12.47 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Just by visualizing we can get picture and then as the base is parallel to xy
237
reference plane the side view and front view will be a line and front view gives line of length
equal to side of triangle given and side view gives the height of triangle.
2. A square of side 10 cm is held parallel to vertical plane and one diagonal is

perpendicular to xy reference plane. The length of line in top view will be
________
a) 10 cm
b) 14.14 cm
c) 7.07 cm
d) 0 cm
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the square is parallel to vertical plane ad diagonal is perpendicular to
xy reference plane the top view and side gives a line and both of same length which is
equal to diagonal length L= 2 x √(52+52 ) = 14.14 cm.
3. A hexagon is placed parallel to vertical plane which of the following projection

is true?
a) Front view-line, top view- hexagon
b) Front view- hexagon, top view- line
d) Top view- hexagon, side view- line
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a hexagon parallel to vertical plane so the plane containing hexagon in
perpendicular to horizontal plane and profile plane. The top view and side view gives a line
and front view gives the true shape and size of hexagon.
4. A pentagon is placed parallel to horizontal plane which of the following

projection is true?
a) Front view-line, top view- pentagon
b) Front view- pentagon, top view- line
d) Top view- line, side view- line
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a pentagon parallel to horizontal plane so the plane containing
pentagon in perpendicular to vertical plane and profile plane. The front view and side view
gives a line and top view gives the true shape and size of pentagon.
238
5. A rectangle is placed parallel to profile plane which of the following projection
is true?
a) Front view-line, top view- rectangle
b) Front view- rectangle, top view- line
d) Top view- rectangle, side view- line
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a rectangle parallel to profile plane so the plane containing rectangle in
perpendicular to horizontal plane and vertical plane. The top view and front view gives a
line and side view gives the true shape and size of hexagon.
6. A circle is placed parallel to vertical plane which of the following projection is

false?
a) Front view-circle, top view- line
b) Length in top view and side view will be same
c) Circle is perpendicular to horizontal plane
d) The traces of plane containing this circle intersect at xy reference line
Answer: d
Explanation: Given a circle parallel to vertical plane so the plane containing circle in
and front view gives the true shape and size of circle. The traces will intersect at line
formed by intersection of profile plane and horizontal plane.
7. An ellipse is placed parallel to vertical plane which of the following projection is

false?
a) Front view-ellipse, top view- line
b) Length in top view and side view will be same
c) Ellipse is perpendicular to horizontal plane
d) The traces of plane containing this circle will not intersect at xy reference line
Answer: b
Explanation: Given an ellipse parallel to vertical plane so the plane containing ellipse in
and front view gives the true shape and size of hexagon. As the object is ellipse which has
major and minor axis the views show different lengths.
8. While drawing projections if a triangle is parallel to horizontal plane, top should

be drawn first and projections are drawn to it to get front view.
a) True
239
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a triangle parallel to horizontal plane so the front view and side view
gives a line and top view gives the true shape and size of triangle so top view should be
drawn first with specifications given and then projections to further gives the front view.
9. If a plane is parallel to one of the reference plane then the projection onto the
other reference planes would be a line.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: If a plane is only parallel to vertical plane then it is perpendicular to horizontal
plane and profile plane. The top view and side view gives a line and front view gives the
true shape and size of plane.
10. An equilateral triangle of side 10 cm is held parallel to horizontal plane and

base is parallel to xy reference line. The length of line from side view will be
_____
a) 8.66 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 0 cm
d) 12.47 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: Just by visualizing we can get picture and then as the base is parallel to xy
reference plane the side view and front view will be a line and front view gives line of length
equal to side of triangle given and side view gives the height of triangle.
11. A square of side 10 cm is held parallel to vertical plane and one diagonal is
making 45 degrees with xy reference plane. The length of line in top view will be
________
a) 10 cm
b) 14.14 cm
c) 7.07 cm
d) 0 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: Given the square is parallel to vertical plane ad diagonal is making 45
degrees with xy reference plane the top view and side gives a line and both of same length
240
which is equal to length of side of square because in square angle between the diagonal
and side is 45 degrees.
12. The top view, front view and side view of a triangle parallel to vertical plane,
circle parallel to profile plane and rectangle parallel to horizontal plane
respectively are ___________
a) line, circle, line
b) triangle, line, rectangle
c) triangle, line, line
d) line, line, line
Answer: d
Explanation: If a plane is parallel to vertical plane then the top view and side view gives a
line and front view gives the true shape. If a plane is parallel to horizontal plane then the
front view and side view gives a line and top view gives the true shape. If a plane is parallel
to profile plane then the top view and front view gives a line and side view gives the true
shape.
Projection of Planes Inclined to one of the Reference

Plane & Perpendicular to other
1. When a plane is perpendicular to one plane and inclined to other reference
plane then the projections are obtained in 2 stages.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: When a plane is inclined to a reference plane, its projections may be obtained
in 2 stages. In the initial stage, the plane is assumed to be parallel to that reference plane
to which it has to be made inclined. It is then titled to the required inclination in the second
stage.
2. A Square is placed perpendicular to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal

which of the following is true?
a) Front view-line, top view- square
b) Front view- line, top view- rectangle
d) Top view-line, side view- rectangle
Answer: b
241
the other, its inclination is shown by an angle which its projection on the plane to which it is
perpendicular, makes with xy. Its projection on the plane to which it is inclined, is smaller
3. A circle is placed perpendicular to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal

a) Front view-line, top view- circle
b) Front view- circle, top view- circle
d) Top view- ellipse, side view- ellipse
Answer: d
4. A triangle is placed perpendicular to horizontal plane and inclined to vertical

a) Front view-line, top view- triangle
b) Front view- triangle, top view- line
d) Top view-line, side view- line
Answer: b
5. A triangle is placed perpendicular to horizontal plane and inclined to vertical

which of the following is true. H.T is horizontal trace and V.T is vertical trace?
a) H.T- inclined to xy, V.T- inclined to xy
b) H.T- inclined to xy, V.T- perpendicular to xy
c) H.T-inclined to xy, V.T- parallel to xy
d) H.T-parallel to xy, V.T- perpendicular to xy
Answer: b
242
perpendicular, makes with xy.
6. A square is placed perpendicular to vertical plane and inclined to horizontal

plane which of the following is true. H.T is horizontal trace and V.T is vertical
trace?
a) H.T- inclined to xy, V.T- perpendicular to xy
b) H.T- inclined to xy, V.T- perpendicular to xy
c) H.T- perpendicular to xy, V.T- inclined to xy
d) H.T- parallel to xy, V.T- perpendicular to xy
Answer: b
perpendicular, makes with xy.
7. If a square is placed on its base parallel to horizontal plane, and plane

containing square is perpendicular to horizontal plane and inclined to vertical
plane then the top view gives a line of length equal to side of square.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: As given conditions are simple there exist no complication and base is parallel
to horizontal plane so the views may give line and rectangle but not parallelograms. And
line of length equal to side of square.
8. If a plane is perpendicular to vertical and inclined to horizontal plane with 30

degrees then the vertical trace makes _______ degrees with xy reference.
a) 30 degrees
b) 60 degrees
c) 150 degrees
d) 90 degrees
Answer: a
perpendicular, makes with xy. And converse for traces.
9. If a plane is perpendicular to vertical and inclined to horizontal plane with 30

degrees then the horizontal trace makes _______ degrees with xy reference.
243
a) 30 degrees
b) 60 degrees
c) 150 degrees
d) 90 degrees
Answer: d
10. A plane is perpendicular to vertical plane and vertical trace of a plane is

making 55 degrees with the xy plane. Which of the following is false?
a) The plane is inclined 55 degrees with the horizontal plane
b) Front view gives a line
c) Top view gives true shape of plane
d) Horizontal trace is perpendicular to xy plane
Answer: c
11. A rectangle is placed perpendicular to horizontal plane and inclined to profile

plane. The traces would meet at ______________
a) xy reference line
b) vertical reference line
c) the line formed by intersection of profile plane and horizontal plane
d) above the line formed by intersection of profile plane and horizontal plane
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a rectangle is perpendicular to horizontal plane and inclined to profile
plane so the traces would meet on the line formed by intersection of profile plane and
horizontal plane or the point of intersection of all planes.
12. A pentagon is placed perpendicular to horizontal plane and inclined to profile

plane which of the following is true.
a) Front view-line, top view- pentagon
b) Front view- pentagon, top view- line
d) Top view-line, side view- line
Answer: b
244
13. A hexagon is placed perpendicular to profile plane and inclined to horizontal

plane which of the following is true.
a) Front view-line, top view- hexagon
b) Front view- hexagon, top view- line
d) Top view-hexagon, side view- line
Answer: d
Projection of Oblique Plane

1. If a plane is inclined with both the reference plane then the plane come under
____________
a) auxiliary plane
b) oblique plane
c) perpendicular plane
d) cross planes
Answer: b
Explanation: Sometimes every detail can’t be understood if the view falls on only reference
planes so then auxiliary planes help in finding unknown measure there is no such rule it
should incline to both references but oblique planes are inclined to both the reference
planes.
2. If a plane is inclined to both the reference planes then the traces would meet
at _________ line except the plane perpendicular to picture plane.
a) XY reference
b) Vertical reference
c) Above the XY reference plane
d) Below the XY reference plane
245
Answer: a
Explanation: If a plane is perpendicular to picture plane which perpendicular to both the
reference planes the vertical trace and horizontal trace will not intersect on xy reference
line but intersect on vertical reference line.
3. When a surface of the plane is inclined to the H.P and an edge is parallel to
the H.P and inclined to V.P. The projections are drawn in 2 stages.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Initially the pane is assumed to be parallel to the H.P and an edge
perpendicular to the V.P. then tilted so as to make required angle with H.P. Finally the
plane is made to rotate up to required angle with V.P.
4. A square is placed in between the reference planes in such a way that one
diagonal is inclined to H.P and another diagonal inclined to V.T. Projections are
drawn. The front views in 1, 2 and 3 stages are _______ _________ and
__________ respectively.
a) line, line, parallelogram
b) line, parallelogram, line
c) square, line, parallelogram
d) square, rhombus, rhombus
Answer: a
Explanation: As initially the plane is assumed to be parallel to H.P the front view will be line
and then the plane is tilted with respect to H.P to required angle the front view (line makes
angle with H.P) remains line. Finally the plane is tilted with respect to V.P then
parallelogram will form in front view.
5. A square is placed in between the reference planes in such a way that one
diagonal is inclined to H.P and another diagonal inclined to V.T. Projections are
drawn. The top views in 1, 2 and 3 stages are _______ _________ and
c) square, line, parallelogram
d) square, rhombus, rhombus
Answer: d
Explanation: As initially the plane is assumed to be parallel to H.P the top view will be
246
square and then the plane is tilted with respect to H.P to required angle the top view will be
square compressed to rhombus. Finally the plane is tilted with respect to V.P then rhombus
will just turn w.r.t V.P.
6. A rectangular plane surface of size 60 x 30 cm is positioned in the first

quadrant and is inclined at an angle of 60 degrees with the H.P and 30 degrees
with the V.P. The front views while drawing projections in 1, 2 and 3 stages are
_______ _________ and __________ respectively.
c) rectangle, square, square
d) rectangle, square, parallelogram
Answer: a
angle with H.P) remains line. Finally the plane is tilted with respect to V.P then
parallelogram will form in front view.
7. A rectangular plane surface of size 60 x 30 cm is positioned in the first

quadrant and is inclined at an angle of 60 degrees with the H.P and 30 degrees
with the V.P. The top views while drawing projections in 1, 2 and 3 stages are
_______ _________ and __________ respectively.
Answer: c
rectangle and then the plane is tilted with respect to H.P to 60 degrees angle the top view
will be rectangle compressed to square (60 x cos (60)= 30). Finally the plane is tilted with
respect to V.P then square will just turn w.r.t V.P.
8. An equilateral triangle is positioned in the first quadrant and is inclined at an

angle of 30 degrees with the H.P and 30 degrees with the V.P. The front views
while drawing projections in 1, 2 and 3 stages are _______
_________ and __________ respectively.
a) line, equilateral triangle, line
b) line, line, scalene triangle
247
c) equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle, isosceles triangle
d) equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle, scalene triangle
Answer: b
angle with H.P) remains line. Finally the plane is tilted with respect to V.P then scalene
triangle will form in front view.
9. An equilateral triangle is positioned in the first quadrant and is inclined at an

angle of 30 degrees with the H.P and 30 degrees with the V.P. The top views
while drawing projections in 1, 2 and 3 stages are _______ _________ and
a) line, equilateral triangle, line
b) line, line, scalene triangle
c) equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle, isosceles triangle
d) equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle, scalene triangle
Answer: c
equilateral triangle and then the plane is tilted with respect to H.P to required angle the top
view will be equilateral triangle compressed to isosceles triangle. Finally the plane is tilted
with respect to V.P then isosceles triangle will just turn w.r.t V.P.
10. When a surface of the plane is inclined to the V.P and an edge is parallel to
the V.P and inclined to H.P. The projections are drawn in 3 stages.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Initially the pane is assumed to be parallel to the V.P and an edge
perpendicular to the H.P. then tilted so as to make required angle with V.P. Finally the
plane is made to rotate up to required angle with H.P.
11. A rectangular plate of sides 60 x 30 cm has its shorter side in the V.P,
inclined to 60 degrees with V.P and 30 degrees with the H.P. The front view
while drawing projections in 1, 2 and 3 are ______ ________ and ________
respectively.
248
Answer: c
Explanation: As initially the plane is assumed to be parallel to V.P the front view will be
rectangle and then the plane is tilted with respect to V.P to 60 degrees angle the top view
will be rectangle compressed to square (60 x cos (60)= 30). Finally the plane is tilted with
respect to H.P then square will just turn w.r.t H.P.
12. A rectangular plate of sides 60 x 30 cm has its shorter side in the V.P,
inclined to 60 degrees with V.P and 30 degrees with the H.P. The top view while
drawing projections in 1, 2 and 3 are ______ ________ and ________
respectively.
Answer: a
Explanation: As initially the plane is assumed to be parallel to V.P the top view will be line
and then the plane is tilted with respect to V.P to required angle the top view (line makes
angle with V.P) remains line. Finally the plane is tilted with respect to H.P then
parallelogram will form in top view.
13. A circular surface plane is making 30 degrees with both H.P and V.P. The
front view will be _________
a) line
b) circle
c) oval
d) ellipse
Answer: d
Explanation: While drawing projections in the 1 st stage the front view and top view will be
either line or circle and in 2nd stage the front and top view will be line and ellipse and in
3rdstage the front and top view will ellipse both.
Basics of Solids
1. The minimum number of orthographic view required to represent a solid on flat
surface is _________
a) 1
249
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: A solid has 3 dimensions length, breadth and thickness. A single view
represents any of the two dimensions of a solid and other represents, other set of two
dimensions, so that we can understand whole geometry.
Polyhedron Number of faces
1. Triangular Prism i. 6
2. Tetrahedron ii. 5
3. Octahedron iii. 4
4. Cube iv. 8
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, i; 4, iii
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: b
Explanation: A polyhedron is defined as a solid bounded by planes called faces. Prism is a
polyhedron having two equal and similar faces (bases or ends), parallel to each other and
joined by other faces which are rectangles.
Prisms Number of edges
250
1. Triangular i. 18
2. Square ii. 15
3. Pentagon iii. 9
4. Hexagonal iv. 12
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, iii; 2, ii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, iii; 2, iv; 3, ii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: c
Explanation: Prism is a polyhedron having two equal and similar faces (bases or ends),
parallel to each other and joined by other faces which are rectangles. So there exist 3 x
number of sides of base of edges in prism.
4. The number of corners that exist in pyramids is 1+ number of sides of base.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: A pyramid is a polyhedron having a plane figure as a base and a number of
triangular faces meeting at a point called vertex or apex. The imaginary lie joining the apex
with the center of the base is its axis.
Prisms Number of vertices
1. Triangular i. 12
2. Square ii. 10
251
3. Pentagon iii. 6
4. Hexagonal iv. 8
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, iii; 2, ii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, iii; 2, iv; 3, ii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: c
Explanation: Prism is a polyhedron which has two equal faces (bases or ends), parallel to
each other and joined by other faces which are rectangles. So there exist 2 x number of
sides of base of vertices in prism.
6. Solid of revolution gets same shapes in at least two in three orthographic

views.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: Solids of revolutions are formed by revolving particular shaped plane surface
about particular axis or about one of sides of plane surface so generally because of this
any two orthographic views look similar.
7. If a right angled triangle is made to revolute about one of its perpendicular

sides the solid formed is ________
a) cube
b) triangular prism
c) cone
d) cylinder
Answer: c
Explanation: A right circular cone is a solid generated by the revolution of a right angled
triangle about one of its perpendicular sides which is fixed. It has one circular base and
one vertex. Its axis joins the vertex to center of circle (base) to which it is perpendicular.
252
Polyhedron Number of faces
1. Triangular Prism i. 8
2. Tetrahedron ii. 9
3. Octahedron iii. 6
4. Cube iv. 12
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, i; 4, iii
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: b
Explanation: A polyhedron is defined as a solid bounded by planes called faces. Prism is a
polyhedron having two equal and similar faces (bases or ends), parallel to each other and
joined by other faces which are rectangles.
1. Triangular i. 7
2. Square ii. 6
3. Pentagon iii. 5
253
4. Hexagonal iv. 4
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, iii; 2, ii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, iii; 2, iv; 3, ii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: d
triangular faces meeting at a point called vertex or apex. So there exists 1+ number of
sides of base of vertices in pyramid. In pyramid the number of vertices is equal to number
of faces.
1. Triangular i. 12
2. Square ii. 8
3. Pentagon iii. 6
4. Hexagonal iv. 10
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, iii; 2, ii; 3, iv; 4, i
c) 1, iii; 2, iv; 3, ii; 4, i
d) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
Answer: b
triangular faces meeting at a point called vertex or apex. The imaginary lie joining the apex
with the center of the base is its axis. So there exists 2 x number of sides of base of edges
in pyramid.
254
11. When a pyramid or a cone is cut by a plane parallel to its base, thus
removing the top portion, the remaining portion is called ___________
a) cylinder
b) frustum
c) prism
d) polyhedron
Answer: b
Explanation: When a pyramid or a cone is cut by a plane parallel to its base, thus removing
the top portion, the remaining portion is called its frustum. When a solid is cut by a plane
inclined to the base it is said to be truncated.
12. Straight lines drawn from the apex to the circumference of the base-circle are
all equal and are called ____________
a) edges
b) connecting lines
c) projectors
d) generators
Answer: d
Explanation: In a cone the straight lines drawn from the apex to the circumference of the
base-circle are all equal and are called generators of the cone. The length of the generator
is the slant height of the cone.
13. The solid formed by 12 equal and regular pentagons as faces is called
__________
a) plantonic solid
b) dodacahedron
c) Icosahedron
d) pyritohedron
Answer: b
Explanation: Plantonic solid is a regular convex polyhedron. Dodecahedron is one of the
plantonic solid. Icosahedron is a solid which has twenty equal sized equilateral triangles as
faces. Pyritohedron is the irregular dodecahedron.
Projection of Solids in Simple Position

1. If a solid is positioned that its axis is perpendicular to one of the reference
plane. Which of the following is false?
255
a) Axis is parallel to other reference plane
b) Base is parallel to reference plane
c) Projection on that plane gives true shape of its base
d) Base is perpendicular to horizontal plane
Answer: d
Explanation: If solid’s axis is perpendicular to H.P the base is parallel to H.P and projection
on to the H.P gives the true shape of base and similar to V.P and P.P. But here in question
it is not specified that given solid’s axis is perpendicular to V.P.
2. If a solid’s axis is perpendicular to one of the reference planes then the

projection of solid on to the same plane gives the true shape and size of its
___________
a) lateral geometry
b) base
c) cross-section
d) surface
Answer: b
Explanation: As in the planes, if the plane is parallel to one of the reference plane then
projection of plane on to the same plane gives the true shape and size of the plane
likewise the solid’s base is parallel to reference plane the projection gives the true shape of
the base.
3. When the axis of solid is perpendicular to H.P, the ______view should be

drawn first and ____ view then projected from it.
a) front , top
b) top, side
c) side, front
d) top, front
Answer: d
Explanation: When the axis of solid is perpendicular to H.P it is indirectly saying that the
base is parallel to the horizontal plane so the projection on to it gives true shape of base
and then we can project and find the other dimensions.
4. When the axis of solid is perpendicular to V.P, the ______view should be

drawn first and ____ view then projected from it.
a) front , top
b) top, side
c) side, front
256
d) top, front
Answer: a
Explanation: When the axis of solid is perpendicular to V.P it is indirectly saying that the
base is parallel to the vertical plane so the projection on to it gives true shape of base and
then we can project and find the other dimensions.
5. When the axis of solid is parallel to H.P &V.P, then ______view should be
drawn first and ____ and _______view then projected from it.
a) front , top, side
b) top, side, front
c) side, front, top
d) top, front, side
Answer: c
Explanation: When the axis of solid is parallel to H.P, V.P then it is indirectly saying that it
is perpendicular to picture plane so base is parallel to the profile plane so the projection on
to it gives true shape of base and then we can projections of front and top can be drawn.
6. The front view, side view and top view of a regular square pyramid standing on
horizontal plane base on horizontal plane.
a) triangle, triangle and square
b) square, triangle and triangle
c) square, triangle and square
d) triangle, square and triangle
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a square pyramid made to stand on horizontal plane on its base, in
which position the pyramid may place like this the front view and side gives triangle in
particular isosceles triangle as pyramid given is regular one and top view gives square.
7. The front view, side view and top view of a cylinder standing on horizontal
plane base on horizontal plane.
a) circle, rectangle and rectangle
b) rectangle, rectangle and circle
c) rectangle, circle and rectangle
d) circle, triangle and triangle
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a cylinder made to stand on horizontal plane on its base, in which
position the pyramid may place like this the front view and side gives rectangle and top
view gives circle as the projection of top view is projection of base.
257
8. The side view, top view and front view of a regular hexagonal pyramid placed
base parallel to profile plane.
a) Triangle, triangle and hexagon
b) hexagon, triangle and triangle
c) hexagon, triangle and hexagon
d) triangle, hexagon and triangle
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a regular hexagonal pyramid made to place on profile plane on its
base, in which position the pyramid may place like this the top view and front gives triangle
in particular isosceles triangle as pyramid given is regular one and side view gives
hexagon.
9. The side view, top view and front view of a regular cone placed base parallel
to profile plane.
a) Triangle, triangle and circle
b) circle, triangle and triangle
c) rectangle, triangle and circle
d) triangle, circle and triangle
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a regular cone made to place parallel to profile plane on its base, in
which position the cone may place like this the front view and top gives triangle in particular
isosceles triangle as cone given is regular one and side view gives square.
10. The side view, top view and front view of a regular pentagonal prism placed
axis perpendicular to vertical plane.
a) rectangle, rectangle and pentagon
b) pentagon, rectangle and rectangle
c) pentagon, rectangle and pentagon
d) rectangle, pentagon and rectangle
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a regular pentagonal prism made to place its axis perpendicular to
vertical plane so its base is parallel to vertical plane, in which position the pyramid may
place like this the top view and side gives rectangle and front view gives square.
11. Square pyramid, cylinder, triangular prism, cone are placed one next to other
in between the reference planes in different positions given below match the
following.
258
Position of solids Front View
1. Square pyramid- axis perpendicular to V.P i. Rectangle
2. Cylinder- base parallel to profile plane ii. Circle
3. Triangular prism – axis perpendicular to H.P iii. Square
4. Cone- base parallel to V.P iv. Triangle
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iii; 2, i; 3, iv; 4, ii
Answer: d
Explanation: If base of solid is parallel to one of the reference planes then its axis
perpendicular to that plane and vice versa. Cone is formed by revolving triangle about one
of its perpendicular side of triangle. Cylinder is formed by revolving rectangle about one of
its sides.
12. Pentagonal pyramid, tetrahedron, cuboid and cone are placed one next to
other in between the reference planes in different positions given below match
the following.
1. Pentagonal pyramid- axis perpendicular to H.P i. Smallest base
2. Tetrahedron- base parallel to vertical plane ii. Pentagon
259
3. Cuboid – smallest side parallel to H.P iii. Triangle
4. Cone- base parallel to P.P (profile plane) iv. Pentagon
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, ii
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iii; 2, i; 3, iv; 4, ii
Answer: b
perpendicular to that plane and vise versa. Profile plane is perpendicular to both horizontal
and vertical plane. Tetrahedron is solid formed by 4 equal triangular planes.
13. Square prism, hexagonal pyramid, cube, sphere are placed one next to other
in between the reference planes in different positions given below match the
following.
1. Square prism- axis perpendicular to V.P i. Circle
2. Hexagonal pyramid- base parallel to H.P ii. Rectangle
3. Triangular prism – axis perpendicular to P.P iii. Triangle
4. Sphere iv. Triangle
a) 1, i; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, iv
b) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, ii; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
d) 1, iii; 2, i; 3, iv; 4, ii
Answer: c
260
perpendicular to that plane and vise versa. Sphere gives all view as circle. Square prism is
similar to cuboid. Prism is a polyhedron having two equal and similar faces called its
bases.
Projections of Solids with Axis Inclined to Vertical Plane

and Parallel to Horizontal Plane
1. When a solid is placed such that axis is inclined with the V.P and parallel to
the H.P. Its projections are drawn in ___________ stages.
a) 1
b) 4
c) 2
d) 3
Answer: c
Explanation: In the initial stage, the axis is kept perpendicular to the V.P and parallel to H.P
and projections are drawn and then turning the axis to given angle of rotation with V.P and
then again projections are based on previous vertices and edges.
2. A hexagonal pyramid first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to H.P
and one edge AB parallel to V.P and then next this is turned about its axis so the
base AB is now making some angle with V.P. The top view for previous and later
one will be having same shape.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is just rotated around itself and given the
axis is perpendicular to H.P so the top view gives the true shape and size of its base but
the base is just rotated to its given angle shape will not change.
3. A regular cone first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to V.P and
next this is tilted such that its base is making some acute angle with V.P. The top
view for previous and later one will be.
a) Triangle, triangle
b) irregular shape of circle and triangle, triangle
c) triangle, irregular shape of circle and triangle
d) circle, triangle
261
Answer: a
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is just tilted to some angle with V.P and
previously given the axis is perpendicular to V.P so the top view gives the triangle and next
with some given angle shape will not change.
4. A regular cone first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to V.P and
next this is tilted such that its base is making some acute angle with V.P. The
front view for previous and later one will be having same shape.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is just tilted to some angle with V.P and
previously given the axis is perpendicular to V.P so the front view gives the circle and next
with some given angle shape will change to some irregular shape of circle and triangle.
5. A regular pentagon prism first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to
V.P and one edge is parallel to H.P and next this is tilted such that its axis is
making some acute angle with V.P. The front view for previous and later one will
be ____________________
a) pentagon, pentagon
b) rectangle, pentagon
c) pentagon, irregular hexagon
d) irregular hexagon, pentagon
Answer: c
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is made acute angle with V.P and
previously given the axis is perpendicular to V.P so the front view gives the pentagon and
next with some given angle shape will change to irregular hexagon.
6. A cylinder first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to V.P and next
this is tilted such that its axis is making some acute angle with V.P. The front
view for previous and later one will be ____________
a) circle, rectangle with circular ends
c) rectangle with circular ends, rectangle
d) circle, rectangle
Answer: a
262
previously given the axis is perpendicular to V.P so the front view gives the circle and next
with some given angle shape will change to rectangle with circular ends.
7. A cylinder first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to V.P and next
this is tilted such that its axis is making some acute angle with V.P. The top view
for previous and later one will be ____________
Answer: b
previously given the axis is perpendicular to V.P so the top view gives the rectangle and
next with some given angle shape will not change but just tilt to given angle.
8. A triangular pyramid is placed such that its axis is perpendicular to V.P and
one of its base’s edges is parallel to H.P the front view and top view will be
_____________
a) Triangle of base, triangle due to slanting side
b) Triangle due to slanting side, triangle of base
c) Triangle of base, rhombus
d) Rhombus, triangle of base
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a triangular pyramid which means the projection to its base gives
triangle shape and other orthographic views give triangle. Here given is pyramid whose
axis is perpendicular to V.P so its front view will be triangle of its base and top view will be
another different triangle.
9. A square pyramid is placed such that its axis is inclined to V.P and one of its
base’s edges is parallel to H.P the front view and top view will be
_____________
a) Square, Isosceles triangle
b) Irregular pentagon, square
c) Irregular pentagon, isosceles triangle
d) Pentagon, equilateral triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a square pyramid which means the projection to its base gives square
shape and other orthographic views give triangle. Here given is pyramid whose axis is
263
inclined to V.P so its front view will be irregular pentagon and top view will be isosceles
triangle.
10. A square prism is placed such that its axis is inclined to V.P and one of its
base’s edges is parallel to H.P the front view and top view will be
______________
a) Square, irregular polygon
b) Irregular polygon, rectangle
c) Rectangle, irregular polygon
d) Pentagon, square
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a square prism which means the projection to its base gives square
shape and other orthographic views give rectangle. Here given is prism whose axis is
inclined to V.P so its top view will be rectangle and front view will be irregular polygon.
11. A regular cone having its axis parallel to H.P and perpendicular to V.P at first
but then the cone’s axis keeping parallel to H.P and rotated such that its new axis
is perpendicular to previous axis. The front view of the previous and later one is
_____________
a) Circle, triangle
b) Circle, triangle with circular base
c) Triangle, triangle
d) Circle, circle
Answer: a
Explanation: Given a regular cone which means the projection to its base gives circle
shape and other orthographic views give triangle. But here given is inclination it may give
irregular shape in its front view if the angle is acute angle but here given is 90 degrees so
we get triangle.
12. A regular cone having its axis parallel to H.P and perpendicular to V.P at first
but then the cone’s axis keeping parallel to H.P and rotated such that its new axis
is perpendicular to previous axis. The top view of the previous and later one is
______________
a) Circle, triangle
b) Circle, triangle with circular base
c) Triangle, triangle
d) Circle, circle
Answer: c
264
shape and other orthographic views give triangle. But here given is inclination it may
change shape in its front view but in top view it just totally rotated as per given angle.
13. A tetrahedron is made to place on V.P that is with its axis perpendicular to it
and one of the edges of base parallel to H.P and then the tetrahedron is made to
rotate w.r.t to V.P up to an acute angle. The top view of previous and later one is
__________
a) isosceles triangle, isosceles triangle
b) equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle
c) equilateral triangle, square
d) square, irregular polygon of 4 sides
Answer: a
Explanation: As normal a tetrahedron gives equilateral triangle for project to its base and
isosceles triangle for other view when placed without inclination but here inclination is
given but given view is top view so the shape will not change but rotate to given angle.
Projection of Solids with Axis Inclined to Horizontal Plane

and Parallel to Vertical Plane
1. When a solid is placed such that axis is inclined with the H.P and parallel to
the V.P. Its projections are drawn in __________ stages.
a) 1
b) 4
c) 2
d) 3
Answer: c
Explanation: In the initial stage, the axis is kept perpendicular to the H.P and parallel to V.P
and projections are drawn and then turning the axis to given angle of rotation with H.P and
then again projections are based on previous vertices and edges.
2. A hexagonal pyramid first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to V.P
and one edge AB parallel to H.P and then next this is turned about its axis so the
base AB is now making some angle with H.P. The top view for previous and later
one will be having different shapes.
a) True
b) False
265
Answer: b
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is just rotated around itself and given the
axis is perpendicular to V.P so the top view gives the true shape and size of its base but
the base is just rotated to its given angle shape will not change.
3. A regular cone first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to H.P and
next this is tilted such that its base is making some acute angle with H.P. The top
view for previous and later one will be ____________
a) triangle, triangle
b) irregular shape of circle and triangle, triangle
c) circle, irregular shape of circle and triangle
d) circle, triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is just tilted to some angle with H.P and
previously given the axis is perpendicular to H.P so the top view gives the triangle and next
with some given angle shape will change to irregular shape of circle and triangle.
4. A regular cone first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to H.P and
next this is tilted such that its base is making some acute angle with H.P. The
front view for previous and later one will be having same shape.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is just tilted to some angle with H.P and
previously given the axis is perpendicular to H.P so the front view gives the triangle and
next with some given angle shape will not change but just rotate.
5. A regular pentagon prism first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to
H.P and one edge is parallel to V.P and next this is tilted such that its axis is
making some acute angle with H.P. The front view for previous and later one will
be _____________
a) pentagon, rectangle
b) rectangle, pentagon
c) rectangle, rectangle
d) irregular hexagon, pentagon
Answer: c
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is made acute angle with H.P and
266
previously given the axis is perpendicular to H.P so the front view gives the rectangle and
next with some given angle shape will rotate totally.
6. A cylinder first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to H.P and next
this is tilted such that its axis is making some acute angle with H.P. The top view
for previous and later one will be ____________
Answer: a
Explanation: For given positions of solid the solid is made acute angle with H.P and
previously given the axis is perpendicular to H.P so the front view gives the circle and next
with some given angle shape will change to rectangle with circular ends.
7. A cylinder first placed in such a way its axis is perpendicular to H.P and next
this is tilted such that its axis is making some acute angle with H.P. The front
view for previous and later one will be __________
Answer: b
previously given the axis is perpendicular to V.P so the top view gives the rectangle and
next with some given angle shape will not change but just tilt to given angle.
8. A triangular pyramid is placed such that its axis is perpendicular to H.P and
one of its base’s edges is parallel to H.P the front view and top view will be
_________________
a) Triangle of base, triangle due to slanting side
b) Triangle due to slanting side, triangle of base
c) Triangle of base, rhombus
d) Rhombus, triangle of base
Answer: b
Explanation: Given a triangular pyramid which means the projection to its base gives
triangle of base and other orthographic views give triangle due to slanting sides. Here
267
given is pyramid whose axis is perpendicular to H.P so its front view will be triangle due to
sides and top view will be triangle of base.
9. A square pyramid is placed such that its axis is inclined to H.P and one of its
base’s edges is parallel to V.P the front view and top view will be
______________
a) Square, Isosceles triangle
b) Irregular pentagon, square
c) Isosceles triangle, irregular pentagon
d) Pentagon, equilateral triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a square pyramid which means the projection to its base gives square
shape and other orthographic views give triangle. Here given is pyramid whose axis is
inclined to H.P so its front view will be isosceles triangle and top view will be square.
10. A square prism is placed such that its axis is inclined to H.P and one of its
base’s edges is parallel to V.P the front view and top view will be ____________
a) square, irregular polygon
b) irregular polygon, square
c) square, rectangle
d) rectangle, irregular polygon
Answer: d
Explanation: Given a square prism which means the projection to its base gives square
shape and other orthographic views give rectangle. Here given is prism whose axis is
inclined to H.P so its front view will be rectangle and top view will be irregular polygon.
11. A regular cone having its axis parallel to V.P and perpendicular to H.P at first
but then the cone’s axis keeping parallel to V.P and rotated such that its new axis
is perpendicular to previous axis. The front view of the previous and later one is
______________
a) circle, triangle
b) circle, triangle with circular base
c) triangle, triangle
d) circle, circle
Answer: c
shape and other orthographic views give triangle. But here given is inclination it may give
268
irregular shape in its top view if the angle give is acute but given angle is 90 degrees so it
gives perfect shapes.
12. A regular cone having its axis parallel to V.P and perpendicular to H.P at first
but then the cone’s axis keeping parallel to V.P and rotated such that its new axis
is perpendicular to previous axis. The top view of the previous and later one is
___________
a) circle, triangle
b) circle, triangle with circular base
c) triangle, triangle
d) circle, circle
Answer: a
shape and other orthographic views give triangle. But here given is inclination of 90
degrees so previous ones will be circle and later one will be triangle.
13. A tetrahedron is made to place on H.P that is with its axis perpendicular to it
and one of the edges of base parallel to V.P and then the tetrahedron is made to
rotate w.r.t to H.P up to an acute angle. The top view of previous and later one is
_____________
a) isosceles triangle, Isosceles triangle
b) equilateral triangle, isosceles triangle
c) equilateral triangle, square
d) square, irregular polygon of 4 sides
Answer: b
Explanation: As normal a tetrahedron gives equilateral triangle for project to its base and
isosceles triangle for other view when placed without inclination but here inclination is
given but given view is top view so the shape will change to isosceles triangle.
Projection of Solids with Axes Inclined to both Horizontal

and Vertical Plane
1. When a solid is placed such that axis is inclined with both the H.P and V.P. Its
projections are drawn in __________ stages.
a) 1
b) 4
c) 2
269
d) 3
Answer: d
Explanation: The stages are i) keeping in simple position, ii) Axis inclined to one plane and
parallel to the other, iii) Final position. The 2nd and 3rd positions may be obtained either by
the alteration of the positions of the solid i.e. view or reference lines.
2. The front views of 1st, 2nd and final stages of square prism, has its axis inclined
at 45 degrees with H.P and has an edge of its base on H.P and inclined 30
degrees with V.P while drawing orthographic projections are _______________
a) Rectangle, rectangle, hexagon
b) Square, rectangle, rectangle
c) Rectangle, rectangle, octagon
d) Square, rectangle, hexagon
Answer: a
Explanation: As the 1st stage is to keep the solid in simple position and given is front view it
is rectangle and then rotated to an angle of 45 degrees with H.P which again gives
rectangle and then rotating 30 degrees with V.P which gives an irregular hexagon.
3. The top views of 1st, 2nd and final stages of square prism, has its axis inclined at
45 degrees with H.P and has an edge of its base on H.P and inclined 30 degrees
with V.P while drawing orthographic projections are ______________
a) Rectangle, rectangle, hexagon
b) Square, rectangle, rectangle
c) Rectangle, rectangle, octagon
d) Square, rectangle, hexagon
Answer: b
Explanation: As the 1st stage is to keep the solid in simple position and given is top view it
is square and then rotated to an angle of 45 degrees with H.P which gives rectangle and
then rotating 30 degrees with V.P which gives again rectangle.
4. The top views of 1st, 2nd and final stages of regular cone, has its axis inclined at
30 degrees with H.P and 45 degrees with V.P while drawing orthographic
projections are _________________
a) Circle, triangle, triangle
b) Circle, triangle with base as ellipse, triangle with base as ellipse
c) Triangle, triangle, triangle with base as ellipse
d) Triangle, triangle, triangle
Answer: b
270
Explanation: As the 1st stage is to keep the solid in simple position and given is top view it
is circle and then rotated to an angle of 30 degrees with H.P which gives triangle with base
as ellipse and then rotating 45 degrees with V.P which gives again triangle with base as
ellipse.
5. The front views of 1st, 2nd and final stages of regular cone, has its axis inclined
at 30 degrees with H.P and 45 degrees with V.P while drawing orthographic
projections are __________
a) Circle, triangle, triangle
b) Circle, triangle with base as ellipse, triangle with base as ellipse
c) Triangle, triangle, triangle with base as ellipse
d) Triangle, triangle, triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: As the 1st stage is to keep the solid in simple position and given is front view it
is triangle and then rotated to an angle of 30 degrees with H.P which again gives triangle
and then rotating 45 degrees with V.P which gives triangle with base as ellipse.
6. The front views of 1st, 2nd and final stages of a pentagonal pyramid, has one
of its triangular faces in the V.P and edge of the base contained by that face
makes an angle of 30 degrees with the H.P while drawing orthographic
projections are _____________
a) Pentagon, irregular pentagon, irregular pentagon
b) Triangle, irregular pentagon, irregular pentagon
c) Triangle, triangle, irregular pentagon
d) Pentagon, triangle, irregular pentagon
Answer: a
Explanation: As the 1st stage is to keep the solid in simple position for given conditions the
solid’s base should be placed on V.P so front view gives pentagon and then rotated so as
to one of the face touch the V.P now the view will become irregular pentagon and then
adjust so that edge of base on V.P makes 30 degrees with H.P so it show irregular
pentagon from front view.
7. The top views of 1st, 2nd and final stages of a pentagonal pyramid, has one of its
triangular faces in the V.P and edge of the base contained by that face makes an
angle of 30 degrees with the H.P while drawing orthographic projections are
_____________
a) Pentagon, irregular pentagon, irregular pentagon
b) Triangle, irregular pentagon, irregular pentagon
271
c) Triangle, triangle, irregular pentagon
d) Pentagon, triangle, irregular pentagon
Answer: c
Explanation: As the 1st stage is to keep the solid in simple position for given conditions the
solid’s base should be placed on V.P so top view gives triangle and then rotated so as to
one of the face touch the V.P now the view will remain triangle and then adjust so that
edge of base on V.P makes 30 degrees with H.P so it show irregular pentagon from top.
8. A cube is resting on H.P on one of its corners with a solid diagonal

perpendicular to the V.P. What are the front views of 1st, 2nd, 3rd stages while
drawing orthographic projections?
a) Rectangle, rectangle, regular hexagon
b) Square, irregular hexagon, irregular hexagon
c) Rectangle, rectangle, irregular hexagon
d) Square, regular hexagon, regular hexagon
Answer: a
Explanation: As in the 1st stage the cube is to placed in the position occurred when the
diagonal of base perpendicular to V.P so front view gives rectangle and then rotated so as
to keep one of the corners only on H.P so the front view will be rectangle then if we make
diagonal perpendicular to V.P the front view will be regular hexagon.
9. A cube is resting on H.P on one of its corners with a solid diagonal

perpendicular to the V.P. What are the top views of 1st, 2nd, 3rd stages while
drawing orthographic projections?
a) Rectangle, rectangle, regular hexagon
b) Square, irregular hexagon, irregular hexagon
c) Rectangle, rectangle, irregular hexagon
d) Square, regular hexagon, regular hexagon
Answer: b
Explanation: As in the 1st stage the cube is to be placed in the position occurred when the
diagonal of base perpendicular to V.P so top view gives square and then rotated so as to
keep one of the corners only on H.P so the top view will be irregular hexagon then if we
make diagonal perpendicular to V.P the top view will be irregular hexagon.
10. A pentagonal prism is resting on H.P on one of its corners and from top view
the solid’s axis is making 30 degrees with the xy reference line. What are the top
views of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd stages of orthographic drawing?
a) Rectangle, rectangle, heptagon
272
b) Pentagon, heptagon, heptagon
c) Rectangle, heptagon, rectangle
d) Pentagon, rectangle, heptagon
Answer: b
Explanation: As in the 1st stage the pentagonal prism is to be placed in simple position the
axis perpendicular to V.P so top view gives pentagon and then rotated so as to keep one of
the corners only on H.P so the top view will be irregular heptagon then adjusting the axis
so as to make 30 degrees with xy reference line so top view remain same.
11. A pentagonal prism is resting on H.P on one of its corners and from top view
the solid’s axis is making 30 degrees with the xy reference line. What are the
front views of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd stages of orthographic drawing?
a) Rectangle, rectangle, heptagon
b) Pentagon, heptagon, heptagon
c) Rectangle, heptagon, rectangle
d) Pentagon, rectangle, heptagon
Answer: a
Explanation: As in the 1st stage the pentagonal prism is to be placed in simple position the
axis perpendicular to V.P so front view gives rectangle and then rotated so as to keep one
of the corners only on H.P so the front view will remain same then from projections of top
view the front is drawn so a irregular heptagon will form.
12. A pentagonal pyramid is placed on H.P on one of its base’s edge and the
triangular surface containing the edge on which it is resting is making 45 degrees
with H.P. Draw orthographic views and what are the top views of 1 st, 2nd,
3rd stages?
a) Triangle, triangle, irregular pentagon
b) Pentagon, irregular polygon of 4 sides, irregular polygon of 4 sides
c) Triangle, triangle, irregular polygon of 4 sides
d) Pentagon, irregular pentagon, irregular pentagon
Answer: b
Explanation: In the 1st stage the solid’s axis is perpendicular to H.P and one base’s edge is
perpendicular to V.P. so the top view will be pentagon and then made to rest on only one
edge so top view will be irregular polygon of 4 sides and then adjusted to a given angle so
top view will be same.
13. A pentagonal pyramid is placed on H.P on one of its base’s edge and the
triangular surface containing the edge on which it is resting is making 45 degrees
273
with H.P. Draw orthographic views and what are the front views of 1 st,
2ndrd stages?
a) Triangle, triangle, irregular pentagon
b) Pentagon, irregular polygon of 4 sides, irregular polygon of 4 sides
c) Triangle, triangle, irregular polygon of 4 sides
d) Pentagon, irregular pentagon, irregular pentagon
Answer: a
Explanation: In the 1st stage the solid’s axis is perpendicular to H.P and one base’s edge is
perpendicular to V.P. so the front view will be triangle and then made to rest on only one
edge so front view will remain same and then adjusted to a given angle so front view will
be pentagon.
Projection of Spheres
1. ___________ surface is formed when a sphere is cut by a plane.
a) Ellipse
b) Parabola
c) Circle
d) Hyperbola
Answer: c
Explanation: Sphere is a closed solid object which is formed by rotating semicircle about its
flat side. Sphere gives top view, front view, side views as circle whose radius is equal to
radius of sphere.
2. When a hemisphere is placed on the ground on its flat face, its front view is a
___________
a) semi circle
b) circle
c) ellipse
d) irregular one
Answer: a
Explanation: Hemisphere is solid formed by cutting the sphere at its middle. The flat
surface of hemisphere will have section of circle with radius equal to radius of sphere. Here
the hemisphere is placed on H.P on its flat surface so it gives semi circle from front view.
3. When a hemisphere is placed on the ground on its flat face, its top view is a
___________
274
a) semi circle
b) circle
c) ellipse
d) irregular one
Answer: b
Explanation: Hemisphere is solid formed by cutting the sphere at its middle. The flat
surface of hemisphere will have section of circle with radius equal to radius of sphere. Here
the hemisphere is placed on H.P on its flat surface so it gives circle from top view.
4. When the flat face of hemisphere is inclined to the H.P or the ground and is
perpendicular to the V.P, it is seen as __________(partly hidden) in the top view.
a) semi circle
b) circle
c) ellipse
d) irregular one
Answer: c
Explanation: The flat surface of hemisphere will have section of circle with radius equal to
radius of sphere. Here the hemisphere is placed on H.P so that its flat surface is inclined to
H.P so it gives semi circle from front view and ellipse from top view.
5. When a hemisphere is placed on H.P such that the flat surface is

perpendicular to V.P and inclined with horizontal then the front view will be
____________
a) semi circle
b) circle
c) ellipse
d) irregular one
Answer: a
Explanation: The flat surface of hemisphere will have section of circle with radius equal to
radius of sphere. Here the hemisphere is placed on H.P so that its flat surface is inclined to
H.P so it gives semi circle from front view and ellipse from top view.
6. When two spheres of same radius are placed on H.P both are touching each
other and the line joining the centers is perpendicular to V.P. The front view will
be.
a) Single circle
b) Two circles
c) Concentric circles
275
d) Intersecting circles
Answer: a
Explanation: Given two spheres of same radius are placed on H.P touching each other so
as the spheres are placed on H.P the line joining the centers is parallel to H.P and given it
is perpendicular to V.P so they both align in one line which gives single circle from front
view.
other and the line joining the centers is perpendicular to V.P. The top view will be
_______________
a) single circle
b) two circles
c) concentric circles
d) intersecting circles
Answer: b
is perpendicular to V.P so they both align in one line which gives two circles from top view.
other and the line joining the centers is making 45 degrees to V.P. The front view
will be _______________
a) single circle
b) two circles
Answer: d
is making 45 degrees with V.P so they both align in one line which gives intersecting
circles from front view.
other and the line joining the centers is making 45 degrees to V.P. The top view
will be _____________
a) single circle
b) two circles
276
Answer: d
is making 45 degrees with V.P so they both align in one line which gives two circles in top
view.
10. When two spheres of different radius are placed on H.P both are touching
each other and the line joining the centers is perpendicular to V.P. The front view
will be ____________
a) single circle
b) two circles
Answer: c
Explanation: Given two spheres of different radius are placed on H.P touching each other,
the line joining the centers is perpendicular to V.P so they both align in one line but due to
difference in radius it gives concentric circles from front view.
11. When two spheres of different radius are placed on H.P both are touching
each other and the line joining the centers is perpendicular to V.P. The top view
will be ______________
a) single circle
b) two circles
Answer: b
Explanation: Given two spheres of different radius are placed on H.P touching each other,
the line joining the centers is perpendicular to V.P so they both align in one line which
gives two circles with different radius from top view.
12. Three spheres of same radius are placed on H.P such that the line joining
centers is parallel to H.P and each one touching other two. The front view will be
____________
a) three circles
b) two circles
277
Answer: d
Explanation: Given three spheres of same radius are placed on H.P each touching other
two, the line joining centers of spheres gives equilateral triangle. From front view the
spheres seem to be intersecting circles.
13. Three spheres of same radius are placed on H.P such that the line joining
centers is parallel to H.P and each one touching other two. The top view will be
______________
a) three circles
b) two circles
Answer: a
Explanation: Given three spheres of same radius are placed on H.P each touching other
two, the line joining centers of spheres gives equilateral triangle. From front view the
spheres seem to be intersecting circles but from top three circles will be seen.
Basics of Section of Solids

1. To understand some of the hidden geometry of components an imaginary
plane is used to cut the object which is called _____________
a) auxiliary plane
b) picture plane
c) section plane
d) additional plane
Answer: c
Explanation: To understand some of the hidden geometry of components an imaginary
plane is used to cut the object which is called section plane or cutting plane. The new
imaginary face generated on the object is called the section.
2. Which of the following is not the purpose of using cutting (section) plane?
a) Interpretation of object
b) Visualizing of object
c) Cutting the objects
d) Invisible features
Answer: c
Explanation: Section plane or cutting plane is an imaginary plane which is used to cut the
278
object to visualize the geometry which is hidden inside the object and interpret it which
plays an important role in designing many machine parts.
3. To find the true shape of the section, it must be projected on a plane parallel to
the _____________
a) Profile plane
b) Vertical plane
c) Auxiliary plane
d) Section plane
Answer: d
Explanation: As we know true shape and size is obtained only when a object is projected
on to the plane parallel to it. Likewise as section always be plane surface to know its true
shape it should be projected on to plane parallel to section plane only.
4. The type of line used to represent the cutting plane in drawing is.
Answer: c
Explanation: Continuous thick line is used for visible out-lines, dashed lines are used for
line showing permissible surface treatment, long-dashed dotted lines are used for
indication of surfaces for which a special requirement applies.
5. A section plane is parallel to V.P the top view gives ___________ which is
_________ to xy line.
a) true shape, parallel
b) straight line, parallel
c) straight line, perpendicular
d) true shape, perpendicular
Answer: b
Explanation: The projection of section plane on the plane to which it is perpendicular gives
a straight line which is parallel, perpendicular, inclined as due to section if it is parallel,
perpendicular, inclined to reference planes.
279
6. The projection of a section plane, on the plane to which it is perpendicular is a
straight line.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The projection of a section plane, on the plane to which it is perpendicular is a
straight line. The projection of a section on the reference plane to which the section plane
is perpendicular will be a straight line coinciding with the trace of the section plane of it.
7. The projection of section surface on the other plane to which it is inclined is

called auxiliary section.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: No it is not auxiliary plane but apparent section. This is obtained by projecting
on the other plane, the points at which the trace of the section plane intersects the edges
of the solid and drawing lines joining these points in proper sequence.
8. The section plane is perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P the front view of
section if section is a line. It ________________ xy line.
a) is perpendicular to
b) is parallel to
c) is inclined to V.P
d) crosses
Answer: b
a straight line. It is given the section is line and also from front view the section lies parallel
to xy reference line.
9. The section plane is perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P the top view of
section if section is a line. It ________________ xy line.
a) is perpendicular to
b) is parallel to
c) is inclined to V.P
d) crosses
Answer: c
280
a straight line. Here it is given section plane is inclined with V.P so top view gives a line
inclined to xy reference line.
10. A section is perpendicular to both the reference planes the true shape and
size is obtained by taking projection of section on to _________ plane.
a) horizontal
b) vertical
c) profile
d) auxiliary
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the section is perpendicular to both horizontal and vertical plane that is
it is parallel to profile plane which is otherwise called as picture plane. Always remember
the true shape and size will be trace if projections are drawn on to the plane parallel to
section plane.
11. A section is parallel to horizontal plane the true shape and size is obtained by
taking projection of section on to _________ plane.
a) horizontal
b) vertical
c) profile
d) auxiliary
Answer: a
Explanation: Always remember the true shape and size will be trace if projections are
drawn on to the plane parallel to section plane. So here as the section is parallel to
horizontal plane the projection is to be taken on horizontal plane.
12. A section is parallel to vertical plane the true shape and size is obtained by
taking projection of section on to _________ plane.
a) horizontal
b) vertical
c) profile
d) auxiliary
Answer: b
Explanation: Always remember the true shape and size will be trace if projections are
drawn on to the plane parallel to section plane. So here as the section is parallel to vertical
plane the projection is to be taken on vertical plane.
281
Sections of Prisms
1. A regular triangular prism is resting on H.P and section plane is parallel to H.P
and cutting the prism the section would be a _______________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: b
Explanation: Prisms are obtained by extruding required shape up to some appreciable
length so there exist same cross-section along the length perpendicular to axis. If the
cutting plane parallel to axis we get rectangle.
2. A cube is rested on H.P on one of its base such that base’s diagonal is
perpendicular to V.P and section plane is parallel to V.P the section will be a
__________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: b
perpendicular to V.P and section plane is making 45 degrees with both H.P and
V.P and section plane is not intersecting more than 3 edges the section will be a
_______________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: a
length so there will be same cross-section along the length perpendicular to axis. If the
282
cutting plane is parallel to axis we get rectangle if inclined to axis the section depends on
the position where it is cutting.
perpendicular to V.P and section plane is making 45 degrees with V.P and
perpendicular to H.P the section will be a _______________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: b
5. A cube is placed on H.P on its base and vertical face is making 30 degrees
with V.P, section plane is perpendicular to V.P the section will give a shape of a
___________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: c
6. A square prism has its base on H.P and its faces equally inclined to V.P is cut
at most critical place by a plane which is perpendicular to V.P and inclined 60
degrees with H.P the section will have shape like a __________
a) irregular pentagon
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: a
283
7. A triangular prism resting on one of its longest faces on H.P and axis of prism
is parallel to V.P, the section plane is perpendicular to both V.P and H.P the
section will be a ___________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) parallelogram
Answer: a
8. A pentagonal prism resting on one of its longest faces on H.P and axis of
prism is parallel to V.P, the section plane is perpendicular to both V.P and H.P
the section will be a ____
a) pentagon
b) irregular pentagon
c) rectangle
d) trapezium
Answer: a
prism is parallel to V.P, the section plane is parallel to both V.P/ H.P the section
will be a ___________
a) pentagon
c) rectangle
d) trapezium
Answer: c
284
prism is parallel to V.P, the section plane is perpendicular to V.P and inclined H.P
the section will be a ___________
a) pentagon
c) rectangle
d) trapezium
Answer: b
11. A hexagonal prism is resting on H.P on one of its longest faces, axis is
perpendicular to V.P the section plane is perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P
and cutting solid at approximately middle. The section will be like a __________
a) hexagon
b) irregular hexagon
c) rectangle
d) trapezium
Answer: b
12. A hexagonal prism is resting on H.P on one of its longest faces, axis is
perpendicular to V.P the section plane is parallel to V.P and perpendicular to
H.P. The section will be like a ___________
a) hexagon
b) irregular hexagon
c) rectangle
d) trapezium
Answer: a
285
13. Given below are the sections of different prisms. Match the following.
Position of section plane Section
1. Plane perpendicular to axis of triangular prism i. Rectangle
2. Plane perpendicular to axis of pentagonal prism ii. Rectangle
3. Plane inclined to axis of square prism iii. Pentagon
4. Plane parallel to axis of cuboid iv. Triangle
a) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, ii
b) 1, iv; 2, ii; 3, iii; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, i; 4, iii
d) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
Answer: a
Sections of Pyramids
1. A square pyramid is placed on V.P with square as base on V.P the cutting
plane is parallel to H.P and also parallel to one edge of base, the section will be
____________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) square
d) trapezium
Answer: d
Explanation: If a pyramid is cut by a plane parallel to axis and also parallel to any edge of
286
base then the section formed will be trapezium if the section plane not parallel to edge of
base then the section will be triangle.
2. A square pyramid is placed on V.P with square as base on V.P the cutting
plane is parallel to V.P, the section will be ______________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) square
d) pentagon
Answer: c
Explanation: If a pyramid is cut by a plane perpendicular to its axis section gives the base
shape or parallel to axis and also parallel to any edge of base then the section formed will
be trapezium if the section plane not parallel to edge of base then the section will be
triangle.
3. A pentagon pyramid is placed on V.P with square as base on V.P the cutting
plane is parallel to H.P and parallel to edge of base, the section will be
_____________
a) triangle
b) rectangle
c) trapezium
d) pentagon
Answer: c
plane is perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P and the section is cutting the
whole cross-section, the section will be ____________
a) triangle
b) trapezium
c) irregular square
d) irregular pentagon
Answer: d
Explanation: Given a regular pentagonal pyramid it may of any size having any distances
in between them if a section plane cutting the solid inclined to its base and completely
cutting the solid the section formed will be irregular base shape.
287
plane is perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P and the section is cutting not
more than 3 edges, the section will be __________
a) triangle
b) trapezium
c) irregular square
d) irregular pentagon
Answer: a
Explanation: : If a pyramid is cut by a plane perpendicular to its axis section gives the base
triangle.
6. A square pyramid is placed on H.P on its square base and section plane is
perpendicular to V.P and inclined to H.P cutting given solid in such a way that the
perpendicular distance from the ends of section to axis is same. The section will
be _____________
a) square
b) triangle
c) irregular pentagon
d) rhombus
Answer: d
Explanation: Given a square pyramid it may of any size having any distances in between
them if a section plane cutting the solid coincides with base edge and cutting pyramid gives
a irregular square and similar to other based pyramids also.
perpendicular to V.P and parallel to H.P and cutting the solid. The section will be
______________
a) square
b) triangle
d) rhombus
Answer: a
288
triangle.
parallel to V.P and not parallel to edge of base is cutting the solid. The section
will be _____________
a) square
b) triangle
d) trapezium
Answer: b
9. A regular pentagonal pyramid of base side equal to 5 cm is resting on H.P on

its pentagon face and section plane is parallel to axis and parallel to edge of
base and plane is 2 cm away from axis. The section will be _____________
a) triangle
b) trapezium
c) rectangle
d) pentagon
Answer: b
10. A regular pentagonal pyramid of base side equal to 5 cm is resting on H.P on

its pentagon face and section plane is perpendicular to axis. The section will be
__________
a) triangle
b) trapezium
c) rectangle
d) pentagon
Answer: d
289
triangle.
11. A regular octagonal pyramid of base side equal to 6 cm is resting on its

octagon face on ground and section plane is parallel to axis and parallel to one of
edges of base is held at a distance of 2 cm away from axis the section will be
____________
a) triangle
b) trapezium
c) rectangle
d) octagon
Answer: b

octagon face on ground and section plane is parallel to axis and not parallel to
any of the edges of base is held at a distance of 4 cm away from axis the section
will be ______________
a) triangle
b) trapezium
c) rectangle
d) octagon
Answer: a

octagon face on ground and the section is coinciding with the edge of base and
cutting solid with an angle with base equal to 45 degrees the section will be
_________________
a) Triangle
b) Trapezium
c) Irregular Octagon
d) Octagon
Answer: c
290
Explanation: Given a regular octagonal pyramid it may of any size having any distances in
between them if a section plane cutting the solid coincides with base edge and cutting
pyramid gives a irregular octagon and similar to other based pyramids also.
Sections of Cylinders
1. A cylinder is placed on H.P on its base and section plane is parallel to V.P
cutting the solid the section gives ______________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: c
Explanation: Cylinder is formed by rotating the rectangle about one of its sides which is
said to axis further. So if the cutting plane is parallel to axis the section formed is rectangle
and if plane is perpendicular to axis it gives circle.
2. A cylinder is placed on H.P on its base and section plane is parallel to H.P
cutting the solid the section gives ______________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: b
3. A cylinder is placed on H.P on its base and section plane is inclined to V.P and
perpendicular to H.P cutting the solid the section gives ______________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: c
291
4. A cylinder is placed on H.P on its base and section plane is inclined to H.P and
perpendicular to V.P cutting only less than half of the generators of the solid the
section gives ______________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: a
Explanation: If a cylinder is been cut by plane which is inclined to base or axis if it cuts all
the generator the section formed will be ellipse and if the plane cuts less than half of
generators the section formed will be parabola.
5. A cylinder is placed on V.P on its base and section plane is inclined to V.P and
perpendicular to H.P cutting all the generators of the solid the section gives
______________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: d
Explanation: : If a cylinder is been cut by plane which is inclined to base or axis if it cuts all
6. A cylinder is placed on V.P on its base and section plane is inclined to H.P and
perpendicular to V.P cutting the solid the section gives ______________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: c
292
7. A cylinder is been cut by a plane parallel to its base the section will be
_________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: b
8. A cylinder is been cut by a plane parallel to axis the section will be ________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: c
9. A cylinder is been cut completely by a plane inclined to base then the section
will be__________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
d) ellipse
Answer: d
Explanation: If a cylinder is been cut by plane which is inclined to base or axis if it cuts all
10. A cylinder is kept in such a way its axis is parallel to both the reference
planes and cut completely by a section plane is perpendicular to V.P and inclined
to H.P then the section will be __________
a) parabola
b) circle
c) rectangle
293
d) ellipse
Answer: d
Explanation: Given a cylinder is placed on profile plane or picture plane and is been cut by
a cutting plane inclined to axis as per conditions that is cutting all generators which
definitely give ellipse as section.
11. A cutting plane cut the cylinder into half diagonally touching both the bases at
corners the section and side view of 1 part of cylinder is ____________
a) ellipse, circle
b) ellipse, rectangle
c) ellipse, triangle
d) closed figure formed by 2 parallel line bounded by 2 similar arcs, triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: Given a cylinder is been cut diagonally from one corner of 1st base to other
corner of 2nd base as we can imagine it is just cutting a plane inclined to axis that is cutting
all generators which definitely give ellipse as section and side view will be triangle, top view
will be circle.
12. A cylinder is placed on V.P and the section plane is parallel to H.P cutting the
solid into two equal parts the front view of the 1st part of cylinder will be
_____________
a) circle
b) ellipse
c) rectangle
d) semi-circle
Answer: d
Explanation: Given the cylinder is placed on V.P on its base and the section plane is
parallel to H.P cutting the solid into two equal parts. In this case the side view, front view
shows the section plane as line cutting the cylinder into 2 halves and show rectangle and
semicircle.
13. A cylinder is placed on V.P on its base and the section plane is parallel to
H.P cutting the solid into two equal parts the top view of the 1st part of cylinder
will be _________
a) rectangle of width equal to half of diameter of cylinder
b) rectangle of width equal to diameter of cylinder
c) circle of diameter equal to that of cylinder
d) semicircle with diameter equal to that of cylinder
294
Answer: b
Explanation: Given the cylinder is placed on V.P on its base and the section plane is
parallel to H.P cutting the solid into two equal parts. In this case the side view, front view
shows the section plane as line cutting the cylinder into 2 halves and show rectangle and
semicircle but top view shows the rectangle of width equal to diameter of cylinder.
Sections of Cones
1. A regular cone is placed on V.P on its base a section plane is parallel to H.P
and section plane is 2cm away from the axis the section will be ____________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) triangle
Answer: b
Explanation: If a cone made to cut by a plane parallel to its axis and some distance away
from it the section formed is hyperbola. If the section plane is perpendicular to axis the
section is circle. If section plane passes through apex the section formed is triangle.
2. A regular cone is placed such that axis is perpendicular to H.P and the section
plane is inclined to axis and parallel to one of the generator then the section will
be ___________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) parabola
d) triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: If a regular cone is been cut by plane which is inclined to axis of cone and
cutting all generators then the section formed will be ellipse and if section plane is inclined
with axis with angle less than half of the angle between the slanting ends then section
formed is parabola.
3. A regular cone is placed such that axis is parallel to both reference planes the
section plane perpendicular to both reference planes and cuts the cone the
section will be like ____________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
295
c) circle
d) triangle
Answer: c
4. A regular cone is placed on H.P and section plane is parallel to axis cutting the
cone at the middle then the section will be _______________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) triangle
Answer: d
5. A regular cone is been cut by a cutting plane which passes through the apex
of cone and making some angle with axis less than half of angle between the
slanting ends the section will be like __________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) triangle
Answer: d
6. A regular cone is resting on V.P with axis perpendicular to it a plane is cutting

the cone such that it is perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P cutting cone at
all generators the section formed is ________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) triangle
Answer: a
296
cutting all generators then the section formed will be ellipse. If section plane is inclined with
axis with angle less than half of the angle between the slanting ends then section formed is
parabola.
7. A regular cone is resting on H.P on its base. A section plane is perpendicular

to H.P and V.P cutting the cone such that the plane is not having axis of cone in
it. The section would be ________
a) Ellipse
b) Hyperbola
c) Parabola
d) Triangle
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the section plane is perpendicular to H.P and V.P and axis of cone
perpendicular to H.P. So if a regular cone is been cut by plane which is parallel to its axis
and plane is not coinciding with the axis then section formed will be parabola.
8. A regular cone is been cut by a plane which is perpendicular to axis of cone

the section will be like __________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) triangle
Answer: c
9. A regular cone is been cut by a plane which is parallel to the axis of cone the
section formed will be like _____________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) parabola
Answer: b
297
10. A regular cone is been cut by a plane which is parallel to the axis of cone, the
section formed will be like ______________
a) ellipse
b) triangle
c) circle
d) parabola
Answer: b
11. A regular cone is been cut by a plane which is inclined to axis of cone and
cuts all the generators the section formed be like _____________
a) ellipse
b) hyperbola
c) circle
d) parabola
Answer: a
cutting all generators then the section formed will be ellipse and if section plane is inclined
with axis with angle less than half of the angle between the slanting ends then section
formed is parabola.
12. Given are some shapes of sections of a regular cone. Match the following.
Positions of the cutting plane True shape of section
1. Inclined to axis cutting all generators i. Circle
2. Parallel to axis ii. Ellipse
3. Perpendicular to axis iii. Triangle
298
4. Passing through the axis or the apex iv. Rectangular hyperbola
a) 1, iv; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, ii
b) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, iii; 4, i
c) 1, ii; 2, iv; 3, i; 4, iii
d) 1, ii; 2, iii; 3, i; 4, iv
Answer: c
Explanation: Generators are the imaginary line drawn from base to apex of the curves. If
the plane is inclined to and on one side of the axis the section is Hyperbola and if the plane
is parallel to the generator the section formed is parabola.
Sections of Spheres
1. A sphere is placed on H.P and section plane is parallel to H.P the section is
circle and if the section plane is parallel to V.P the section is again circle.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: When a sphere is cut by a plane, the true shape of the section is always a
circle. But here asked are views so it will be lines or ellipse according to section plane
however the section plane will lay section will be circle.
2. If a sphere is made to cut by a plane which is inclined to V.P when circle is on

H.P the section formed will be ellipse.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: No, when a sphere is cut by a plane, the true shape of the section is always a
3. A sphere is on H.P and a section plane is perpendicular to both the reference

planes is cutting the sphere such that the section divides the sphere to ¼ th and
¾ th part the front view and side view will be ___________
a) circle, line
b) ellipse, circle
299
c) line, ellipse
d) line, circle
Answer: d
4. A sphere is placed on V.P the section plane perpendicular to H.P and inclined
to V.P cutting the sphere section formed and front view will be _______________
a) circle, line
b) circle, circle
c) ellipse, circle
d) circle, ellipse
Answer: d
5. A sphere is cut by a plane at some distance from the longest diameter of it the
section formed will be
___________
a) ellipse
b) circle
c) line
d) oval
Answer: b
circle. But here asked are views so it will be lines or ellipse according to section plane here
the views of minor parts give segment.
6. A hemi sphere is placed on H.P on its base a section plane which is

perpendicular to H.P and inclined to V.P and cutting the hemisphere the section
will be ___________
a) circle
b) ellipse
c) sector
d) segment
Answer: d
300
Explanation: Hemisphere is the half sphere. When a hemisphere is made to cut by a plane
parallel to base the section formed will be circle. If the plane is inclined to base the section
formed will be segment.
7. A hemi sphere is placed on H.P on its base a section plane which is parallel
H.P and cutting the hemisphere section will be ___________
a) circle
b) ellipse
c) sector
d) segment
Answer: a
Explanation: Hemisphere is the half sphere. When a hemisphere is made to cut by a plane
parallel to base the section formed will be circle. If the plane is inclined to base the section
formed will be segment.
8. A sphere is cut be section placed which is parallel to H.P the top view and
front view of section will be ___________
a) circle, line
b) line, circle
c) ellipse, line
d) line, ellipse
Answer: a
circle. But here asked are views so it will be lines or ellipse according to section plane as
here the plane is parallel to H.P the top view will be circle and front view will be line.
9. A sphere is cut by plane which is perpendicular to V.P and inclined to H.P the
top view and section will be ___________
a) line, circle
b) line, ellipse
c) ellipse, circle
d) circle, ellipse
Answer: c
301
10. A sphere is cut by plane which is perpendicular to V.P and inclined to H.P the
top view and front view of minor part will be _________
a) circle, sector
b) line, circle
c) ellipse, segment
d) ellipse, sector
Answer: c
circle. But here asked are views so it will be lines or ellipse according to section plane and
also here asked views for minor part so segment will be front view in this condition.
11. A sphere is cut by a plane at the middle the plane is perpendicular to both
reference planes the top view and front view will be _____________
a) line, circle
b) circle, line
c) line, line
d) circle, circle
Answer: c
Explanation: Given the plane is perpendicular to both the reference planes so the plane is
parallel to picture plane so the section would also be parallel to picture plane as the section
is 2D figure the other view will give line obviously.
12. A sphere is cut by a plane which is inclined to both reference planes the top
view and front view of section will be ____________
a) line, line
b) circle, circle
c) ellipse, circle
d) ellipse, ellipse
Answer: d
circle. But here it is asked view so they will be definitely ellipse since the section plane is
inclined to both the reference planes.
Development of Surfaces
1. Which method of development is employed in case of prisms?
a) Parallel-line development
302
b) Approximation method
c) Triangulation development
d) Radial-line development
Answer: a
Explanation: Parallel-line method is employed in case of prisms and cylinders in which
stretch out-line principle is used. Radial-line development is used for pyramids and cones
in which the true length of the slant edge or the generator is used as radius.
2. Which method of development is employed in case of cones?

Answer: d
Explanation: Parallel-line method is employed in case of prisms and cylinders in which
stretch out-line principle is used. Radial-line development is used for pyramids and cones
in which the true length of the slant edge or the generator is used as radius.
3. Which method of development is employed in case of double curved objects?

Answer: b
Explanation: Approximation method is used to develop objects of double curved or warped
surfaces as sphere, paraboloid, ellipsoid, hyperboloid and helicoid. Triangulation method is
used for transition pieces. This is simply a method of dividing a surface into number of
triangles and transferring them into the development.
4. Which method is used to develop transition pieces?

Answer: c
303
5. Which method of development is employed in case of sphere, ellipsoid?

Answer: b
6. Developments of the lateral surface of a prism consist of the same number of

__________ in contact as the number of the sides of base of the prism.
a) squares
b) rectangles
c) triangles
d) parallelograms
Answer: b
Explanation: Developments of the lateral surface of a prism consist of the same number of
rectangles in contact as the number of the sides of base of the prism. One side of the
rectangle is equal to the length of the axis and the other side equal to the length of the side
of the base.
7. The development of the lateral surface of a cylinder is a rectangle having one

side equal to the _____________ of its base-circle and the other equal to its
length.
a) circumference
b) area
c) diameter
d) radius
Answer: a
Explanation: The development of the lateral surface of a cylinder is a rectangle having one
side equal to the circumference of its base-circle and the other equal to its length. Length is
the distance between the two bases.
304
8. The development of lateral surface of a pyramid consists of a number of equal
____________triangle in contact.
a) equilateral
b) isosceles
c) scalene
d) right angled
Answer: b
Explanation: The development of lateral surface of a pyramid consists of a number of equal
isosceles triangles in contact. The base and sides of each triangle are respectively equal to
the edge of the base and slant edge of the pyramid.
9. The development of the curved surface of a cone is a __________ of a

__________
a) sector, circle
b) segment, circle
c) segment, ellipse
d) arc, parabola
Answer: a
Explanation: The development of the curved surface of a cone is a sector of a circle, the
radius and the length of the arc of which are respectively equal to the slant height and the
circumference of the base-circle of the cone.
10. The development of the surface of a cube consists of ____ equal squares,
the length of the side of the squares being equal to the length of the edge of the
cube.
a) 4
b) 6
c) 12
d) 8
Answer: b
Explanation: The development of the surface of a cube consists of 6 equal squares, the
length of the side of the squares being equal to the length of the edge of the cube. It is 6
squares because the cube is bounded by equal squares and only 6 faces are there.
11. A zone is portion of the sphere enclosed between two planes parallel to the
axis.
a) True
b) False
305
Answer: b
Explanation: A zone is portion of the sphere enclosed between two planes perpendicular to
the axis. A lune is the portion between the two planes which contain the axis of the sphere.
A sphere is approximately developed by these two methods.
12. Which method of development is employed in case of pyramids?

Answer: d
Explanation: Parallel-line is employed in case of prisms and cylinders in which stretch out-
line principle is used. Radial-line development is used for pyramids in which the actual
length of the slant edge or the generator is used as radius.
Intersection of Surfaces
1. The surfaces of which intersect one another in lines which are called line of
intersection.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: In engineering practice, objects constructed may have constituent parts, the
surfaces of which intersect one another in line which are called line of intersection. A dome
fitted on a boiler is one such example. The surface of the dome extends up to the line of
intersection only.
2. The plane surfaces intersect in a ____________,the line of intersection

between two curved surfaces is _________ and between a plane surface and
curved surfaces is a _________
a) straight line, curve, curve
b) straight line, straight line, curve
c) straight line, curve, straight line
d) curve, curve, curve
Answer: a
Explanation: The plane surfaces (faces of prisms and pyramids) intersect in a straight line.
306
The line of intersection between two curved surfaces (of cylinders and cones) or between a
plane surface and curved surfaces is a curve.
3. Drawing straight lines on both the surfaces of solids and then pointing the
points where they intersect and drawing lines which forms the line of intersection
this process of finding the line of intersection is termed as _______ method.
a) assumption
b) line
c) removing material
d) cutting- plane
Answer: b
Explanation: A number of lines are drawn on the lateral surface of one of the solids and in
the region of the line of intersection. Points of intersection of these lines with the surface of
the other solid are then located. These points will obviously lie on the required line of
intersection.
4. Selecting of particular plane in a series of planes drawn cutting the solid either
parallel, perpendicular or oblique which cut the surface of one of the solids in
straight lines and that of the other in straight lines or circles. This is called
________method.
a) assumption
b) line
c) removing material
d) cutting- plane
Answer: d
Explanation: The two solids are assumed to be cut by a series of cutting planes. The
cutting planes may be vertical, edgewise or oblique. The cutting planes are so selected as
to cut the surface of one of the solids in straight lines and that of the other in straight lines
or circle.
5. When a solid completely penetrates another solid, there will be two lines of
intersection. These lines are called_____________
a) line of interpenetration
b) concyclic curves of lines
c) hidden lines
d) inside line
Answer: a
Explanation: When a solid completely penetrates another solid, there will be two lines of
307
intersection. These lines are called lines of interpenetration. The portion of the penetrating
solid which lies hidden within the other solid is shown by dotted lines.
6. The line of intersection formed is straight line while two solids are intersecting
the solids may be ________
a) prism, cylinder
b) prism, cone
c) pyramid, cone
d) prism, pyramid
Answer: d
Explanation: If any of the solid in two of intersecting solids is having curves surface that is
cylinder, cone, sphere etc the line of intersection will give curve only but not straight line for
getting line of intersection straight line both the solids should not have curved surfaces.
7. The line of intersection formed is straight line while two solids intersect the
solids may be ___________
a) cube, cylinder
b) pentagonal prism, cone
c) triangular pyramid, cone
d) triangular prism, square pyramid
Answer: d
8. The line of intersection formed is curve while two solids intersect the solids
may be ____________
a) cube, triangular prism
b) pentagonal prism, cone
c) triangular pyramid, cube
d) triangular prism, square pyramid
Answer: b
9. The line of intersection formed is curve while two solids intersect the solids
may be ____________
308
a) cone, cylinder
b) cube, prism
c) pyramid, cube
d) pyramid, cuboid
Answer: a
10. A prism and cylinder got intersected at 90 degrees the line of intersection will
be _________ and parallel to axis of ____________
a) straight line, prism
b) curve, prism
c) straight line, cylinder
d) curve, cylinder
Answer: b
Explanation: As here a prism and cylinder are intersected in which the prism has plane
surface and cylinder has curved surface and we know the curved surface is perpendicular
to axis of cylinder and also given the solids intersect at 90 degrees so the curve formed will
be parallel to axis of prism.
11. A prism and cone got intersected at 90 degrees the line of intersection will be
_________ and parallel to axis of ____________
a) straight line, prism
b) curve, prism
c) straight line, cone
d) curve, cone
Answer: b
Explanation: As here a prism and cone are intersected in which the prism has plane
surface and cone has curved surface and we know the curved surface is perpendicular to
axis of cone and also given the solids intersect at 90 degrees so the curve formed will be
parallel to axis of prism.
12. The line of intersection formed is straight line while two solids are intersecting
the solids may be ___________
a) cube, cylinder
b) prism, cone
c) pyramid, cuboid
309
d) cube, cone
Answer: c
13. The line of intersection formed is curve while two solids are intersecting the
solids may be __________
a) cylinder, sphere
b) prism, prism
c) cuboid, cube
d) prism, pyramid
Answer: a
Isometric Axes, Lines and Planes

1. The angle between the isometric axes is __________
a) 180 degrees
b) 60 degrees
c) 90 degrees
d) 120 degrees
Answer: d
Explanation: Isometric projection is a type of projection in which the three dimensions of a
solid are not only shown in one view, but also their actual sizes can be measured directly
from it. So it is needed that there exist equal angle between the axes for easy
measurement so 360/3=120 degrees is chosen.
2. The value of the ratio of isometric length to true length is ________

a) 0.141
b) 0.372
c) 0.815
d) 0.642
Answer: c
Explanation: If we represent a cube in isometric view the diagonal of upper face of cube is
310
equal to the true length of the diagonal. From it by drawing actual square around it and
then calculating it gives (1/cos 30)/ (1/cos 45) =isometric /true =0.815.
3. The length in isometric drawing of line is 20 cm. What is the true length of it?
a) 24.53 cm
b) 15.46 cm
c) 19.31 cm
d) 23.09 cm
Answer: a
Explanation: The ratio of isometric length to true length is 0.815 so here it is given
isometric length of 20 cm. 0.815 = 20 cm / true length => true length = 20 cm /0.815 =
24.53 cm. Every time the true length is more than isometric length.
4. The true length of edge of cube is 15 cm what will be the isometric length?
a) 17.78 cm
b) 14.48 cm
c) 12.99 cm
d) 12.22 cm
Answer: d
Explanation: The ratio of isometric length to true length is 0.815 so here it is given true
length of 15 cm. 0.815 = isometric length / 15 cm => isometric length = 15 cm x 0.815 =
5. The lines parallel to isometric axes are called ________ lines.

a) parallel
b) auxiliary
c) isometric
d) oblique
Answer: c
Explanation: The angle between the isometric axes is 120 degrees if any line is parallel to
it then those are called isometric lines. Auxiliary lines may make any angle with horizontal
and oblique is not related here.
6. The planes parallel to any of the two isometric lines are called ________
planes.
a) parallel
b) auxiliary
c) isometric
311
d) oblique
Answer: c
Explanation: The planes on which the faces of cube lie if it is placed in isometric view can
be consider as the isometric planes which are parallel to two axes of isometric view which
are x, y, z axes of isometric view.
7. Isometric view of cube is drawn the angle between the edge of cube and
horizontal will be______
a) 15 degrees
b) 120 degrees
c) 45 degrees
d) 30 degrees
Answer: d
Explanation: Isometric view of cube is drawn the angle between the edge of cube and
horizontal will be 30 degrees because as the angle between the base and axis lower to will
be 90 degrees the angle between the axes is 120 degrees. 120-90 = 60 degrees.
8. Isometric view of cube is drawn the angle between the edge of cube and
vertical will be______
a) 15 degrees
b) 120 degrees
c) 60 degrees
d) 30 degrees
Answer: c
Explanation: Isometric view of cube is drawn the angle between the edge of cube and
vertical will be 60 degrees because the angle between the edge and horizontal is 30 and
so angle between vertical and horizontal is 90. 90 – 30 = 60 degrees.
9. The true length of line is 40 cm and isometric view of it is drawn the length
would decrease to ______
a) 28.28 cm
b) 32.6 cm
c) 34.6 c
d) 38.63 cm
Answer: b
312
10. The true length of the line is 30 cm and isometric view is drawn. How much
length is reduced?
a) 24.45 cm
b) 25.98 cm
c) 4.01 cm
d) 5.55 cm
Answer: d
24.45 cm. 30 cm – 24.45 cm =5.55 cm.
11. The objects we see in nature will be in Isometric view.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The objects we watch in our surrounds are not isometric view they are
perspective view. Isometric view is imaginary view in which lines of sight are perpendicular
to picture plane and are parallel to each other.
12. Isometric view of cube is drawn the angle between the adjacent edges is
_________
a) 90 degrees, 120 degrees
b) 60 degrees, 120 degrees
c) 120 degrees, 120 degrees
d) 90 degrees, 30 degrees
Answer: b
Explanation: Given is a cube in which the adjacent angle are all equal and equal to 90
degrees and if isometric view is drawn then it show front faces with angles bet between
them as 120 degrees and if take angles between the back and front faces we get the 60
degrees.
13. Isometric view of cube is drawn and faces of cube are seen as ___________
a) square
b) rectangle
c) rhombus
d) parallelogram
Answer: c
Explanation: It is given isometric view of cube is drawn and it show regular hexagon in
313
which any of the faces represent rhombus which have diagonals cutting each other at 90
degrees any other adjacent edges have angles between them as 60 and 120 degrees.
Isometric Drawings
1. If isometric projection of an object is drawn with true lengths the shape would
be same and size is how much larger than actual isometric projection?
a) 25%
b) 29.5%
c) 22.5%
d) 33.3%
Answer: c
Explanation: If the foreshortening of the isometric lines in an isometric projection is
disregarded and instead, the true lengths are marked, the view obtained will be exactly of
the same shape but larger in proportion than that obtained by the use of the isometric
scale.
2. If an isometric projection is drawn with true measurements but not with

isometric scale then the drawings are called ____________
a) Isometric projection
b) Isometric view
c) Isometric perception
d) Orthographic view
Answer: b
Explanation: Due to the ease in construction and the advantage of measuring the
dimensions directly from the drawing, it has become a general practice to use the true
scale instead of the isometric scale.
3. If an isometric drawing is made use of isometric scale then the drawings are
called ___________
a) Isometric projection
b) Isometric view
c) Isometric perception
d) Orthographic view
Answer: a
Explanation: To avoid confusion, the view drawn with the true scale is called isometric
314
drawing or isometric view, while that drawn with the use of isometric scale is called
isometric projection.
4. Identify the front view of the below isometric view.
a)
b)
315
c)
d)
Answer: a
Explanation: Here the isometric view of some example picture is given. Arrow in question
represents the line of sight in case of front view from that we can get other view. Front view
is asked which can be watched along the arrow.
5. Identify the top view of below isometric view.
316
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
represents the line of sight in case of front view from that we can get other view. Top view
is asked so considering the arrow we can find top view.
317
6. Identify the side view of the below isometric view.
a)
b)
c)
318
d)
Answer: b
represents the line of sight in case of front view from that we can get other view. Side is
watched from left side or right side of arrow placed.
a)
b)
319
c)
d)
Answer: c
8. Identify the top view of the below isometric view.
a)
b)
320
c)
d)
Answer: a
a)
b)
321
c)
d)
Answer: b
a)
322
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
11. Identify the top view of the below isometric view.
323
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
324
a)
b)
c)
d)
325
Answer: b
Isometric Drawing of Planes or Plane Figures

1. Front view of the square is given and has to draw its isometric view which
angle the base has to make with horizontal?
a) 90 degrees
b) 15 degrees
c) 30 degrees
d) 60 degrees
Answer: c
Explanation: While drawing the isometric view of any figure made of lines the base always
makes 30 degrees with horizontal and so in square and another parallel line also makes 30
degrees with horizontal and other sides will be perpendicular to horizontal.
2. Front view of the square is given and has to draw its isometric view which
angle the vertical edge has to make with horizontal?
a) 90 degrees
b) 15 degrees
c) 30 degrees
d) 60 degrees
Answer: a
Explanation: In isometric view vertical lines exist and make 90 degrees with the horizontal
so if the front view of a square is given and drawn to isometric view the angle between the
vertical edge and horizontal is 90 degrees.
3. Top view of a square is given and has to draw its isometric view which angle
the base has to make with horizontal?
a) 90 degrees
b) 15 degrees
c) 30 degrees
d) 60 degrees
Answer: c
Explanation: While drawing the isometric view of any figure made of lines the base always
326
makes 30 degrees with horizontal and so in square and another parallel line also makes 30
degrees with horizontal and other sides will be perpendicular to horizontal.
4. Top view of a square is given and has to draw its isometric view which angle
the vertical edge has to make with horizontal?
a) 90 degrees
b) 15 degrees
c) 30 degrees
d) 60 degrees
Answer: c
Explanation: In isometric view vertical lines exist and make 90 degrees with the horizontal
so if the top view of a square is given and drawn to isometric view the angle between the
vertical edge and horizontal is 90 degrees.
5. Front view of triangle is given and isometric view is to be drawn which of the
following is correct procedure in drawing isometric view .
a) turning the triangle such that base is making 30 degrees with horizontal
b) by increasing or decreasing angles at required proportions
c) drawing parallel to isometric axes
d) drawing rectangle with base and height of triangle and the drawing rectangle
parallel to isometric axes and pointing triangle in it
Answer: d
Explanation: The surface of the triangle is vertical and the base is horizontal so base will
be drawn parallel to a slopping axis. The two sides of the triangle are inclined. Hence they
will not be drawn parallel to any isometric axis.
6. When a square is drawn to an isometric view it will give rectangle.

a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: Whatever the polygon when we are drawing it in isometric views the base will
make 30 degrees and other sides will tends to show up like we are watching from some
particular point as in perspective view in 1 dimension.
7. When a rectangle is drawn to an isometric view it will give parallelogram.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
327
8. Isometric view of equilateral triangle will be _____________

a) equilateral triangle
b) scalene triangle
c) isosceles triangle
d) right angled triangle
Answer: b
9. Isometric view of isosceles triangle will be ____

b) scalene triangle
Answer: b
10. Isometric view of right angled triangle will be ___________

b) scalene triangle
Answer: b
Explanation: Whatever the quadrilateral when we are drawing it in isometric views the base
will make 30 degrees and other sides will tends to show up like we are watching from some
11. Isometric view of rhombus will become __________

a) parallelogram
b) rhombus
c) rectangle
328
d) square
Answer: a
12. Isometric view of rectangle will become __________

a) parallelogram
b) rhombus
c) rectangle
d) square
Answer: a
13. Front view of circle is given and isometric view is to be drawn which of the
following is correct procedure in drawing isometric view ?
a) turning the circle such that line on diameter is making 30 degrees with
horizontal
b) by increasing or decreasing angles between two perpendicular line on
diameter at required proportions
c) drawing line in diameter parallel to isometric axes
d) enclosing circle in a square and aligning square to isometric axes and pointing
four points on circle touching the square and joining by smooth curve.
Answer: d
Explanation: Circle will be circle even if we rotate it in angle with that plane. So to represent
circle in isometric view it should be enclosed in square and then aligning square to
isometric axes and pointing points touching the square and drawing smooth curve.
Isometric Drawing of Prisms and Pyramids
329
1. Identify the front view from the isometric view for the below given pyramid.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
Explanation: The isometric view should be drawn according to the given views and in such
330
a way that maximum possible details are visible. Arrow mark in the given figure show the
direction in which front is taking and dotted lines represent hidden edges and lines.
2. Identify the top view from the isometric view for the below given pyramid.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
331
3. Identify the back view from the isometric view of the following pyramid.
a)
b)
c)
332
d)
Answer: c
4. Identify the front view of the below given pyramid.
a)
b)
333
c)
d)
Answer: a
5. Identify the top view of the below given pyramid.
a)
334
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
6. Identify the side view of for the below given pyramid.
335
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
336
7. Identify the front view of this solid which is in isometric view.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
337
8. Identify the top view of below given solid which is in isometric view.
a)
b)
c)
338
d)
Answer: d
9. Identify the side view of the below given solid which is in isometric view.
a)
b)
339
c)
d)
Answer: c
10. Identify the front view from the isometric view for the below given figure.
a)
340
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
11. Identify the side view from the isometric view for the below given figure.
341
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
342
12. Identify the top view from the isometric view for the below given figure.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
343
13. Identify the bottom view from the isometric view for the below given figure.
a)
b)
c)
344
d)
Answer: c
14. Identify the front view from the isometric view for the below given prism.
a)
b)
345
c)
d)
Answer: c
15. Identify the top view from the isometric view of following prism.
a)
346
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
Isometric Drawing of Cylinders
347
1. Identify the front view from the below given cylinder.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
348
direction in which front view is taking and dotted lines represent hidden edges, parts and
lines.
2. Identify the top view from the below given cylinder.
a)
b)
c)
349
d)
Answer: d
lines.
3. Identify the front view for the below given cylinder.
a)
b)
c)
350
d)
Answer: a
lines.
4. Identify the top view from the following cylinder.
a)
b)
351
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
5. Identify the front view from the following cylinder.
a)
352
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
6. Identify the side view for the below given cylinder.
a)
353
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
a)
354
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
8. Identify the back view for the below given cylinder.
a)
355
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
9. Identify the bottom view from the following cylinder.
a)
356
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
lines.
10. Identify the top view for the below cylinder.
a)
357
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
a)
b)
358
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
12. Identify the back view for the below given cylinder.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
359
lines.
13. Identify the back view for the below cylinder.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
360
14. Identify the side view for the below given cylinder.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
361
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
Isometric Drawing of Cones

1. Identify the front view of the below given cone.
362
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
2. Identify the top view for the below given cone.
363
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
a)
364
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
4. Identify the bottom view for the below given cone.
a)
b)
365
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
5. Identify the side view for the below given cone.
a)
b)
366
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
a)
367
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
a)
368
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
8. Identify the back view for the below given cone.
a)
369
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
lines.
a)
370
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
lines.
10. Identify the front view for the below given cone.
a)
371
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
a)
372
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
12. Identify the front view of the following cone.
a)
373
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
a)
374
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
14. Identify the bottom view for the below given cone.
a)
375
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
15. Identify the side view for the below given cone.
a)
376
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
Isometric Drawing of Spheres

1. Identify the top view for the below given sphere.
a)
377
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
lines.
2. Identify the side view for the below given sphere.
a)
378
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
3. Identify the front view for the below given sphere.
a)
379
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
4. Identify the back view for the below given sphere.
a)
380
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
5. Identify the back view from the following sphere.
a)
b)
381
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines.
6. Identify the front view for the below given sphere.
a)
b)
c)
382
d)
Answer: b
lines.
7. Identify the side view for the below given sphere.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
383
lines.
8. Identify the top view for the below given sphere.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
lines.
384
9. Identify the back view for the below given hemi-sphere.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
lines. If arrow is not given the name on plane gives u enough information about observer.
385
10. Identify the front view for the below given hemi-sphere.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
lines.
386
11. Identify the side view for the below given hemi-sphere.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
lines.
387
12. Identify the top view for the below given hemi-sphere.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
lines
388
Oblique Projections
1. Oblique projections are useful for making an assembly.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The oblique projection represents three dimensional objects on the projection
plane by one view only. This type of drawing is useful for making an assembly of an object
and provides directly a production drawing of the object for manufacturing purpose.
2. Lines of sights (projectors) for oblique projection will be ______________

a) Parallel to each other and perpendicular to projection plane
b) Not parallel to each other and perpendicular to projection plane
c) Parallel to each other and inclined to projection plane
d) Not parallel to each other and inclined to projection plane
Answer: c
Explanation: When an observer looks towards an object from infinity, the lines of sight will
be parallel to each other and inclined to the projection plane in oblique projection, but the
lines of sight will be parallel to each other and perpendicular to projection plane in
orthographic projection.
3. All the faces of the object are distorted in the shape and size.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: In oblique projection the faces of object which are perpendicular to the plane
of projection will be distorted and all the faces of the object are distorted in the shape and
size in isometric projection.
4. Which of the following statement is wrong in case of oblique projection?

a) The object is drawn with the reduced dimensions.
b) Projectors are parallel to each other and inclined to projection plane.
c) The choice of the position of the object depends upon the shape and size.
d) The faces of object which are perpendicular to the plane of projection will be
distorted.
Answer: a
Explanation: In isometric projection the object is drawn with the reduced dimensions for
389
about 82% but in oblique projection the object is drawn with the actual dimensions. The
choice of the position of the object depends upon the shape and size.
5. When the receding lines are drawn to full size scale then the oblique projection
is ___________
a) Cabinet projection
b) Isometric projection
c) Orthographic projection
d) Cavalier projection
Answer: d
Explanation: When the receding lines are drawn to half size scale then the oblique
projection is cabinet projection. When the receding lines are drawn to full size scale then
the oblique projection is cavalier projection.
6. When the receding lines are drawn to half size scale then the oblique
projection is __________
a) Cabinet projection
b) Isometric projection
c) Orthographic projection
d) Cavalier projection
Answer: a
Explanation: When the receding lines are drawn to half size scale then the oblique
projection is cabinet projection. When the receding lines are drawn to full size scale then
the oblique projection is cavalier projection.
7. Which are not usually used as angle between the projection plane and
receding lines for oblique projection?
a) 30 degrees
b) 50 degrees
c) 45 degrees
d) 60 degrees
Answer: b
Explanation: Usually used as angles are 30, 45, 60 degrees which are between the
projection plane and receding lines for oblique projection. But if needed any angle can be
taken as per requirement of the view.
8. The appearance of the distortion of an object can be improved by

___________ the length of the receding lines.
390
a) increasing
b) doubling
c) shortening
d) dividing
Answer: c
Explanation: The appearance of the distortion of an object can be improved by shortening
the length of the receding lines. The receding lines may be inclined either upwards or
downwards, or to the left or right depending upon the necessity to show the details.
9. In oblique projection, the object is assumed to be placed with one face

_______________
a) parallel to plane of projection
b) parallel to adjacent edge
c) perpendicular to plane of projection
d) perpendicular to adjacent edge
Answer: a
Explanation: In oblique projection, the object is assumed to be placed with one face
parallel to plane of projection and receding lines are drawn from the faces parallel to
projection plane and other parallel face.
10. The perpendicular edges of planes parallel to projection plane are drawn at
an angle of 30, 45, 60 degrees with the horizontal. The inclined lines are called
_____________
a) projectors
b) slanting edges
c) contour lines
d) receding lines
Answer: d
Explanation: Projectors are the imaginary lines drawn from object to projection planes.
Slanting edges can be used for edges of pyramid etc. The perpendicular edges of planes
parallel to projection plane are drawn at an angle of 30, 45, 60 degrees with the horizontal.
The inclined lines are called receding lines.
11. The faces parallel to projection plane are having ________ size and shape in
oblique projection.
a) actual
b) double
c) half
391
d) increased
Answer: a
Explanation: Oblique projection is a specified projection which is used for making an
assembly of an object and provides directly a production drawing of the object for
manufacturing purpose.
12. In cavalier projection the receding lines are drawn _________

a) half of its actual size
b) double of its actual size
c) full size
d) increased or decreased to particular ratio
Answer: c
Explanation: Cavalier projection is one of the type of oblique projection in which the
receding lines are drawn to full size scale and projectors are inclined at 30 degrees, 45
degrees, 60 degrees to the plane of projection.
Definitions and Methods of Perspective Projections

1. In perspective projection, the eye is assumed to be situated at a _______
position relative to the object. The ______ is placed between ____ and the
_________
a) definite, picture plane, eye, object
b) indefinite, object, eye, picture plane
c) indefinite, picture plane, eye, object
d) indefinite, object, picture plane, eye
Answer: a
Explanation: In perspective projection, the eye is assumed to be situated at a definite
position relative to the object. The picture plane is placed between eye and the object and
the object can also placed between the eye and picture plane.
2. In perspective projection the projectors are _________ to each other and

________ to picture plane.
a) parallel, perpendicular
b) not parallel, inclined
c) parallel, inclined
d) not parallel, perpendicular
Answer: b
392
Explanation: In perspective projection the projectors are not parallel to each other and
inclined to picture plane. In orthographic view the projector are parallel to each other and
perpendicular to plane of projection.
3. In perspective projection, the horizontal plane in which the object is assumed

to be situated is called ______________
a) horizontal plane
b) picture plane
c) ground plane
d) auxiliary ground plane
Answer: c
Explanation: In perspective projection, the horizontal plane in which the object is assumed
to be situated is called ground plane. And the imaginary plane is at the level of the eye
above the ground plane and at right angles to the picture plane is called horizontal plane.
4. In perspective projection, the point where the eye of the observer is located
while viewing the object is called ____________
a) ground point
b) horizon point
c) center of vision
d) station point
Answer: d
Explanation: In perspective projection, the point where the eye of the observer is located
while viewing the object is called station point and the distance of the station point from the
picture plane, when taken equal to about twice the greatest dimension of the object gives
the good view in the perspective.
5. In perspective projection, the point in which the perpendicular axis pierces the
picture plane and lies on horizon line is called _____________
a) ground line
b) horizon line
c) center of vision
d) station line
Answer: c
Explanation: In perspective projection, the point in which the perpendicular axis pierces the
picture plane and lies on horizon line is called center of vision. And the line in which the
horizon plane intersects the picture plane is called horizon line. It is parallel to ground line.
393
6. In perspective projection, the imaginary plane is at the level of the eye above
the ground plane and at right angles to the picture plane is called
______________
a) horizontal plane
b) picture plane
c) ground plane
Answer: a
Explanation: In perspective projection, the imaginary plane is at the level of the eye above
the ground plane and at right angles to the picture plane is called horizontal plane. And the
horizontal plane in which the object is assumed to be situated is called ground plane.
7. In perspective projection, the imaginary vertical plane which passes through

the station point and the center of vision. It contains the perpendicular axis. It is
perpendicular to both the picture plane and ground plane. It is called
____________
a) central plane
b) picture plane
c) ground plane
Answer: a
Explanation: In perspective projection, the imaginary vertical plane which passes through
the station point and the center of vision. It contains the perpendicular axis. It is
perpendicular to both the picture plane and ground plane. It is called central plane.
8. In perspective projection, the line drawn through the station point and
perpendicular to the picture plane is sometimes called the line of sight or axis of
vision is called _________
a) ground line
b) horizon line
c) perpendicular line
d) station line
Answer: c
Explanation: In perspective projection, the line drawn through the station point and
perpendicular to the picture plane is sometimes called the line of sight or axis of vision is
called perpendicular line.
394
9. In perspective projection, the horizontal plane placed above the horizon plane
on which the top view of the object and of the perspective elements is projected
is called ____________
a) horizontal plane
b) picture plane
c) ground plane
Answer: d
Explanation: In perspective projection, the horizontal plane placed above the horizon plane
on which the top view of the object and of the perspective elements is projected is called
auxiliary ground plane.
10. In which method, points on the perspective are obtained by projecting the top
view and either the front view or the side view of visual rays?
a) Watching method
b) Vanishing point method
c) Visual-ray method
d) Perspective method
Answer: c
Explanation: In visual-ray method, points on the perspective are obtained by projecting the
top view and either the front view or the side view of visual rays. In addition to the top view
of the visual rays, use of vanishing points of straight lines is made in Vanishing point
method.
11. In addition to the top view of the visual rays, use of vanishing points of
straight lines is made in this method. What is this method?
a) Watching method
b) Vanishing point method
c) Visual-ray method
d) Perspective method
Answer: b
Explanation: In visual-ray method, points on the perspective are obtained by projecting the
top view and either the front view or the side view of visual rays. In addition to the top view
of the visual rays, use of vanishing points of straight lines is made in Vanishing point
method.
12. In perspective projection, the line in which the horizon plane intersects the
picture plane is called ______________ and it is parallel to ground line.
395
a) ground line
b) horizon line
c) center of vision
d) station line
Answer: d
Explanation: In perspective projection, the line in which the horizon plane intersects the
picture plane is called horizon line. It is parallel to ground line. And the point in which the
perpendicular axis pierces the picture plane and lies on horizon line is called center of
vision.
Types of Perspective
1. When an object has its one or more faces parallel to the picture plane, its
perspective is called ___________ perspective also called one point perspective.
a) parallel
b) oblique
c) vanishing
d) angular
Answer: a
Explanation: When an object has its one or more faces parallel to the picture plane, its
perspective is called parallel perspective also called one point perspective as the edges
converge to a single vanishing point of the parallel faces.
2. When an object has its two faces inclined to the picture plane, its perspective
is called _________ perspective also called two point perspectives.
a) parallel
b) oblique
c) vanishing
d) angular
Answer: d
Explanation: When an object has its two faces inclined to the picture plane, its perspective
is called angular perspective also called two point perspectives as the edges of the object
converge to two vanishing points.
3. When an object has its three faces inclined to the picture plane, its perspective
is called _________ perspective also called 3 point perspective.
a) parallel
396
b) oblique
c) vanishing
d) angular
Answer: b
Explanation: When an object has its three faces inclined to the picture plane, its
perspective is called oblique perspective also called 3 point perspective as edges of the
object converge to three vanishing points.
4. Vanishing points for all horizontal lines are inclined at 45 degrees to the picture
plane are given special name of _________ points.
a) vanishing
b) far
c) distance
d) distant
Answer: c
Explanation: Vanishing points for all horizontal lines are inclined at 45 degrees to the
picture plane are given special name of distance points on account of their definite
positions. They are equidistant from the center of vision.
5. Which are equidistant from the center of vision?

a) Station point
b) Ground point
c) Distance point
d) Vanishing point
Answer: c
Explanation: The distance points are equidistant from the center of vision the distance of
each from the centre of vision being equal to the distance of the station point from the
picture plane the perspectives of all horizontal lines inclined at 45 degrees to the picture
plane converge to a distance points on the horizon line.
6. The distance of which points from the centre of vision being equal to the
distance of the station point from the picture plane?
a) Station point
b) Ground point
c) Distance point
d) Vanishing point
Answer: c
397
7. The perspectives of all horizontal lines inclined at ___ degrees to the picture
a) 30
b) 45
c) 60
d) 90
Answer: b
8. The perspectives of all horizontal lines inclined at 45 degrees to the picture

plane converge to a distance points on the _______________
a) ground line
b) perpendicular axis
c) horizon line
d) center of vision
Answer: c
9. The perspectives of all horizontal lines inclined at 45 degrees to the picture

plane converge to a ________ points on the horizon line.
a) vanishing
b) far
c) distance
d) distant
Answer: c
398
10. The measuring line or the line of heights is the trace or the line of intersection
with the _________ plane, of the vertical plane containing the point or points
whose heights are to be determined.
a) ground plane
b) picture plane
c) horizontal plane
d) central plane
Answer: b
Explanation: The measuring line or the line of heights is the trace or the line of intersection
with the picture plane, of the vertical plane containing the point or points whose heights are
to be determined. Heights of points lying in different vertical plane can be measured from
their respective line of heights.
11. Heights of points lying in different ___________ can be measured from their
respective line of heights.
a) ground plane
b) picture plane
c) vertical plane
d) central plane
Answer: c
to be determined. Heights of points lying in different vertical plane can be measured from
their respective line of heights.
12. The measuring line or the line of heights is the trace or the line of intersection
with the picture plane, of the ____________ plane containing the point or points
whose heights are to be determined.
a) ground plane
b) picture plane
c) vertical plane
d) central plane
Answer: c
399
to be determined.
Perspectives of Circles and Solids

1. The perspective view of a circle in any type of typical position be_________
a) circle
b) ellipse
c) oval
d) lemniscate
Answer: b
Explanation: The station point in anywhere from the picture plane if a circle is placed in any
angle with the ground plane in the maximum possible critical position the perspective of the
circle will always be ellipse.
2. To draw the perspective view of circle the circle should be enclosed in

_______ and then pointing points and next steps goes on.
a) square
b) rectangle
c) rhombus
d) parallelogram
Answer: a
Explanation: To obtain points on ellipse, the circle should be enclosed in a square and mid
points of sides and intersection of diagonals with the circle are 8 points. Lines are drawn
through these points, parallel to the sides of the square.
3. The perspectives of concentric circles are not concentric __________

a) circles
b) ellipses
c) spheres
d) ellipsoids
Answer: b
Explanation: Perspectives of concentric circles are not concentric ellipses. Though the both
circles give ellipses but inner ellipse might be closer to one of side of outer ellipse and also
might be closer to only one side of outer ellipse.
400
4. Given all are regular cylinders. Identify the one which is in perspective view.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
Explanation: In orthographic projection, isometric projection the parallel faces in the solid
which having same dimensions will show true exact sizes or in proportions and also in
parallel faces but in perspective view the parallel line, edges, faces show differ in
dimensions.
401
5. Given all are cubes. Identify the one which is in perspective view.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
dimensions.
402
6. Curve of any shape can be drawn in perspective by enclosing it in a
___________
a) rectangle
b) cube
c) cylinder
d) square
Answer: a
Explanation: Curve of any shape can be drawn in perspective by enclosing it in a rectangle
and then drawing horizontal and vertical lines through a number of points on the curve
similar to a circle which is enclosed in square.
7. Which of the following is not in a perspective view? All given figures are
regular shapes only.
a)
b)
c)
403
d)
Answer: c
dimensions.
8. The perspective will remain same even if the station point changes.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: The position of the station point is of great important. Upon its position, the
general appearance of the perspective depends. Hence, it should be so located as to view
the object in the best manner.
9. For large objects such as buildings, the station point is usually taken at the eye
level of a person of normal height that is about _____ meters.
a) 2
b) 1
c) 1.5
d) 1.8
Answer: d
Explanation: For large objects such as buildings, the station point is usually taken at the
eye level of a person of about 1.8 meters. For small objects, the station point should be
fixed at such a height which gives good view of top faces and side faces.
10. The position of picture plane relative to the object is independent of size of
perspective view.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
404
Explanation: The perspective will show the object reduced in size when it is placed behind
the picture plane. If the object is moved nearer the picture plane the size of the perspective
will increase and vice versa.
11. The perspective will show the object _________ in size when it is placed
behind the picture plane. If the object is moved nearer the picture plane the size
of the perspective will ___________
a) reduced, decrease
b) reduced, increase
c) increased, reduce
d) increased, increase
Answer: b
Explanation: The perspective will show the object reduced in size when it is placed behind
the picture plane. If the object is moved nearer the picture plane the size of the perspective
will increase and vice versa.
12. The perspective will show the object _________ in size when it is placed in
front of the picture plane. If the object is moved nearer the picture plane the size
of the perspective will ___________
a) reduced, decrease
b) reduced, increase
c) increased, reduce
d) increased, increase
Answer: c
Explanation: The perspective will show the object increased in size when it is placed in
front of the picture plane. If the object is moved nearer the picture plane the size of the
perspective will reduce and vice versa.
Orthographic Reading and Conversion of Views
405
1. Identify the top view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
Explanation: Arrow mark in the given figure shows the direction in which front view is taking
and dotted lines represent hidden edges and lines. For some objects top and bottom are
same and for other both sides view are same and similar for rest.
406
2. Identify the side view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
407
3. Identify the front view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
408
4. Identify the bottom view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
409
5. Identify the front view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
410
6. Identify the back view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
411
7. Identify the left side view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
412
8. Identify the right side view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
413
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
414
a)
b)
c)
415
d)
Answer: c
a)
b)
c)
416
d)
Answer: a
a)
b)
c)
417
d)
Answer: c
13. Identify the left side view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
418
d)
Answer: b
14. Identify the back view of the below given component.
a)
b)
c)
419
d)
Answer: d
Centres of Gravity
1. Which of the following is not the definition of center of gravity?
a) A point on which whole weight if body balances
b) A point through which the resultant of forces of gravity of every particle in body
acts
c) It is also called center of mass
d) The point in the body where the gravity becomes zero
Answer: d
Explanation: The center of gravity is defined as point on which whole weight if body
balances (or) a point through which the resultant of forces of gravity of every particle in
body acts. It is also called center of mass. It may not necessarily lie within the body.
2. The center of gravity of a triangle is on ______

a) centroid
b) circum center
c) in center
d) ortho center
Answer: a
body acts. For planar objects like triangle the center of gravity will be at its centroid.
3. Given steps in procedure to find the center of gravity of the quadrilateral

ABCD. Arrange the steps.
i. Draw lines joining G1 with G2 and G3 with G4.
ii. In given quadrilateral draw diagonal BD and locate centers of gravity G1, G2 of
420
triangles BCD and ABD.
iii. The point of intersection of lines G1G2 and G3G4 gives the center of gravity of
the quadrilateral ABCD.
iv. Similarly draw the diagonal AC and determine the centers of gravity G3, G4 of
triangles ABC and ADC.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, i, ii, iii
Answer: b
Explanation: Given is irregular quadrilateral so first we have to make it to regular simpler
shapes like triangle and the finding center of gravity for those and intersection of forces
acting gives the center of gravity of whole.
4. Given steps in procedure to find the center of gravity of the trapezium ABCD.
Arrange the steps.
i. Join E and F which intersects the line PQ at G. G is center of gravity.
ii. Similarly produce CD to a point F so that FD=AB.
iii. Draw a line joining the midpoints P and Q of the parallel sides AB and DC
respectively.
iv. Produce AB to a point E so that BE=DC.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iv, i, iii
c) iii, iv, ii, i
d) iii, i, ii, iv
Answer: c
Explanation: Given is trapezium and the steps given are for finding the center of gravity in
simple way. In this the parallel lines are extended up to the length of their opposite sides
and intersection of line joining ends and line joining midpoints of parallel lines gives the
center of gravity.
5. The center of gravity of an equilateral triangle is on its circum center.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: For equilateral triangle the centroid and circum center and in center coincides
421
so as the centre of gravity is the centroid for any triangle but here comes center of gravity
also coincides with all other 3 points.
6. The center of gravity of a circular ring will be a ______________

a) line which acts as axis of that ring
b) point anywhere in its inner circumference
c) point at center of ring
d) point on centroid of cross section of ring
Answer: c
body acts. It is also called center of mass. It may not necessarily lie within the body.
7. For symmetrical objects the center of gravity lies at intersection of axes.

a) True
b) False
Answer: a
body acts. It may not necessarily lie within the body.
8. The center of gravity of a right angled triangle having h as height and b as

base length and vertex at 90 degrees is at origin.
a) (h/3,b/3)
b) (b/4,h/4)
c) (b/3,h/3)
d) (h/2,b/2)
Answer: c
Explanation: Given is a right angled triangle having h as height and b as base length and
vertex at 90 degrees is at origin. The center of gravity coincides with the centroid of the
triangle the given answer is the centroid for such a triangle.
9. Which of the following game make use of center of gravity?

a) Caroms
b) Seesaw
c) Tic-Tac-Toe
d) Swing
Answer: b
422
body acts. It is also called center of mass.
10. The center of gravity of a rectangle having h as height and w as width, one of
its vertex is origin and its width is along x-axis is _____________
a) (w/3,h/3)
b) (w/4,h/4)
c) (h/2,w/2)
d) (w/2,h/2)
Answer: d
Explanation: Given a rectangle having h as height and w as width, one of its vertices is
origin and its width is along x-axis which is symmetric planar object and for symmetrical
objects the center of gravity lies at intersection of axes.
Screw Threads
1. Flank is a __________
a) line
b) point
c) distance
d) surface
Answer: d
Explanation: The surface between the crest and the root is called the flank of the thread.
Depth is the distance between the crest and root, measured at right angles to the axis. It is
equal to the half of the difference between the outside and core diameter denoted by D.
2. For a unified triangular external thread the distance between the crest and root
(d) is ____ when pitch (p) is given.
a) d= 0.75 p
b) d= 0.5 p
c) d= 0.61 p
d) d= 0.64 p
Answer: c
Explanation: For a buttress thread the distance between the crest and root (d) is 0.75 times
the pitch, for square thread ‘d’ is 0.5 times the pitch, for a Whitworth external thread ‘d’ is
0.64 times the pitch, for a unified triangular external thread the ‘d’ is 0.61 times the pitch.
423
3. For a Whitworth external thread the distance between the crest and root (d) is
____ when pitch (p) is given.
a) d= 0.75 p
b) d= 0.5 p
c) d= 0.61 p
d) d= 0.64 p
Answer: d
0.64 times the pitch.
4. For buttress thread the angle between the two flanks is ____
a) 55 degrees
b) 47.5 degrees
c) 29 degrees
d) 45 degrees
Answer: d
Explanation: For buttress thread the angle between the two flanks is 45 degrees, for British
association thread the angle between the two flanks is 47.5 degrees, for acme thread the
angle between the two flanks is 29 degrees.
5. For acme thread the angle between the two flanks is ____
a) 55 degrees
b) 47.5 degrees
c) 29 degrees
d) 45 degrees
Answer: c
Explanation: For Whitworth thread the angle between the two flanks is 55 degrees, for
British association thread the angle between the two flanks is 47.5 degrees, for acme
thread the angle between the two flanks is 29 degrees.
6. For a square thread the distance between the crest and root (d) is ____ when
pitch (p) is given.
a) d= 0.86 p
b) d= 0.5 p
c) d= 0.61 p
d) d= 0.64 p
Answer: b
424
7. For a buttress thread the distance between the crest and root (d) is ____ when
pitch (p) is given.
a) d= 0.86 p
b) d= 0.5 p
c) d= 0.64 p
d) d= 0.75 p
Answer: d
8. For Whitworth thread the angle between the two flanks is ____
a) 55 degrees
b) 47.5 degrees
c) 29 degrees
d) 45 degrees
Answer: a
9. For British association thread the angle between the two flanks is ____
a) 55 degrees
b) 47.5 degrees
c) 29 degrees
d) 45 degrees
Answer: b
10. If a nut, when turned in clockwise direction screws on a bolt, the thread is a
left-hand thread.
a) True
425
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: If a nut, when turned in clockwise direction screws on a bolt, the thread is a
right-hand thread; but if it screws off the bolt when turned in the same direction, the thread
is said to be left hand thread.
11. Practical application of the right-hand, left-hand threads is made in a coupler-

nut and turn-buckle.
a) True
b) False
Answer: a
Explanation: The length of a tie-bar can be adjusted by this nut. Looking from right, if the
nut is turned in clockwise direction, the ends of the rods will move closer to each other.
They will move further apart when the nut is turned in anticlockwise direction.
Nut and Washers

1. The angle of chamfer for hexagonal and square nut is ____ degrees as per
standards.
a) 30
b) 45
c) 60
d) 15
Answer: a
Explanation: The upper corners of this nut are rounded-off or chamfered. The chamfering
is generally conical. The angle of chamfer is 30-45 degrees with the base of the nut. Due to
chamfering, an arc is formed on each vertical face and circle is formed on top surface.
2. The angle through which the spanner will have to be turned to get next hold is
____ degrees in case of hexagonal shape.
a) 90
b) 60
c) 30
d) 45
Answer: b
Explanation: The angle through which the spanner will have to be turned to get next hold is
60 degrees in case of hexagonal shape as 360/6 is 60 degrees. In case of square nut the
426
spanner can have better hold but angle is 90 degrees so it is more convenient to use
hexagonal nut.
3. Width across the flats in case of hexagonal nut is___ where D is the diameter
of shank.
a) 2D
b) 1.5D +3mm
c) 1.4D
d) 1.5D
Answer: b
Explanation: Width across the flats in case of hexagonal nut is 1.5D+3mm where D is the
diameter of shank, thickness or height of nut is D itself and distance across diagonally
opposite corners in case of hexagonal nut is 2D.
4. Distance across diagonally opposite corners in case of hexagonal nut is

______ where D is nominal diameter.
a) 2D
b) 1.5D +3mm
c) 1.4D
d) 1.5D
Answer: a
Explanation: Width across the flats in case of hexagonal nut is 1.5D+3mm where D is the
diameter of shank, thickness or height of nut is D itself and distance across diagonally
opposite corners in case of hexagonal nut is 2D.
5. What is the name of the nut which is a hexagonal nut with a washer?
a) Dome nut
b) Wing nut
c) Flanged nut
d) Cap nut
Answer: c
Explanation: Flanged nut is hexagonal nut with a washer that is a flat circular disc attached
to it. It is thus provided with a larger bearing surface. A bolt can be used in a comparatively
large-size hole with help of this nut. It is widely used in automobiles.
6. What is the name of the nut which is a hexagonal nut provided with a
cylindrical cap?
a) Dome nut
427
b) Wing nut
c) Flanged nut
d) Cap nut
Answer: d
Explanation: Cap nut is a hexagonal nut provided with a cylindrical cap at the top to protect
the end of the bolt from corrosion. It also prevents leakage through the threads. Flanged
nut is hexagonal nut with a washer that is a flat circular disc attached to it.
7. What is the name of the nut which is a cap nut with spherical dome at the top?
a) Dome nut
b) Wing nut
c) Flanged nut
d) Cap nut
Answer: a
Explanation: It is a form of cap nut with spherical dome at top. Flanged nut is hexagonal
nut with a washer that is a flat circular disc attached to it. Cap nut is a hexagonal nut
provided with a cylindrical cap at the top.
8. What is the name of the nut which can be easily operated by the thumb and a
finger?
a) Ring nut
b) Wing nut
c) Cap nut
d) Flanged nut
Answer: b
Explanation: Wing nut can be easily operated by thumb and a finger and is used where it is
required to be adjusted frequently. It is used in a hacksaw. Cap nut is a hexagonal nut
provided with a cylindrical cap at the top.
9. What is the name of the nut which is in form of a ring provided with slots in the
curved surface for c-spanner?
a) Ring nut
b) Wing nut
c) Capstan nut
d) Flanged nut
Answer: a
Explanation: Ring nut is in form of a ring provided with slots in the curved surface for a
428
special C-spanner. These nuts are generally used in pairs, one nut acting as a lock-nut for
the other. Wing nut can be easily operated by the thumb and a finger.
10. What is the outer diameter of washer when nominal diameter of bolt is 5 mm?
a) 13 mm
b) 15 mm
c) 10 mm
d) 12 mm
Answer: a
Explanation: When nominal diameter of bolt is D the thickness of the washer is 0.12D and
outer diameter is 2D+3 mm and inner diameter is D+0.5mm. Here D is 5 mm so 2D+3 mm
= 2 x 5+3= 10+3 = 13 mm.
11. What is the thickness of washer when nominal diameter of bolt is D?

a) 0.12D
b) 0.1D
c) D
d) 0.09D
Answer: a
Explanation: Washer is a cylindrical piece of metal placed below the nut to provide smooth
bearing surface. The thickness of washer when nominal diameter of bolt is D is 0.12D and
outer diameter is 2D+3 mm and inner diameter is D+0.5mm
Locking Arrangements for Nuts

1. Which of the following is not reason for arranging locking nuts?
a) to get rid of slack while vibrations in machines
b) to get rid from the loosing of connected parts
c) for more protection and security
d) to get rid of screwing off the bolts
Answer: c
Explanation: There is always a tendency for the nuts to get slack and to screw off the bolts
slightly. The connected parts might get loose, and lead to serious breakdown. It is,
therefore, desirable to secure the nut in some way so as to prevent it from getting loose.
2. Lock-nut or check-nut is chamfered on ___________

a) upper side
429
b) lower side
c) both sides
d) none sides
Answer: c
Explanation: The lock nut is used along with an ordinary nut. The thread in lock nut
presses against the bottom side of the thread in the bolt. When ordinary nut is held by
spanner, while the lock is turned backwards with another spanner the two nuts are thus
locked tightly against each other.
3. The diameter of the hole in which the split pin is to be put is __________ when
D is the diameter of bolt.
a) 0.12D
b) 0.2D
c) 0.3D
d) 0.4D
Answer: b
Explanation: When D is the diameter of bolt the diameter of the hole in which the split pin is
0.2D approximately, 0.3D is the height of slot made in the nut in which split pin is arranged
and 0.12D is the thickness of the washer.
4. A hexagonal nut with a slot cut half way across it and a cap screw is passed
through clear hole in the upper to lower part. The name of the nut is __________
a) Simmond’s locknut
b) Penn nut
c) Castle nut
d) Sawn nut or wiles nut
Answer: d
Explanation: Sawn nut is a hexagonal nut with a slot cut half way across it and a cap screw
is passed through clear hole in the upper to lower part. On tightening the screw, the friction
between the thread in upper part increases and prevents slacking.
5. _______________________ is a nut in which a collar is provided at the upper

end of the hexagonal nut and a fiber ring is fitted inside it.
b) Penn nut
c) Castle nut
Answer: a
430
Explanation: Simmond’s locknut is a nut in which a collar is provided at the upper end of
the hexagonal nut and a fiber ring is fitted inside it. The internal diameter of ring is less
than the core diameter of the bolt the end of the bolt, on reaching the ring, cuts its own
thread in ring which prevents slacking.
6. _______________ is a nut in which slots are cut in a cylindrical collar provided

on the top of the nut, thus overcoming the disadvantage of slotted nut.
b) Penn nut
c) Castle nut
Answer: c
Explanation: Castle nut is a nut in which slots are cut in a cylindrical collar provided on the
top of the nut, thus overcoming the disadvantage of slotted nut the nuts which are widely
used in automobile and locomotive engines and also in steam engine.
7. A hexagonal nut with slots cut in the upper end of it and through opposite
faces in which slotted pin is inserted is called _________ nut.
b) Slotted nut
c) Castle nut
Answer: b
Explanation: Slotted nut is a hexagonal nut with slots cut in the upper end of it and through
opposite faces in which slotted pin is inserted through the slot which comes in line with the
hole drilled in the bolt and is then opened out at its end.
8. The nut which has a cylindrical grooved collar at its lower end and this collar
fits into a corresponding recess in the adjoining piece is named as.
b) Grooved nut
c) Castle nut
Answer: b
Explanation: Grooved nut is a nut which has a cylindrical grooved collar at its lower end
and this collar fits into a corresponding recess in the adjoining piece. A set-screw is
inserted through the nearest face of the piece. The dog-end of the set-screw enters the
groove and prevents slackening of the nut.
431
9. The ________ nut in which small pin is screwed in the piece adjoining the nut
so that it touches one of the faces of the hexagonal nut which is sufficient to
prevent its getting loose.
a) Grooved nut
b) Penn nut
c) Castle nut
d) Ring nut
Answer: b
Explanation: The Penn nut in which small pin is screwed in the piece adjoining the nut so
that it touches one of the faces of the hexagonal nut which is sufficient to prevent its getting
loose. But it becomes an obstruction if the nut is required to be tightened further through a
small angle.
10. The nuts which are widely used in automobile and locomotive engines and
also in steam engine are _________ nuts.
b) Penn nut
c) Castle nut
Answer: c
Explanation: Castle nut is a nut in which slots are cut in a cylindrical collar provided on the
top of the nut, thus overcoming the disadvantage of slotted nut the nuts which are widely
used in automobile and locomotive engines and also in steam engine
Bolts
1. Which of the following is not the method to prevent rotation of a bolt while
screwing a nut on or off it?
a) By keeping a square neck
b) By providing a snug
c) By keeping a lock nut
d) By inserting a pin in shank
Answer: c
Explanation: The connected parts might get loose, and lead to serious breakdown a lock
nut in some way so as to prevent it from getting loose but not to prevent rotation of a bolt
while screwing a nut on or off.
432
2. Which bolt is commonly used in bearing for shafts?
a) Hook bolt
b) Eye-bolt
c) T-headed bolt
d) Square-headed bolt
Answer: d
Explanation: Square-headed bolt is commonly used in bearing for shafts and this bolt head
is chamfered at its upper end. The hook bolt is used when it is not possible to drill a hole in
the piece adjoining the bolt-head.
3. Which bolt is commonly used in big ends of connecting rods, eccentrics?

a) Hook bolt
b) Eye-bolt
c) T-headed bolt
d) Cheese-headed bolt
Answer: d
Explanation: This bolt is used when the space for accommodating the bolt-head is
comparatively limited, or where the use of a spanner for holding it is to be avoided. It is
commonly used in big ends of connecting rods etc.
4. Which bolt is used in machine-tool tables in which T-slots are cut to

accommodate the T-heads?
a) Hook bolt
b) Eye-bolt
c) T-headed bolt
d) Countersunk-headed bolt
Answer: c
Explanation: This bolt is used in machine-tool tables in which T-slots are cut to
accommodate the T-heads. This is often made use of in gland and stuffing box
arrangement in boiler mountings such as stop valve, feed-check valve etc.
5. The bolt which is used where the head of a bolt must not project above the
surface of the connected piece is ____________
a) Stud-bolt
b) Tap-bolt or cap screw
c) T-headed bolt
Answer: d
433
Explanation: Countersunk-headed bolt is used where the head of a bolt must not project
above the surface of the connected piece; this form of the bolt is used. It may be provided
with a snug or a neck square cross-section.
6. The bolt which is used when it is not possible to drill a hole in the piece
adjoining the bolt-head is ____________
a) Hook bolt
c) T-headed bolt
Answer: a
Explanation: This bolt passes through a hole in one piece only, while the other piece is
gripped by the hook-shaped bolt-head. It is used when it is possible to drill a hole in the
piece adjoining the bolt-head. The square neck prevents rotation of the bolt.
7. The bolt which has a circular ring of rectangular cross-section as its head,
which can be conveniently held to prevent its rotation is _______
a) Hook bolt
b) Eye-bolt
c) T-headed bolt
d) Stud bolt
Answer: b
Explanation: Eye-bolt has a circular ring of rectangular cross-section as its head, which can
be conveniently held to prevent its rotation. The hook bolt is used when it is not possible to
drill a hole in the piece adjoining the bolt-head.
8. Which bolt is used as an appliance for lifting heavy machines?

a) Hook bolt
b) Eye-bolt
c) Lifting eye-bolt
d) Cup-headed bolt
Answer: c
Explanation: Lifting eye-bolt is used as an appliance for lifting heavy machines. It is
screwed inside a threaded hole on the top of the machine, directly above its centre of
gravity. The hook bolt is used when it is not possible to drill a hole in the piece adjoining
the bolt-head.
434
9. Which bolt is mainly used in marine shaft couplings?
a) Headless tapered bolt
c) Lifting eye-bolt
Answer: a
Explanation: Headless tapered bolt has no head and has shank which is tapered is mainly
used in marine shaft couplings. Lifting eye-bolt is used as an appliance for lifting heavy
machines. Tap-bolt or cap screw is used as a screw that is when it is not possible to
accommodate the nut.
10. Which bolt is used as a screw that is when it is not possible to accommodate
the nut?
c) Stud-bolt or Stud
Answer: b
Explanation: This bolt is used as a screw that is when it is not possible to accommodate
the nut. It is used as a screw that is screwed into a threaded hole in a casting instead of a
nut. Frequent insertion or removal of the tap-bolt is likely to damage the threads in the
casting.
11. Bolt which consists of only a cylindrical shank threaded at both ends is called
_________
c) Stud-bolt or Stud
Answer: c
Explanation: Bolt which consists of only a cylindrical shank threaded at both ends is called
Stud-bolt or Stud. And some having collared are called collar studs and stud with middle
portion made square in section facilitates gripping of the stud while screwing or unscrewing
it.
12. The _____________ bolt is often made use of in gland and stuffing box
435
c) T-headed bolt
Answer: c
Explanation: This bolt is used in machine-tool tables in which T-slots are cut to
accommodate the T-heads. This is often made use of in gland and stuffing box
Riveted Joints
1. What type of failure will occur when rivets are smaller than necessary?
a) Tearing of plate between the holes
b) Tearing of plate between the edges
c) Shearing of rivet
d) Crushing of plate
Answer: c
Explanation: Shearing of the rivet takes place if the diameter of the rivet is smaller than
necessary. Tearing of the plate between the edges of the plate and rivet-hole takes place if
the hole is too near the edge.
2. The necessary diameter (d) for thickness of plates (t) is ______

a) d = 6*√t
b) d =4*√t
c) d =6*√2t
d) d =4*√2t
Answer: a
Explanation: To prevent failure, the joint should be carefully designed. For elementary
work, suitable values of the rivet diameter, positions of holes etc. for a given thickness of
the plates the given empirical formulae is used.
3. The thickness of the fullering tool is about the ___________ as that of the
plates.
a) double
b) same
c) half
d) one third
Answer: b
436
Explanation: To prevent leakage through the joint, the plates are firmly formed together by
caulking or fullering processes. Both the processes are generally performed with the aid of
pneumatic power. The thickness of the fullering tool is about the same as that of the plates.
4. Tearing of the plate between the holes is taken when

________________________
a) they are near to each other
b) the hole is too near the edge
c) diameter of rivet is too small
d) rivet and plate is of different metals
Answer: a
Explanation: Tearing of the plate between the holes takes place if they are very near to
each other. Tearing of the plate between the edges of the plate and rivet-hole takes place if
the hole is too near the edge.
5. Tearing of the plate between the edges of the plate and rivet-hole takes place
when ____________
a) they are near to each other
b) the hole is too near the edge
c) diameter of rivet is too small
d) rivet and plate is of different metals
Answer: b
Explanation: Tearing of the plate between the edges of the plate and rivet-hole takes place
if the hole is too near the edge. Tearing of the plate between the holes takes place if they
are very near to each other.
6. In a lap joint, if the plates are connected to each other when the joint is made
with only one row of rivets then it is called double-riveted lap joint.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: For a lap joint, if the plates are made to connect using only one row of rivets
then it is called single-riveted lap joint. A joint is said to be double-riveted, triple riveted etc.
accordingly to the number of rows of rivets in it.
7. A joint is said to be double-riveted, triple riveted etc. accordingly to the number

of sheets used.
a) True
437
b) False
Answer: b
then it is called single-riveted lap joint. A joint is said to be double-riveted, triple riveted etc.
accordingly to the number of rows of rivets in it.
8. Width (L) of overlap of sheets is equal to ________ when d is the diameter of

rivet in case of single-riveted lap joint.
a) 2d
b) 3d
c) 4d
d) 5d
Answer: b
then it is called single-riveted lap joint. The width of overlap L is equal to 3d when d is the
diameter of rivet.
9. In zigzag lap joint formation when P is the pitch between the rivets, the
distance between the rows of rivets should not be less than _____
a) 0.6P
b) 0.8P
c) P
d) 1.2P
Answer: a
Explanation: When two or more rows of rivets are required, rivets may be arranged in chain
or zigzag formations. In chain formation the rivets are arranged directly opposite to each
other but in zigzag they are staggered.
10. In butt joint when one strap is used the thickness varies between _______ to
________ (T is the thickness of plate to be connected).
a) T, 1.125T
b) 0.7T, 0.8T
c) 0.5T, T
d) T, 1.5T
Answer: a
Explanation: In a butt joint, edges of the plates to be connected are butted against each
other and the joint between them is covered by butt-plates or butt-straps on one or both
438
sides. At least two rows of rivets, one in each connected plate, are necessary to make the
joint.
11. In butt joint when two straps is used the thickness varies between _______ to
________ (T is the thickness of plate to be connected).
a) T, 1.125T
b) 0.7T, 0.8T
c) 0.5T, T
d) T, 1.5T
Answer: b
Explanation: In a butt joint, edges of the plates to be connected are butted against each
other and the joint between them is covered by butt-plates or butt-straps on one or both
sides. At least two rows of rivets, one in each connected plate, are necessary to make the
joint.
12. The flat ends of a boiler are prevented from bulging out and are strengthened
by means of _________
a) connection of plates at right angles
b) gusset stays
c) welding
d) riveting
Answer: b
Explanation: Gusset stay is a plate which connects the flat end and the cylindrical shell of a
boiler. Lengths of angle-section are used to make the joints. The flat ends of a boiler are
prevented from bulging out and are strengthened by means of these stays.
Welded Joints
1. When welding of two metal parts are carried out by heating the parts at joint up
to plastic condition and then joined together by applying external mechanical
pressure it is named as Fusion welding.
a) True
b) False
Answer: b
Explanation: When welding of two metal parts are carried out by heating the parts at joint
up to plastic condition and then joined together by applying external mechanical pressure it
is named as Pressure welding or forge welding.
439
2. In _________ welding heavy current (50,000A) is passed through the joint
which gets melt and welding is under external pressure.
a) Arc welding
b) Gas welding
c) Forge welding
d) Spot welding
Answer: d
Explanation: In this welding heavy current (50,000A) is passed through the joint which gets
melt. The welding is completely under external pressure. Spot welding, seam welding and
flash butt welding are examples of pressure resistance welding.
3. In which of the following welding only fusion welding takes place?

a) Seam welding
b) Flash butt welding
c) Spot welding
d) Arc welding
Answer: d
Explanation: Fusion welding is a process of welding by local fusion with or without use of a
filler metal. The most commonly used fusion welding processes are gas welding and arc
welding. The flame temperature varies from 2600 to 3200 degrees depends on fuel gases.
4. The symbol for weld type fillet is __________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
Explanation: A welded joint is shown on a drawing by means of a symbol which specifies
440
the form of weld and a bent arrow and a reference line indicating the location of the weld.
The symbols shown here are recommended by the Bureau of Indian Standards.
5. The symbol for seam welding is __________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
6. The symbol for weld type U butt is __________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
441
7. The symbol for weld type V-butt is _________
a)
b)
c)
d)
8. The symbol for weld type double-V butt is ________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: c
442
9. The symbol for spot welding is ________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: d
10. The symbol for weld type double U- butt is __________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
443
11. The symbol for weld type Bevel butt is ____________
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: a
12. The symbol for edge welding is _________
a)
b)
c)
444
d)
Answer: d
Computer Aided Drawing

1. The commands Erase, Copy, Mirror, Trim, Extend, Break etc belongs to which
tool bar?
a) Layer tool bar
b) Style tool bar
c) Modify tool bar
d) Draw tool bar
Answer: c
Explanation: The commands Erase, Copy, Mirror, Trim, Extend, Break, Join, Scale, Array
etc belongs to ‘Modify tool bar’. The commands Donut, Block, Spline, Hatch, Rectangle,
Ellipse, Polygon, and Arc etc belong to ‘Draw tool bar’.
2. The commands Donut, Block, Spline, Polygon, and Arc etc belong to which
tool bar?
a) Layer tool bar
b) Style tool bar
c) Modify tool bar
d) Draw tool bar
Answer: d
Explanation: The commands Erase, Copy, Mirror, Trim, Extend, Break, Join, Scale, Array
etc belongs to ‘Modify tool bar’. The commands Donut, Block, Spline, Hatch, Rectangle,
Ellipse, Polygon, and Arc etc belong to ‘Draw tool bar’.
3. The command which works on two lines or a single poly line to create a
beveled edge is __________
a) Chamfer
b) Fillet
445
c) Stretch
d) Extend
Answer: a
Explanation: Chamfer works on two lines or a single poly line to create a beveled edge.
Fillet is used to create a round corner between two lines. Stretch command can either
lengthen entities or shorten them and thus their shapes.
4. The command which is used to create a round corner between two lines is
__________
a) Chamfer
b) Fillet
c) Stretch
d) Extend
Answer: b
Explanation: Fillet is used to create a round corner between two lines. Chamfer works on
two lines or a single poly line to create a beveled edge. Stretch command can either
lengthen entities or shorten them and thus their shapes.
5. The command ‘Oops’ is used to ______________

a) create one or more copies of selected objects at another location
b) creates mirror image of selected objects about specified line
c) retrieves all objects erased by the last erase
d) deletes the selected entities
Answer: c
Explanation: The command ‘Oops’ is used to retrieves all objects erased by the last erase.
Mirror is used to creates mirror image of selected objects about specified line. Command
copy creates one or more copies of selected objects at another location.
6. The command ‘pedit’ is used for _______________

a) erases a portion of line, arc, circle or a 2D poly line between two selected
points
b) reverses the effects of a series of previously used commands
c) breaking a poly line into individual segments
d) editing of poly line properties
Answer: d
Explanation: The command ‘pedit’ is used for editing of poly line properties. Command ‘U’
is used for reverses the effects of a series of previously used commands. Command
446
‘break’ is used for erases a portion of line, arc, circle or a 2D poly line between two
selected points.
7. The command ‘break’ is used for ____________________

points
Answer: a
Explanation: The command ‘break’ is used for erases a portion of line, arc, circle or a 2D
poly line between two selected points. Command ‘pedit’ is used for editing of poly line
properties. Command ‘U’ is used for reverses the effects of a series of previously used
commands.
8. The command ‘U’ is used for _____________________

points
Answer: b
Explanation: The command ‘U’ is used for reverses the effects of a series of previously
used commands. Command ‘pedit’ is used for editing of poly line properties. Command
‘break’ is used for erases a portion of line, arc, circle or a 2D poly line between two
selected points.
9. The command ‘Explode’ is used for _________________________

points
Answer: c
Explanation: The command ‘Explode’ is used for breaking a poly line into individual
segments. Command ‘pedit’ is used for editing of poly line properties. Command ‘U’ is
used for reverses the effects of a series of previously used commands.
447
10. The command which is used to set a new coordinate system by shifting the
working XY plane to be desired location is?
a) 3DFACE
b) VPOINT
c) UCS
d) ELEV
Answer: c
Explanation: UCS is used to set a new coordinate system by shifting the working XY plane
to be desired location. 3DFACE is used for making planar unmeshed surfaces that have
three or four sides. VPOINT is used to set the viewpoint in 3D space for viewing the 3D
models.
11. The command which is used for making planar unmeshed surfaces that have
three or four sides is ______________
a) 3DFACE
b) VPOINT
c) UCS
d) ELEV
Answer: a
Explanation: 3DFACE is used for making planar unmeshed surfaces that have three or four
sides. VPOINT is used to set the viewpoint in 3D space for viewing the 3D models. UCS is
used to set a new coordinate system by shifting the working XY plane to be desired
location.
12. The command which is used to set the viewpoint in 3D space for viewing the
3D models is _____________
a) 3DFACE
b) VPOINT
c) UCS
d) ELEV
Answer: b
Explanation: VPOINT is used to set the viewpoint in 3D space for viewing the 3D models.
3DFACE is used for making planar unmeshed surfaces that have three or four sides. UCS
is used to set a new coordinate system by shifting the working XY plane to be desired
location.
13. The command which is used to set elevation and thickness properties for 2D
wireframe objects such as line, point, circle, polygon, arc is ____________
448
a) 3DFACE
b) VPOINT
c) UCS
d) ELEV
Answer: d
Explanation: ELEV is used to set elevation and thickness properties for 2D wireframe
objects such as line, point, circle, polygon and arc. 3DFACE is used for making planar
unmeshed surfaces that have three or four sides.
14. The command which identifies the points on drawing entities that are visible
on screen is ________ and this option allows the user to pick-up the points very
accurately with respect to drawing displayed.
a) OSNAP
b) TABSURF
c) SNAP
d) GRID
Answer: a
Explanation: The command which identifies the points on drawing entities that are visible
on screen is OSNAP. This option allows the user to pick-up the points very accurately with
respect to drawing displayed.
449

Engineering: Graphics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engineering: Graphics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engineering: Graphics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

engineering

SCAN. STUDY. SCORE.

4. If an object lies in third quadrant, its position with respect to reference

15.Axonometric, oblique and perspective sketches show objects in a _______

16.If a client of yours is having difficulty visualizing a design, what type of

26. Non-isometric lines are located and sketched how?

A) They are drawn parallel to the isometric axis.

a) Perpendicular Projection b) Oblique Projection c) Aesthetic Projection

d) Angular Projection Ans. B)

a) Object b) Hidden c) Center d) Phantom Ans. C)

a) in its true size b) as a line or edge c) foreshortened d) as an oblique

36. Architectural drafters generally prefer to use ________ drawings to help

a) isometric b) orthographic c) auxiliary d) perspective Ans. D)

a) isometric b) dimetric c) trimetric d) multiview Ans.B)

38. This type of section is limited by a break line:

D. Half section Ans.C)

with an arrowhead or dot:

D. point of reference Ans.C)

A. A cutting plane line

D. Lines and arrows Ans.B)

A. Foundation beam detail sections

43. The ________ is a standard element of a section view in a technical drawing.

A. Cutting Plane line

C. Material hatch pattern

D. All of the above Ans. D)

44. Hidden lines are drawn as

(a) dashed narrow lines

(b) dashed wide lines

(c) long-dashed dotted wide line

(d) long-dashed double dotted wide line Ans. A)

(a) visible edges

(b) hidden edges

(d) pitch circle of gears Ans: (B)

(d) Sф80 Ans: (d)

V.P, then the sectional view of the object is obtained in

(a) top view

(b) front view

(c) left side view

(d) right side view Ans: (a)

A) each view is a 3-D pictorial image

B) based on orthographic projection

C) at least two views of the object

D) views are defined by planes of projection Ans.D)

A) orthographic and perspective

B) oblique and axonometric

C) perspective and oblique

D) isometric and orthographic Ans.B)

50. Inclined planes in a three-view drawing will appear as:

A) two surfaces and one edge

B) two edges and one surface

D) foreshortened in each view Ans.A)

a. above and reference line b. both above reference line

c. both below reference line d. below and above reference line

c. According to the planar views d. Parallel to the frontal plane

53. In isometric drawings;

a. Two axes are perpendicular

c. All faces are unequally distorted

d. None of the above

54. Which type of line is particular to section drawings